Home

Dodge 2007 LX Magnum User's Manual

1. EIER LE H 1395 ote Load Floor Partially Folded Load Floor Fully Folded A UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 125 Rollaway Tonneau Cover If Equipped The removable rollaway tonneau cover mounts in the cargo area behind the top of the rear seats EE 81100 The tonneau cover rolls away neatly inside its housing when not in use You can also remove the tonneau cover from the vehicle to make more room in the cargo area The tonneau cover when extended covers the cargo area to keep items out of sight Notches in the trim panels near the liftgate opening secure the extended tonneau cover in place 126 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 7 7 8 0 To install the tonneau cover position it in the vehicle so Then insert the spring loaded post on the opposite end that the flat side of the housing faces upward Then of the tonneau cover housing into the remaining front insert either the left or the right spring loaded post attachment point located on the ends of the tonneau cover housing into l h handl
2. N TIU NT TDI UU Pa a hh Wr PAP eS ee prr n ae ae se ing the lly 1Ca The r rotate the sun v d the mirro position to guard aga ition posi isor downward and sw 1rror ing a mirror t the mirror to move Use the center off identally mov t acc Ins isor To use d the sun v 1S On ty Mirrors tym ted Van ted vani illumina An After selecting a m direction you wan ippe If Equ ina Defrost Illum in the same r move the knob 1rro tion i r or off pos ht mirro r rig trim panel next to the power door lock switch The power m 1rro knob selects the left m ivated whenever you turn on the Rear Window These m 1s act A rotary Iver
3. Er I eins EE e 123 45 6 a a a a a LD p TD ER ee 5 555 55555 5655 a Serena Tira ca oo Er tira a SS SS SNNT Tiri a Te NANNSNNENNNN NR Rn nnn DIDI MM NN IR trarre ENNIUS er EET oo Tilt SSS ee 6 SSS ee tira ESS SSSA En n nn eee eee eee l4 E 7 eae fiet DSSS NR Hn nn n TOSSES SSSA ee IDINMMMXMAMMMNNENANI IR nnn NEN ee eee
4. hit r ta Raising The DVD Screen Accessing The VES 184 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M System Activation NOTE Your vehicle s radio must be on and in satellite mode when the activation process takes place To activate your Sirius Satellite Radio service call the toll free number 888 539 7474 or visit the Sirius web site at www sirius com Please have the following informa tion available when activating your system 1 The Electronic Serial Number Sirius Identification Number ESN SID 2 Credit card information 3 Your Vehicle Identification Number Electronic Serial Number Sirius Identification Number ESN SID The Electronic Serial Number Sirius Identification Num ber is needed to activate your Sirius Satellite Radio system To access the ESN SID refer to the following steps ESN SID Access With REF Radios With the ignition switch in the ACCESSORY position and the radio OFF press the CD Eject and Time buttons pm Remote Control Location SATELLITE RADIO IF EQUIPPED Satellite radio uses direct satellite to receiver broadcast ing technology to provide clear digital sound coast to coast The subscription service provider is Sirius Satel lite Radio This service offers over 100 channels of music sports news entertainment and programming for
5. 2 1 TIME Button CD Mode Press this button to change the display from elapsed CD playing time to time of day The time of day will display for 5 seconds RW FF CD Mode Press and hold the FF Fast Forward and the CD player will begin to fast forward until FF is released The RW Reverse button works in a similar manner RND SET Button Random Play Button CD Mode Press this button while the CD is playing to activate Random Play This feature plays the selections on the compact disc in random order to provide an interesting change of pace Press the SEEK button to move to the next randomly selected track Press and hold the FF button to fast forward through the tracks Release the FF button to stop the fast forward feature If the RW button is pressed the current track will reverse to the beginning of the track and begin playing SEEK Button CD Mode Press the right side of the SEEK button for the next track on the CD Press the left side of the button to return to the beginning of the current track or return to the beginning of the previous track if the CD is within the first 10 seconds of the current selection MUTE Button CD Mode Press the MUTE button to cancel the sound from the speakers MUTE will display Press the MUTE button a second time and the sound from the speakers will return Rotating the volume control or turning OFF the ignition will also
6. 335 OTHE are ye aes 99 Garage Door Opener HomeLink9 110 High Beam Low Beam Select Switch 99 Gas Cap Fuel Filler Cap cessie te sess 265 306 Lights On Reminder d oed orto Ber 98 Gasoline Clean AW i us is 262 On With Wipers 24 4 see dr eE SS AES 27 105 535010716170817 cco 261 ccc o AT 99 Gasoline Reformulated 262 OWC sls Anca 96 Gauges Tinie 1261837 aa os 97 Coolant Temperature 245 09e 3 tego 178 Heed 308i oan ee oa os S ned por 92 PUCK r 140 IEEE x 220 2 2285399 E d dH Eu ROS 191 0 99 4 7 96 003 0 7 0 900 0 0 11 INDEX 388 1700671077017075 100 Intermittent Wipers Delay Wipers 102 201 1170 0006 RP Pm 4 Jack LOCATON sso 3 26 3o roseo OY eR 4 287 Jack 3661906071 sieg 2c ose 79 OPE edd ved es 289 Jacking Instructions 454444454 asami 289 IMO UNS a3 e 9 eos 294 Key LTOPTOBURBIIS a cp det tob a p er on 14 Key REDON e xa 96 5 ewes 14 Key Sentry Immobilizer 13 RED ISSIDIDUSE eorura eee eas 12 Keyless ENUY Systemi xs ase v 3o de dei RC 17 i
7. 324 Selection of Coolant Antifreeze 323 350 351 Cruise Control Speed Control 106 Cargo Management System 122 CGO NS MCT 4x saat RP ed bd 127 Rollaway TONNEAU Cover 244424 canines 125 Tri Fold Load Floor 123 Waterproof Liner 127 Caso Tes DOWNS ep Se REC 128 Cassette Tape and Player Maintenance 189 Catalytic Converter uaceses ev ope teeny dacs 315 CD Compact Disc Player 161 167 Cellar PRONE auae sch Re Y oed i 70 Chains Di 2345929 xa bee oe es 252 Changing A Flat Tie aces ice de ers 286 Chart Tre SANS 644 4 ens Pos 237 Check Engine Light Malfunction Indicator bio TR 307 Child Restraint wann esses sms 51 52 53 55 56 Child Restraint Tether Anchors 54 55 Child Safety LOCKS a Sacs ade 3 13989 RR EIE RU 25 Clean Air Gasoline cacao ten boas peas ae oe 262 Cleaning MU oo E 334 Cate CORO us ous e en 191 CIOER 664 S45 eae i dU EE RC RUM IR 162 168 179 en INDEX 385 Electrical Power Outlets 118 Electronic Speed Control Cruise Control 106 Electronic Stability Program ESP 233 Electronic Throttle Control Warning Light 141
8. 390 Passing Light sss ss sosina B uere d 9 Change Interval sissies 311 Pedals 2dHSgBE sessed 105 COCHIN 424204455 Red oe 309 310 Personal Settings 94 939 5 9 309 0 9 4 8 3 156 Iupsuek cache pe eeu yh 6295 SPP Neve 20 71 Pele 9 vo oh betes eee ee e 58 D o SECS eae eG saved 3 sone COE uacua sh iiaia dot 70 DEP 2 12994 522929233 22992 95595 314 351 Phone Hands Free UConnect 70 Filter Disposal are 313 Placard Tire and Loading Information 240 Identilicanon LOgO co cae v Eae oss 312 Power Materials Added tO 5 25 sacs cisco grad a 313 j i Me T 226 Recommendation 3110 Distribution Center Fuses 337 5171178006 CANIS 313 Door LOCKS 3 5 edet do bos 23 466050 7 DDT senda s 320 MUOG ED 69 Onboard Diagnostic System 306 307 Outlet Auxiliary Electrical Outlet 118 Opener Garage Door HomeLink 110 co D P Pm 90 Operating Precautions a2 9 306 cop SDE IT 229 319 Outside Rearview Mirrors 68 Steering CNCCKING ow 919 6107787 Geeta aoe ees os TRAP ER SS ES 216 501170807 Svcs 115 Overhead Console 455 o e 109 ln E 27 Overheating Engine to 54 v oa
9. 59 Occupant RESME asas Es Comes 2 209 3 9 98 bos 33 Octane Rating Gasoline Fuel 261 Load Leveling 5ysteny serseran 131 Loading VENICE s sors doe die po UR sss 267 268 orn PME 268 Du RTT 240 LOCKS 229949 a PERS qe Md ed mad 22 Auto UMOE seis a eu iaraa eG eee es 25 Could 1 7016611000 23229929 99290220 3 25 DOOL RIP 22 Tower 123007 quia dee 29 Low Tire Pressure System 254 Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren LO 1 Us sus esed ede coe tae dvi e 54 55 001109110220077 e worden e iro ee pos hg Sedo 320 Luggage Rack Roof Rack 129 Lumbar SUPPO 92 Maintenance Free Battery 316 Maintenance Procedures 309 Maintenance Schedule 354 5206006 A MP PPP 307 501120016 D sacos ed der nS OR iieii 357 Malfunction Indicator Light Check Engine 147 307 Manual Service 322994 ms ox RE oC 377 Nn INDEX 1 sees sees hee ewes HO Panic AM EP tibertai 20 IID oS bape en eas Seve ee he 140 Parking Brake eere 225 On eee SPA PEE lt Be 309 351 Parkins On LU 24246 5 5e9oe esos oon 225 A ocium
10. ee site rte enue et Center Console Power Outlet NOTE If desired the power outlet next to the ash receiver tray if equipped can be converted by your authorized dealer to provide power with the ignition switch in the LOCK position 8 eme on Front Power Outlet 120 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Electrical Outlet Use With Engine Off CAUTION Many accessories that can be plugged in draw power from the vehicle s battery even when not in use i e cellular phones etc Eventually if plugged in long enough the vehicle s battery will discharge suffi ciently to degrade battery life and or prevent engine starting Accessories that draw higher power i e coolers vacuum cleaners lights etc will degrade the bat tery even more quickly Only use these intermit tently and with greater caution After the use of high power draw accessories or long periods of the vehicle not being started with acces sories still plugged in the vehicle must be driven a sufficient length of time to allow the alternator to recharge the vehicle s battery Power outlets are designed for accessory plugs only Do not hang any type of accessory or accessory bracket from the plug Improp
11. free a me T5 ee HOPED n n nn ee rr rey E ee PEPEES E E E E E E E E 2 E LN S RR Ty Tee I Es 4 To toggle back to the large clock simply press TIME 1 2 3 4 5 6 519530935 A UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 183 VIDEO ENTERTAINMENT SYSTEM SALES CODE XRV IF EQUIPPED The optional VES Video Entertainment System con sists of a DVD player and LCD liquid crystal display screen a battery powered remote control and two head sets The system is located in the center console storage bin under the armrest lid Refer to your VES User s Manual for detailed operating instructions EANAN KASSAN hh PEN III vel 75 E E t Fy E E E
12. 106 Security Alarm Theft Alarm 15 145 Speedometer ua ae crest eed een eos an SE 140 31 39329 7 1111 1 91 INDEX 394 Telescoping Steering Column 104 Temperature Control Automatic ATC 193 Temperature Gauge Engine Coolant 141 285 Tether Anchor Child Restraint 54 Theft Alarm Security Alarm 15 Theft System Security Alarm 15 Tie Down Hooks Cargo waa 842 44 128 111 500671002 COMM xe ERE 104 Tire and Loading Information Placard 240 Tire Identification Number TIN 29 Tae Mak iux s dee hi ea RISE RO eee 236 Tire Safety Information aci a sede rs mers 236 TMCS Ae eet a a ee eS 61 244 378 Apine Life OF Tires 33 2 s sioe ir a aR RA 250 Air PEON one 3 pedes ohana hee ahs Puedes 244 1187006016 sage Rhos each eae e ee dr 251 lr PC 252 Changing 2 52559 AERA eee eut IRA 286 289 Compact Spare Sos eet epar iare dedica Rr dor end 247 188 1194057085 CENE RS IHR A CR OPEN 286 General Information 244 FIC ped oh ee fed amp 246 Inflation Pressures 4 tine Geos Ha Gok aa EA 245 urna d 208 Automatic Iransmission 209 Engine Fails O Start 9 ve eS TIAE 209 Starting and Operating
13. 208 Starting Procedures idend Re Y dex des 208 oteering Column Controls 4444545 56562460295 9 3 99 linc PC 320 TOWT 9A ROSE EKER YS 220 319 THE ODE 104 Wheel TEE 259 gh Eau BAUR bir os 104 Steering Wheel Mounted Sound System 7 PD 187 ro A P D 122 344 OEE VRE gsc soo Eg dre 198 344 otonng Your Vehicle 425540422 ms nara 344 DUILINOOR 115 501151889868 SIOTASE 239060 E Roe EU 109 Supplemental Restraint System Airbag 41 Synthe Png me Oil 4444 256 REX FESSA ES 313 System Navigation 5 4 2 Geo 4 6 2 qr 0 dt ird t eges 179 156117076097 rr 140 en INDEX 395 Towing Vehicle Behind a Motor Home 282 Thaction Contool usse t oh ey 230 Traction Control Switch 230 1101187 10797177 PPP 270 Cooling Systemi DDS 45er ap r94 neds 281 imis V KM eee ey ae 273 Minimum Requirements 276 Trailer and Tongue Weight 279 VIGNE ES 9 23 8 29 9 3 25 x4 279 Trailer Towing Guide 4 2 dc Rb Rr ee ge ds 273 11011677778100 7 TL 279 TEANSHMSSION C 330 Automatic 2mm 54 bute bene ae 214 219 330 PUM 226685560040 A 092 CMMI Pm 211 Transmitter Battery Service Remote Keyless EY Pm 21
14. Prior to July 2000 tire manufacturers were only required to have 1 number to represent the year in which the tire was manufactured Example 031 could represent the 3rd week of 1981 or 1991 240 STARTING AND OPERATING Tire Loading and Tire Pressure Tire and Loading Information Placard Tire Placard Location an hie SEATING CAPACITY TOTAL 5 FRONT 2 REAR 3 NOTE The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on either the face of the driver s door or the driver s side B r 9914 Pane 2001 3 28088 420163 60 SEE OWNER S MANUAL FOR ADDITIONAL INFORMATION 883 81155923 Tire and Loading Information This placard tells you important information about the 1 number of people that can be carried in the vehicle 2 the total weight your vehicle can carry 3 the tire size designed for your vehicle 8110000 Tire Placard Location 4 the cold tire inflation pressures for the front rear and spare tires E STARTING AND OPERATING 241 Steps for Determining Correct Load Limit 1 Locate the statement The combined weight of occu pants and cargo should never exceed XXX pounds on your vehicle s placard 2 Determine the combined weight of the driver and passengers that will be riding in your vehicle 3 Subtract the combined weight of the driver and pas sengers from XXX kilograms or XXX pounds 4 The resulting figure equals the available amount of cargo and luggage load capaci
15. As an added safety feature your vehicle has been equipped with a tire pressure monitoring system TPMS that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale when one or more of your tires are significantly under inflated Ac cordingly when the low tire pressure telltale illuminates you should stop and check your tires as soon as possible and inflate them to the proper pressure Driving on a significantly under inflated tire causes the tire to over heat and can lead to tire failure Under inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life and may affect the vehicle s handling and stopping ability Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire maintenance and it is the driver s responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure even if under inflation has not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire pressure telltale UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 7 25 Malfunction Indicator Light This light is part of an onboard diagnostic Cw system called OBD The OBD system monitors engine and automatic transmission control sys tems The light will turn on when the key is in the ON position before engine start If the light does not come on when turning the key from OFF to ON have the condition checked promptly Certain conditions such as a loose or missing gas cap poor fuel quality etc may illuminate the light after engine start The vehicle should be serviced if the light stays on thro
16. e e E E 1 12222 Pepsi H Per rere eee ten PIENE i pate E 2 e i m HE BE KERRE 7 niu Ae E e 1 Mn iu Hu ER Ii uu 241 E z E PEELE 1 1 es 1 2 E H PEE ES n es z RERO RR EUR 5 nnn ze E eee TI ee MSS eee tee a a 2555555 E eas IS EM Sees E TITIO PR TreTIsTSTTS ee zz Sate tee a8 ST 2555 eee ee tra eSI EIT Pr mh kn EE ee Reece n tl an annan E rn meee cere
17. ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 325 Disposal of Used Coolant Used ethylene glycol based engine coolant is a regulated substance requiring proper disposal Check with your local authorities to determine the disposal rules for your community To prevent ingestion by animals or children do not store ethylene glycol based engine coolant in open containers or allow it to remain in puddles on the ground If ingested by a child contact a physician immediately Clean up any ground spills immediately Coolant Level The coolant bottle provides a quick visual method for determining that the coolant level is adequate With the engine off and cold the level of the coolant in the bottle should be between the ranges indicated on the bottle The radiator normally remains completely full so there is no need to remove the radiator cap unless checking for coolant freeze point or replacing coolant Advise your service attendant of this As long as the engine operating temperature is satisfactory the coolant bottle need only be checked once a month WARNING e The warning words DO NOT OPEN HOT on the cooling system pressure cap are a safety pre caution Never add coolant when the engine is overheated Do not loosen or remove the cap to cool an overheated engine Heat causes pressure to build up in the cooling system To prevent scalding or injury do not remove the pressure cap while the system is hot or under pressure Do not use a p
18. 191 193 318 Air Pressure Tires len 145 245 u P 41 Abas Deployment xs sdai eode aa qot he a pos 46 47 110827188085 23232299552 1099 52 15995 46 49 61 142 Alitbag Maintenance sses RUE RR 49 AUD SIE aub 9 Ehe dU dct 47 Airbag Window Side Curtain 42 47 Alam ecu vi uas can 3 9 ke 145 Alarm System Security Alarm 15 D EEEEHLLILIIIIIIIRIIILUIIIIULILLIILIUIILLIGILLIGIILONLLIC O 0d ALLUIlUL LUILWALUILLL LULLEAGOA JUPULO LLLULA IC INDEX 383 Brake Oy Stell ea cer d oe 226 327 Anti Lock ABS lees 226 Fluid Check 2222299 ou oo lt 46 555454 329 2 lnc qv 328 Master Cylinder 2 dmt o Snead oo d 4 329 POURING 4 oye oe eee ek m 22 Warne LIB 2342359999 999 9 144 226 uci cae eudagaGae aed Ghee 226 Brake Transmission Interlock 213 Break In Recommendations New Vehicle 59 Bulb Replacement eae b ER US 345 BIDS TS DE saene qua oe Gor wares dod dedu 344 Calibration Compass s assem dm 153 Capacities FMA v scie ce SERE eg oahu Por ds 350 Caps Filler us Cnm 265 OM ERENCE tipai REPE DR 012 Radiator Coolant Pressure 324 333 Car Washes 25 4544 xS Carbon Monoxide Warni
19. 8518137 9 1 Low Beam Headlight Bulb 2 High Beam Headlight Bulb LIGHT BULBS Exterior Bulb Number Low Beam Headlight 9006 High Beam Headlight 9005 Front Park Turn Light assesses dor 3457A Front Fog Light If Equipped 9145 H10 Serviced at Dealer Front Sidemarker 194NA Serviced at Dealer Tail Stop Turn Light 3157 Rear Sidemarker 3757APY27 7W BackUp MICA ss es 1 URS RUE 921 W16W Center High Mount Stop Light CHMSL LED nca T W5W BULB REPLACEMENT Low Beam Headlight High Beam Headlight and Park Turn Light 1 Open the hood NOTE Removal of the air cleaner filter housing may be necessary prior to replacing bulbs in the headlight assem bly on the driver side of the vehicle 7 4 2 9 gt 00 0920990 84 08 9 2 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 346 CAUTION Do not touch the new bulb with your fingers Oil contamination will severely shorten bulb life If the bulb comes in contact with an oily surface clean the bulb with rubbing alcohol Tail Stop Turn Signal Light and Backup Light 1 Open the liftgate 2 Remove tail light access cover aa sit 3 Park Turn Light Bulb fares 5 a 51300974 wb ee M
20. Front amp Rear Suspension Ball Joints The suspension ball joints should be inspected for exter nal leakage or damage when other maintenance is per formed Steering Linkage The tie rod end ball joints should be inspected for external leakage or damage when other maintenance is performed Body Lubrication Locks and all body pivot points including seat tracks door hinges liftgate hinges and hood hinges should be lubricated periodically to assure quiet easy operation and to protect against rust and wear Prior to the appli cation of any lubricant the parts concerned should be wiped clean to remove dust and grit after lubricating excess oil and grease should be removed Particular attention should also be given to hood latching compo nents to insure proper function When performing other underhood services the hood latch release mechanism and safety catch should be cleaned and lubricated ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 321 Exhaust System The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust system Whenever a change is noticed in the sound of the exhaust system when exhaust fumes can be detected inside the vehicle or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is damaged have a competent mechanic inspect the com plete exhaust system and adjacent body areas for broken damaged deteriorated or mispositioned parts Open seams or loose connections could permit
21. Premium System If Equipped The Tire Pressure Monitor System TPMS uses wireless technology with wheel rim mounted electronic sensors to monitor tire pressure levels Sensors mounted to each wheel as part of the valve stem transmit tire pressure readings to the Receiver Module NOTE It is particularly important for you to check the tire pressure in all of the tires on your vehicle regularly and to maintain the proper pressure The TPMS consists of the following components e Receiver Module ee STARTING AND OPERATING 259 NOTE You can change the pressure units to display in PSI KPA or BAR Refer to Language under Personal Settings Customer Programmable Features under Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC in Sec tion 4 of this manual for details Check TPMS Warning The Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will flash on and off for 60 seconds and an audible chime will sound when a system fault is detected The flash cycle will repeat every ten minutes without an audible chime until the fault condition no longer exists In addition to the telltale and chime the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC will display a CHECK TPM SYSTEM message for 3 seconds when a system fault is detected In the event that a fault occurs because the system did not receive a pressure value from one or more Tire Pressure Monitoring Sensors the EVIC will display the CHECK TPM SYSTEM message and the
22. X an sioner Replace if required Replace the air conditioning filter EX Rotate the tires X X 7 M A N T E N A N C E 5 C H E 0 U L E S 8 366 SCHEDULE B Miles 138 000 141 000 144 000 147 000 150 000 Kilometers x 000 x 000 000 Ux 000 NEN 000 Change engine oil and engine oil filter if not re placed at 3 months Inspect the air cleaner filter and replace if re quired Replace the air cleaner filter Eo odd X Ll Inspect the front and rear brake linings and rotors MEER o Change the rear axle mE Replace the air conditioning l ff xP Rotate the tires Change the Transfer Case Fluid All Wheel Drive AWD only This maintenance is recommended by the manufacture Inspection and service should also be performed anytime to the owner but is not required to maintain the emis a malfunction is observed or suspected Retain all re sions warranty ceipts M A N T E N A N C E 5 C H E 0 U L E S 8 f This maintenance is not required if previously replaced SCHEDULE A 367 SCHEDULE A Miles 6 000 12 000 18 000 24 000 30 000 36 000 Kilometers 10 000 20 000 30 000 40 000 50000 60 000 Months M A l N T E N A N C E S C H E 0 U L E 5 8 368 SCHEDULE A Miles 42 000 48 000 54 000 Kilometers 70 000 80000 90 000 Months Change engine oil and engine o
23. buffeting occurs with the sunroof open then adjust the sunroof opening to minimize the buffeting LIFTGATE The liftgate can be unlocked or locked by the remote keyless entry transmitter or by activating the power door lock switches located on the front doors Once unlocked the liftgate can be opened or closed To open the liftgate depress the liftgate release switch located in the exterior handle and pull the liftgate open with one fluid motion 32 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 0 8 819 00 00 9 NOTE If a power malfunction occurs you can use the emergency liftgate latch release to open the liftgate The emergency liftgate latch release is located behind a e Driving with the liftgate open can allow poison snap in cover on the liftgate trim panel ous exhaust gases into your vehicle You and your passengers could be injured by these fumes Keep the liftgate closed when you are operating the vehicle DE dives If you are required to drive with the liftgate open make sure that all windows are closed and the climate control blower switch is set at high speed DO NOT use the recirculation mode Poon ne pu Gas props support the liftgate in the open position However because the gas pressure drops with tempera ture it may be necessary to assist the props when opening the liftgate in cold weather Emergency Liftgate Latch Release Location m THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE
24. 22 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 7 09 9 0909001010 08 2 Closeness to a radio transmitter such as a radio station tower airport transmitter and some mobile or CB radios DOOR LOCKS Manual Door Locks To lock each door push the door lock plunger on each door trim panel downward To unlock each door pull the door lock plunger on each door trim panel upward m Door Lock Plunge 4 To assemble the transmitter case snap the two halves together If so equipped install and tighten the screw until snug Make sure there is an even gap between the two halves 5 Test the transmitter operation General Information This device complies with part 15 of the FCC rules and RSS 210 of Industry Canada Operation is subject to the following conditions e This device may not cause harmful interference e This device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired op eration NOTE Changes or modifications not expressly ap proved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user s authority to operate the equipment If your Remote Keyless Entry transmitter fails to operate from a normal distance check for these two conditions 1 A weak battery in the transmitter The expected life of the battery is a minimum of three years ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 23 If the door lock plunger is down when you shut the door Power Door Locks the
25. EHE NENNEN ESP ap r ei 7 BAS Lm ae ELECTRONIC STABILITY WATER IM FUEL REAR WEHDCW 10001 a HIGH BEAM TURM 5 685 PER A dics SEAT DOOR LECK as ri aa ELECTRONK PROGRAM BRAKE WIPER INTERMITTENT SPEER COMTROL ASSIST SYSTEM a w eo 7 ZO a a U Q BRAKE SYSTEM FUEL REAR WINDOW adda MASTER LIGHTING REY ACTIVATE UPPER AMD LCWTER SEAT WIHDOW LIFT TRE 4 OR RE HILL DESCENT WARAHING PAREING INTERMITTEMT WIPER 5 POWER OUTLET AJR OUTLET COMTAGL BRAKE at ig al aia ia J ww vl ap amo I FUEL ALL SIDE REAR WINDOW WINDSHIELD ASHER COME LIGHT FROMT FE LIGHT HOOD RELEASE LOWER AIR RECIRCULAT HOH CONVERTIBLE TRACTION n WHEEL FAILURE OF ANTI LOCK WAGHER FLUID LEVEL ATLET 3 DOANH CONTROL RIVE BRAKING SYSTEM C 4 Ca 3 2 MA awo WINDSHIELD LIFTGATE RELEASE ELECTRONIC BRAKE STSTEM ENGINE OIL REAR AA ELECTRICALL T FARE LIGHTE REAR FOG LAMP AMD DEFROST AND VENTILATING FAN WIN OIF Lock THROTTLE FIR WHEEL WARMING FARK ING DEFROST HEATED OPEN LOWER AIR 7 COW TROL DRIVE BRAKE f W E i BATTERY HEATED MIRROR WIMDSHEELD IHSTLJIMENT PANEL SEAT BELT BLIDIN EZ DOOR TRUNK DECK AIR CONDITIONING CHILD SEAT REGOGHITION WARNING CHARGING DEFROST ILLUMIMATICM RELEASE TETHER AMCHOR BUTTON i a we 9 8 cL LEA LOWER ANCHORS GLOW PLUG PIMVER WINDSHIELD WIPER SIDE AIRBAG AIRBAG ELIDINC
26. If Equipped This system automatically turns the headlights ON or OFF according to ambient light levels To turn the system ON rotate the headlight switch counter clockwise to the AUTO A position When the system is ON the Head light Time Delay feature is also ON This means the WARNINCG If the hood is not fully latched it could fly up when the vehicle is moving and block your forward vision You could have a collision Be sure all hood latches are fully latched before driving LIGHTS Headlight Switch Hy The headlight switch is located on the left side of 9 the instrument panel This switch controls the operation of the headlights parking lights instru ment panel lights instrument panel light dimming inte rior lights and fog lights rd ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 7 Headlights On with Wipers Available with Auto Headlights Only When this feature is active the headlights will turn on approximately 10 seconds after the wipers are turned on if the headlight switch is placed in the AUTO position In addition the headlights will turn off when the wipers are turned off if they were turned on by this feature The Headlights On with Wipers feature can be turned on or off through the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC if equipped For details refer to Headlights On with Wipers under Personal Settings Customer Programmable Features under Electronic Vehicle In f
27. 12 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 10001 090909000900900000080 9 lt 1 000 e For vehicles equipped with the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC the power window CAUTION switches radio power sunroof if equipped and An unlocked car is an invitation to thieves Always power outlets will remain active for up to 60 minutes remove key from the ignition and lock all doors after the ignition switch is turned off Opening either when leaving the vehicle unattended front door will cancel this feature The time for this feature is programmable For details refer to Delay Power Off to Accessories Until Exit under Personal Settings Customer Programmable Features under Key In Ignition Reminder If you open the driver s door and the key is in the ignition Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC in a chime will sound to remind you to remove the ey Section 4 of this manual NOTE The Key In Ignition reminder only sounds WARNING when the ignition key is placed in the LOCK or ACC positions Never leave children alone in a vehicle Leaving children in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number of reasons A child or others could be seriously or fatally injured Don t leave the keys in the ignition A child could operate power windows other controls or move the vehicle ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 13 someone used an invalid key to start the eng
28. 248 STARTING AND 0 141 81 9999999990 00 0 0 00 tire affects vehicle handling Since it is not the same tire replace or repair the original tire and reinstall on the vehicle at the first opportunity WARNINCG The limited use spare tires are for emergency use only Installation of this limited use spare tire affects vehicle handling With this tire do not drive more than 60 mph 100 km h Keep inflated to the cold tire inflation pressure listed on either your tire placard or limited use spare tire and wheel assembly Replace or repair the original tire at the first opportunity and reinstall it on your vehicle Failure to do so could result in loss of vehicle control Tire Spinning When stuck in mud sand snow or ice conditions do not spin your vehicle s wheels above 35 mph 55 km h Refer to the paragraph on Freeing A Stuck Vehicle in Section 6 of this manual Do not install a wheel cover or attempt to mount a conventional tire on the compact spare wheel since the wheel is designed specifically for the compact spare Do not install more than one compact spare tire wheel on the vehicle at any given time CAUTION Because of the reduced ground clearance do not take your vehicle through an automatic car wash with the compact spare installed Damage to the vehicle may result Limited Use Spare If Equipped The limited use spare tire is for temporary emergency use on your vehicle This tire is iden
29. Change the rear axle fluid Replace the air conditioning filter Flush and replace engine coolant at 102 000 miles if not done at 60 months Rotate the tires Lo DX X Change the Transfer Case Fluid All Wheel Drive X AWD only M A N T E N A N C E 5 C H E 0 U L E S 8 364 SCHEDULE B Miles 108 000 111 000 114 000 117 000 120 000 Kilometers 180 000 185 000 190 000 195 000 200 000 i Change engine oil and engine oil filter if not re placed at 3 months Inspect the air cleaner filter and replace if re X X X X quired Replace the air cleaner filter oo S S S Inspect the front and rear brake linings and rotors Replace the spark plugs 5 7L Engine 098111 Check and replace if necessary the PCV valve EE X A Change the automatic transmission fluid and filter Replace the air conditioning filter Flush and replace the engine coolant at 120 months if not replaced at 102 000 miles M A N Li E N A N C E 5 C H E 0 U L E 5 8 Rotate the tires a rr rr a Lo o SCHEDULE B 65 Miles 123 000 126 000 129 000 132 000 135 000 Kilometers a 000 x 000 x 000 x 000 x 000 Change engine oil and engine oil filter if not re placed at 3 months Inspect the air cleaner filter and replace if re quired Replace the air cleaner filter X Inspect the front and rear brake linings and rotors
30. Refer to the Tire and Loading Information placard for the size designation of your tire The service description and load identification will be found on the original equipment tire Failure to use equivalent replacement tires may adversely affect the safety handling and ride of your vehicle We recommend that you contact your original equipment or an autho rized tire dealer with any questions you may have on tire specifications or capability Life of Tire The service life of a tire is dependent upon varying factors including but not limited to e Driving style e lire pressure e Distance driven WARNING Tires and spare tire should be replaced after six years regardless of the remaining tread Failure to follow this warning can result in sudden tire failure You could lose control and have an accident result ing in serious injury or death Keep dismounted tires in a cool dry place with as little exposure to light as possible Protect tires from contact with oil grease and gasoline ee STARTING AND OPERATING 251 WARNING CAUTION e Do not use a tire wheel size or rating other than Replacing original tires with tires of a different size that specified for your vehicle Some combina tions of unapproved tires and wheels may change suspension dimensions and performance charac teristics resulting in changes to steering han dling and braking of your vehicle This can cause unpredictable handling and stress
31. The transfer case fluid inspection plug is located in the middle of the rear housing To inspect the transfer case fluid level remove the inspection plug The fluid level should be even with the bottom of the hole The transfer case fill plug is located on the rear housing near the output shaft The front differential fill plug is located on the outer cover near the halfshaft attachment To inspect the differ ential fluid level remove the fill plug The fluid level should be even with or slightly below the bottom of the hole Severe Usage fluid and filter Refer to Maintenance Schedule B Severe Usage is defined as e Police taxi limousine commercial type operation or trailer towing where the vehicle is driven regularly for more than 45 minutes of continuous operation If the transmission is disassembled for any reason the fluid and filter should be changed Special Additives Automatic Transmission Fluid ATF is an engineered product and its performance may be impaired by supple mental additives Therefore do not add any fluid addi tives to the transmission The only exception to this policy is the use of special dyes to aid in detecting fluid leaks In addition avoid using transmission sealers as they may adversely affect seals 332 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 99997 0 2 9 Front and Rear Wheel Bearings Front and rear wheel bearings are permanently sealed No regular main
32. Word About Your Keys 11 Illuminated Entry System 17 Ignition Key Removal 11 MH Remote Keyless Entry 17 0156772101801160 Reminder seme set ur 12 Fido Wieck The DOORS 239933 IRE ES 18 56100775617 E 19 MIG Lock The Doors ass ses sos Y p eru d eos 19 H Replacement Keys seo cerei 14 o Using The Panic Alarm 20 O Customer Key Programming 14 O Programming Additional Transmitters 2 OGeneral 1710723080671 oes us weee oes 15 O Dattety Replacement eau cer se Ex honed ves 21 ll Security Alarm System If Equipped 15 E General Information dedo eges 22 O Rearming Of The System 15 Door Locks 22202252 100 9 perte ek HE Rd 22 E Io APIS Ihe EDGE 4 08 3 994 15 Manual Door Locks x6 xoc 9 3 6 48 4 ds 22 Eo Disarm INe Systemi hi 16 Blower Door LOCKS a2 42 0m digo d riia taii 23 10 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ee O Child Protection Door Lock 25 O Driver And Front Passenger Supplemental B Windows 27 Restraint System SRS Airbag 41 a Power Windows 27 Event Data Recorder EDR ere sss 49 o Wind Buffeting 30 3 7160 1 681050107 e ou ditur Cane FD REUS 51 W Liftgate 31 Engine Break In Recommendations 59 Occupant Restraints 99 M
33. lars 11 51016067615160 Pre 41 Lane Change and Turn Signals 99 Lap shoulder Bells 2s 9 dabo nnas ea rg 33 LATCH Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren 54 55 IE dur ereere usr 34 Fehler ee ee ee ee ee ee 61 Heater ENGNG BIOCE ua anode trpia qr anes 211 High Beam Low Beam Select Dimmer Switch 99 Hitches JGGUBP TONING ioksceep uon 63 999 909 sss 279 Holder CU922939 1 3 29 rS ENS 121 HomeLink Garage Door Opener Transmitter 110 H od Release 5455454005404 EE 95 boo ebara 37 15771161 11 j ee ee See ee ee 11 1807000 Key Removal 4 4 50 25 te02ceecee es 11 1110731030160 BOY ades QR re Saag eben vs 17 Immobilizer Sentry Key ua densos 13 17180 1566850377 oues iu e be 51 Inflation Pressure Tires suus aer ndo ose 145 Information Center Vehicle 148 Inside Rearview Mirror less 67 Instrument Cluster 138 139 140 Instrument Panel and Controls 157 Instrument Panel Lens Cleaning 335 Interior Appearance Care a2 5 nace sds 334 Interior FUSES uaa ie eo EX 22445 337 D EEEIILISIIIGIIIIIIILLLUILILILHLIIILILIIIIITILLEUILT EALLILEUULL OLI LLALISLG GLGGIUGTIAU o o OPTICILAM4UL EGOO U USOU3H 0 SBL ULL
34. 224 224 Engine Block Heater If Equipped 211 O Traction oc cece eee Automatic Transmission Ls 211 B Parking Brake see 225 226 o 7 0 d PAN O Anti Lock Brake System If Equipped 226 O Brake Transmission Shift Interlock System 213 206 STARTING AND OPERATING 1 9 99 lt 0 02 2990008 la Power Steering 229 O Tire Inflation Pressures 245 ll Multi Displacement System MDS 5 7L A Radial ies uoa suy Se ee a ra ya Eg x 247 ERE RE OM uou scs Aad a 230 ft Compact Spas Tre Paape eseria 247 Control System TCS 1E y Limited Use Spar IF Equipped 28 ll Brake Assist System BAS If Equipped 232 Tite OPINNOT 4 484645 2080 ok d 248 Electronic Stability Program ESP If E Tread Wear Indicators 249 EPL 4445460420044 646 0544 a ood wes 253 UE SSS 250 0 570007072108 ESP ikia siiri 23 OReplacement TES so rasere rias EE SR 250 ESP BAS Malfunction Indicator And ESP TCS E Alienment And Balances uu 2546 24 Ew 251 Indicator LISS amp au he bord Rd a ED ER 235 ll Self Sealing Tires If Equipped 252 Bl Tire Safety Information 236 gg Tire Chains 00 252 M E 29 gg Show Tires see e 258
35. 525 729 1248 or 729 1240 Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or Speech Impaired TDD TTY To assist customers who have hearing difficulties the manufacturer has installed special TDD Telecommuni cation Devices for the Deaf equipment at its Customer Center Any hearing or speech impaired customer who 9 has access to a TDD or a conventional teletypewriter TTY in the United States can communicate with the manufacturer by dialing 1 800 380 CHRY e f for some reason you are still not satisfied talk to the general manager or owner of the dealership They want to know if you need assistance e If your dealership is unable to resolve the concern you may contact the Manufacturer s Customer Center Any communication to the Manufacturer s Customer Center should include the following information e Owner s name and address e Owner s telephone number home and office e Dealership name e Vehicle identification number e Vehicle delivery date and mileage DaimlerChrysler Motors Corporation Customer Center P O Box 21 8004 Auburn Hills MI 48321 8004 Phone 800 992 1997 376 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 8 0 0 89 We appreciate that you have made a major investment when you purchased your new vehicle Your dealer has also made a major investment in facilities tools and training to assure that you are absolutely delighted with your ownership experience You ll be pleased with their sincere efforts to resolve a
36. Antifreeze Engine Coolant 323 350 7506057 TIT Cr 325 Anti Lock Brake System ABS 226 Anti Lock Warning Light 147 228 Anti Theft Security Alarm Theft Alarm is Ani Ihet Systemi scies detanicdiot bes a oa be 145 App drance Gale oe SU ER ER KO TS 332 Auto Down Power Windows 28 Auto Up Power Windows 399 veda Rey 28 Automatic Dimming Mirror 67 Automatic Door Locks 24 25 Automabe FIeadlishiS 432323 erdt aed 96 Automatic Temperature Control ATC 193 Automatic Transaxle 556660101 50011000968 user se nae aah od 391 Automatic Transmission 214 219 330 Adding Fluid oa Ge 330 352 7701690765 PETI 223 Puid and Filter Chinees 204554 x med tais 330 ABS Anti Lock Brake System 226 Adding Engine Coolant Antifreeze 323 Addams puel EE EEEE 205 Adding Rear Washer Fluid 202 Adding Washer Fluid 103 202 321 Adjustable Pedals 105 Air Cleaner Engine Engine Air Cleaner Filter 314 Air Conditioner Maintenance 318 Air 6710701665 202645 22 ase4 6 thes 191 193 Air Conditioning Controls 191 Air Conditioning Filter 199 319 Air Conditioning Operating Tips 200 Air Conditioning Refrigerant 915 319 Air Conditioning System
37. CO follow the safety tips below If you are required to drive with the liftgate open make sure that all windows are closed and the climate control blower switch is set at high speed DO NOT use the recirculation mode Lock Your Vehicle Always remove the keys from the ignition and lock all doors when leaving the vehicle unattended even in your own driveway or garage Try to park your vehicle in a well lit area and never invite theft by leaving articles of value exposed Exhaust Gas Do not run the engine in a closed garage or in confined areas any longer than needed to move your vehicle in or out of the area If it is necessary to sit in a parked vehicle with the engine running adjust your heating or cooling controls to force outside air into the vehicle Set the blower at high speed The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust system Whenever a change is noticed in the sound of the exhaust system when exhaust fumes can be detected inside the vehicle or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is damaged have a competent mechanic inspect the com plete exhaust system and adjacent body areas for broken ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 61 Defroster Check operation by selecting the defrost mode and place the blower control on high speed You should be able to feel the air directed against the windshield 2 Periodic Safety Checks You
38. IF EQUIPPED The power sunroof switch is located between the sun visors on the overhead console peer TM Power Sunroof Controls For questions or comments contact HomeLink at www homelink com or 1 800 355 3515 Security If you sell your vehicle be sure to erase the frequencies by following the Erasing HomeLink Buttons instruc tions in this section This device complies with part 15 of FCC rules and with RSS 210 of Industry Canada Operation is subject to the following conditions e This device may not cause harmful interference e This device must accept any interference that may be received including interference that may cause undes ired operation NOTE Changes or modifications not expressly ap proved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user s authority to operate the equipment HomeLink is a trademark owned by Johnson Controls Inc 116 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 5 5 Opening Sunroof Express Press the switch rearward and release and the sunroof will open automatically from any position The sunroof will open fully and then stop automatically This is called Express Open During Express Open operation any movement of the sunroof switch will stop the sunroof Closing Sunroof Express Press the switch forward and release and the su
39. If the parking brake is not applied and the light remains on or if the light does not turn on have the light inspected by an authorized dealer NOTE The light will turn on when the ignition switch in the ON position and the parking brake is applied This light shows only that the parking brake is applied It does not show the degree of brake application See page 226 for more information 21 Vehicle Security Alarm VSA Indicator Light If Equipped The VSA indicator Light flashes rapidly when the VSA is arming and slowly when the VSA is armed See page 15 for more information 22 Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light If Equipped Each tire including the spare if provided 1 should be checked monthly when cold and inflated to the inflation pressure recom mended by the vehicle manufacturer on the NOTE The light may flash momentarily during sharp cornering maneuvers which change fluid level condi tions The vehicle should have service performed and the brake fluid level checked Immediate repair is necessary if brake failure is indicated WARNING Driving a vehicle with the brake light on is danger ous Part of the brake system may have failed It will take longer to stop the vehicle You could have an accident Have the vehicle checked immediately Vehicles equipped with Anti Lock brakes ABS are also equipped with Electronic Brake Force Distribution EBD Both the Brake Warning Light and
40. The Scheduled maintenance services listed in bold type must be done at the times or mileages specified to assure the continued proper functioning of the emission control system These and all other maintenance services included in this manual should be done to provide best vehicle performance and reliability More frequent main tenance may be needed for vehicles in severe operating conditions such as dusty areas and very short trip driving Inspection and service also should be done any time a malfunction is suspected NOTE Maintenance replacement or repair of the emission control devices and systems on your vehicle may be performed by any automotive repair establish ment or individual using any automotive part which has been certified pursuant to U S EPA or in the State of California California Air Resources Board regulations M N 1 E N A N C E 5 C H E 0 U L E S 8 NOTE Most vehicles are operated under the conditions listed for Schedule B Second is Schedule A It is for vehicles that are not operated under any of the conditions listed under Sched ule B Use the schedule that best describes your driving condi tions Where time and mileage are listed follow the interval that occurs first NOTE Under no circumstances should oil change intervals exceed 6 000 miles 10 000 km or 6 months whichever comes first M A l N T E N A N C E 5 C H E 0 U L E S 8 C
41. Transmitter Garage Door Opener HomeLink 110 Transmitter Programming Remote Keyless BOY eee 21 Transmitter Remote Keyless Entry RKE 17 ION DORE Vets voce OIE doi 58 Tread Wear Indicators 45 eue eee on dee e 249 Is a 286 289 Life of Tires hoa oo eo ates e n7 Ua te Rr 250 Boa CE POY ios v vp bs 240 241 Pressure Monitor System TPMS 254 OU COURS 378 Radial 22292 eae oe oe bee PE NEU 247 Re placement keratia 250 15 009001 sa 5 h eae descr x ew s 259 ul AP M aa 236 244 501 6717027 hone 202 OIDs 6 Beno 3 9 NORTE UNE ee eRe es eS 237 Snow Tires 24s gos aoe pem eR xen 259 Pare TUO uus quer oe eee 287 50753085 ee a 248 Tread Wear Indicators 249 Tongue Weight Trailer Weight 2 0 Torque Converter Clutch 217 TOWING 4536s 56 6006 SESS 270 Behind a Motor Home 282 Disabled Vehicle 298 tun Saws seni eek eS Raa ae 273 1 667630096131 53 9x 3a 3 39 soo om Y Ec ny sks 282 1 42524 er Peu P dE RR 273 396 INDEX 0 4 484 41100000 0 5727 Washer Adding Fluid 103 202 321 Washer Rear 525
42. X X Change the automatic transmission fluid and filter Replace the air conditioning filter o X Flush and replace engine coolant at 60 months if not done at 102 000 miles Rotate the tires X a 110 NEN EEN S pf 70 Xx X 362 SCHEDULE B Miles 78 000 81 000 84 000 Kilometers 125 000 130 000 135 000 140 000 145 000 150 000 Change engine oil and engine oil filter if not X X X replaced at 3 months Inspect the air cleaner filter and replace if re X X quired Replace the air cleaner filter Replace the spark plugs 5 7L Engine 0 Inspect the front and rear brake linings and X rotors Check and replace if necessary the PCV NE NENNEN p valve f X X X Replace the air conditioning filter Rotate the tires M A N Li E N A N C E 5 C H E 0 U L E S 8 02 0 pL XX NENNEN NENNEN NENNEN E SCHEDULE B 3 Miles 93 000 96 000 99 000 102 000 105 000 Kilometers 155 000 160 000 165 000 170 000 175 000 Change engine oil and engine oil filter if not re placed at 3 months Inspect the air cleaner filter and replace if re X X X X quired Replace the air cleaner filter o To o YOS X a Replace the engine timing belt 3 5L Engine lt Xf NENNEN o EL el 7 sioner Replace if required Do X y TX
43. and cargo for your vehicle Towing Requirements To promote proper break in of your new vehicle driv etrain components the following guidelines are recom mended CAUTION e Avoid towing a trailer for the first 500 miles 805 km of vehicle operation Doing so may damage your vehicle e During the first 500 miles 805 km of trailer towing limit your speed to 50 mph 80 km h Never exceed the maximum tongue weight stamped on your bumper or trailer hitch 8154640 Consider the following items when computing the weight on the rear axle of the vehicle e The tongue weight of the trailer e The weight of any other type of cargo or equipment put in or on your vehicle e The weight of the driver and all passengers E STARTING AND OPERATING 277 Safety chains must always be used between your vehicle and trailer Always connect the chains to the frame or hook retainers of the vehicle hitch Cross the chains under the trailer tongue and allow enough slack for turning corners Vehicles with trailers should not be parked on a grade When parking apply the parking brake on the tow vehicle Put the tow vehicle automatic transmission in P for Park Always block or chock the trailer wheels GCWR must not be exceeded Total weight must be distributed between the tow vehicle and the trailer such that the following four ratings are not exceeded 1 GVWR 2 GIW 3 GAWR 4 Tongue weight rating for the traile
44. equipped with the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC For details refer to Turn Headlights On with Remote Key Unlock under Personal Settings Cus tomer Programmable Features under Electronic Ve hicle Information Center EVIC in Section 4 of this manual To lock the doors Press and release the LOCK button on the transmitter to lock all doors The turn signal lights will flash and the horn will chirp to acknowledge the signal e For vehicles equipped with the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC refer to Flash Lights with Remote Key Lock under Personal Settings Cus tomer Programmable Features under Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC in Section 4 of this manual for details e For vehicles not equipped with the EVIC perform the following procedure 1 Press and hold the UNLOCK button on a programmed transmitter for at least 4 seconds but not longer than 10 seconds Then press and hold the LOCK button while still holding the UNLOCK button 2 Release both buttons at the same time 3 Test the feature while outside of the vehicle by pressing the LOCK UNLOCK buttons on the transmitter with the ignition in the LOCK position and the key removed 4 Repeat these steps if you want to return this feature to its previous setting 20 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 8 999 990319 lt 1 4011 239 3 Test the feature while outside of the vehicle by pressing the
45. is deactivated the Seat Belt Reminder Light will continue to illuminate as long as the driver s seat belt is unbuck led Automatic Locking Mode If Equipped In this mode the shoulder belt is automatically pre locked However the belt will still retract to remove slack in the shoulder belt Use The Automatic Locking Mode any time a child safety seat is installed in a seating position that has a seat belt with this feature Seat belts that have the Automatic Locking Mode feature have a ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 41 Driver and Front Passenger Supplemental Restraint System SRS Airbag This vehicle has front airbags for both the driver and front passenger as a supplement to the seat belt restraint systems The driver s airbag is mounted in the center of the steering wheel The passenger s front airbag is mounted in the instrument panel above the glove com partment The words SRS AIRBAG are embossed on the airbag covers AIRBAG KNEE BOLSTERS 419 Front Airbag Components Pregnant women should wear the lap part of the belt across the thighs and as snug across the hips as possible Keep the belt low so that it does not come across the abdomen That way the strong bones of the hips will take the force if there is a collision Seat Belt Extender If a seat belt is too short even when fully extended and when the adjustable upper shoulder belt anchorage if so equipped is in its lowest p
46. is feature Th 1ce heated to melt frost or 1rrors are s door located on the dr irrors Control M tch is 1rror SW1 Heated Remote Control Mirrors If Equipped Power Remote C UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 69 70 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 78484008 8 7 language This system is driven through your Blue tooth Hands Free profile cellular phone UConnect features Bluetooth technology the global standard that enables different electronic devices to connect to each other without wires or a docking station so UCon nect works no matter where you stow your cellular phone be it your purse pocket or briefcase as long as your phone is turned on and has been paired to the vehicle s UConnect system The UConnect system allows up to seven cellular phones to be linked to system Only one linked or paired cellular phone can be used with the system at a time The system is available in English Spanish or French languages as equipped The rearview mirror contains the microphone for the system and the control buttons that will enable you to access the system HANDS FREE COMMUNICATION UConnect IF EQUIPPED UConnect M is a voice activated hands free in vehicle communications system UConnect allows you to dial a phone number with your cellular phone using simple voice commands e g Call Mike Work or Dial 248 555 1212
47. maximize fuel efficiency Towing Tips Autostick If Equipped For vehicles equipped with Autostick By using the Autostick modes and selecting a specific gear range frequent shifting can be avoided The highest gear range should be selected that allows for adequate performance For example choose 4 if the desired speed can be maintained Choose 3 or 2 if needed to maintain the desired speed Extended driving at high RPM should be avoided to prevent excess heat generation A reduction in vehicle speed may be required to avoid extended driving at 8 6 0 1 46 0 09000 111 STARTING AND OPERATING 282 RECREATIONAL TOWING BEHIND NOTE If the vehicle requires towing make sure all MOTORHOME ETC four wheels are off the ground TOWING THIS VEHICLE BEHIND ANOTHER VEHICLE Flat towing with all four wheels on the ground Recreational towing for this vehicle is not recommended EMERGENCIES B Jump Starting Procedures 294 B Freeing A Stuck Vehicle 297 Towing A Disabled Vehicle O Without The Ignition Key Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle Flat Towing With All Four Wheels On The Ground o cs sss Wer ARS oh bd P d 298 O Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle WITA Tow Dolly s s oe ix ater RRIC DIOE ES 299 WHAT TO DO IN CONTENTS Hazard Warning Flash
48. switch is turned to the ON position and may stay on for as long as four seconds If the ABS light remains on or comes on while driving it indicates that the Anti Lock portion of the brake system is not functioning and that service is required However the conventional brake system will continue to operate normally if the BRAKE warning light is not on If the ABS light is on the brake system should be serviced as soon as possible to restore the benefits of Anti Lock brakes If the ABS light does not come on when the Ignition switch is turned to the ON position have the bulb repaired as soon as possible If both the Brake Warning Light and the ABS Light remain on the Anti Lock brakes ABS and Electronic 228 STARTING AND OPERATING WARNING The Anti Lock Brake System contains sophisticated electronic equipment that may be susceptible to inter ference caused by improperly installed or high output radio transmitting equipment This interference can cause possible loss of anti lock braking capability In stallation of such equipment should be performed by qualified professionals Pumping of the Anti Lock Brakes will diminish their effectiveness and may lead to an accident Pumping makes the stopping distance longer Just press firmly on your brake pedal when you need to slow down or stop Anti lock system ABS cannot prevent the natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle nor can it increase braking or steering efficie
49. 007 0 7 STARTING AND OPERATING 226 BRAKE SYSTEM Your vehicle is equipped with dual hydraulic BRAKE brake systems If either of the two hydraulic systems loses normal capability the remaining system will still function There will be some loss of overall braking effectiveness This may be evident by increased pedal travel during application greater pedal force required to slow or stop and potential activation of the Brake Warning Light In the event power assist is lost for any reason for example repeated brake applications with the engine off the brakes will still function The effort required to brake the vehicle will be much greater than that required with the power system operating Anti Lock Brake System If Equipped The Anti Lock Brake System provides increased vehicle stability and brake performance under most braking conditions The system automatically pumps the brakes during severe braking conditions to prevent wheel lock up NOTE This light only shows that the parking brake is applied It does not show the degree of brake application WARNINCG e Never leave children alone in a vehicle Leaving children in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number of reasons A child or others could be seriously or fatally injured Don t leave the keys in the ignition A child could operate power windows other controls or move the vehicle Be sure the parking brake is fully disengaged before driving failur
50. 1 Turn the ignition switch ON 2 Press and hold the compass button for approximately 2 seconds 3 Press the SCROLL button until Compass Variance message and the last variance zone number displays in the EVIC 4 Press and release FUNCTION SELECT button until the proper variance zone is selected according to the map 5 Press and release the compass button to exit Telephone If Equipped Press and release the MENU button until Telephone displays in the EVIC When the appropriate conditions exist the EVIC pro vides the following telephone information e Phone status idle voice mail roaming battery strength and signal strength in increments of 20 percent KU COMPASS VARIANCE MAP poovebab UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 5 The EVIC displays this symbol to indicate that the UConnect phone is currently in analog mode The EVIC displays this symbol to indicate that the UConnect phone is currently roaming The EVIC displays this symbol to indicate that you have voice mail The EVIC displays this symbol to indicate a text message Analog Roam ing Voice Mail EI Text Message e Call status Incoming call connecting connected air time in minutes and seconds call ended call failed roaming and no phone connection e UConnect Active e Caller ID phone number display When the appropriate conditions exist and if supported by the cell phone the EVIC will display the
51. ASSISTANCE 377 In Canada If you believe that your vehicle has a safety defect you should contact the Customer Service Department imme diately Canadian customers who wish to report a safety defect to the Canadian government should write to Transport Canada Motor Vehicle Defect Investigations and Recalls 2780 Sheffield Road Ottawa Ontario K1B 3V9 PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS To order the following manuals you may use either the website or the phone numbers listed below Visa Mas tercard American Express and Discover orders are ac cepted If you prefer mailing your payment please call for an order form NOTE A street address is required when ordering manuals No P O Boxes e Service Manuals These comprehensive service manuals provide the information that students and professional technicians need in diagnosing troubleshooting problem solving maintaining servicing and repairing DaimlerChrysler REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS In the 50 United States and Washington D C If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could cause a crash or cause injury or death you should immediately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety Administra tion NHTSA in addition to notifying the manufacturer If NHTSA receives similar complaints it may open an investigation and if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles it may order a recall and remedy campaign However NHTSA cannot become involved in indi
52. C Set the Fan control to the High position full clockwise VERY HOT oet the temperature control to full cool After the hot air flushed from the vehicle set the Mode control to Recirculate with A C on and roll up the windows Once you are comfortable set the Mode control to Panel or Bi Level with A G on If it s sunny set the Made control to Panel and turn on A C If it s cloudy or dark set the Mode control to Bi Level with A C on Adjust Temperature control for comfort COOL OR COLD Set the Mode control to Defrost Floor or Defrost Sg HUMID CONDITIONS set the Fan Control to the High position full clockwise Adjust Fan and Ty Temperature control for comfort if windows are clear b COLD DRY Set the Mode control to Floor J If it s sunny you may want more upper air CONDITIONS i In this case set the Mode control to Bi Level 24 In very cold weather if you need extra heat at the windshield set the Mode control to Defrost Floor SF or Defrost S as needed Adjust Fan and Temperature control for comfort UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 1 The rear wiper system is intermittent and is not adjust able The delay is approximately 8 to 9 seconds between cycles CAUTION Turn the rear wiper off when driving through an automatic car wash Damage to the rear wiper may result if the wiper switch is left in any position other than OFF Rear Washer Operation The rear wa
53. Do not shift from REVERSE PARK or NEUTRAL into any forward gear when the engine is above idle speed Before shifting into any gear make sure your foot is firmly on the brake pedal ENGINE BLOCK HEATER IF EQUIPPED The engine block heater warms engine coolant and permits quicker starts in cold weather Connect the cord to a standard 110 115 volt AC electrical outlet with a grounded three wire extension cord The engine block heater cord is routed under the hood on the driver side of the vehicle It has a removable cap that is located on the driver side of the Integrated Power Module WARNING Remember to disconnect the cord before driving Damage to the 110 115 volt electrical cord could cause electrocution 212 STARTING AND OPERATING 1188310 00 200 0 The gear shifting process is continuously adapted de pendent on the driving style the driving situation and the road characteristics NOTE e After selecting any driving position wait a moment to allow the gear to engage fully before accelerating especially when the engine is cold e f there is a need to restart the engine be sure to cycle the key to the LOCK position before restarting Trans mission engagement may be delayed up to 10 seconds after restart if the key is not cycled to the LOCK position first e The electronically controlled transmission provides a precise shift schedule The transmission electronics are self calibrating There
54. Door Opener Garage sessed iess 110 D ve Dells 24455088 314 Driving On Slippery Surfaces 224 DVD Player Video Entertainment System 183 Electric Remote Mirrors 69 386 INDEX 0 4 79 9 Flashers Hazard Warning IR ONAL n 4 oe ge v PES ES 1 5 10 0888 Plat Tite C honglig Ran des Flooded Engine Starting Floor Console Less Frud Capacities eau exo deste o9 Fluid Leaks Fluid Level Checks E COO ys Cooling System 24 444 etre doma meas 582106501 sessing eg Power DIGGING segita ainai rr TTT Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts POS I HIS saaie de a uada web dead Y Folding Rear Seat Freeing A Stuck Vehicle Front Suspension Ball Joints Front Wheel Bearings Tl S00 ds et 0 209 TT 261 350 309 350 351 eas 311 TTT 312 010 60 321 P 314 Tr 199 319 0099 olo T 314 351 E ob Flooded Starting Fuel Requirements a rr Oil Change Interval On Filer Cap soe seed 3 tos doe tes Oil S lection 4 dcedees deg ka Pre RA 3015 7710806 a S ducc Pr Temperature Gauge sian ess Enhanced Accident Response Feature Ethanol 20 331 toad 9 ames ewe ee Event Data
55. E d Tire Rotation Recommendations 253 H Tire Loading And Tire Pressure 240 ll Tire Pressure Monitor System TPMS If B Tires General Information 244 e52e54 25 24 Base System If Equipped 256 244 306 29 0060 51176 1765 ee STARTING AND OPERATING 207 D Premium System If Equipped 258 O Gross Vehicle Weight Rating GVWR 268 O General Information ois a ys 261 O Gross Axle Weight Rating GAWR 268 B Fuel Requirements 261 OOverloading Pr 268 DA EN esp S CERES 261 218901007 C rr 268 ES SE DO DLE 4 456445 SEDE ES 2601 W Irailer Towing versos irre RERO S A 270 O Reformulated Gasoline 262 O Common Towing Definitions B Gasoline Oxygenate Blends 262 O Trailer Hitch Classification O MMT In Gasoline 263 O Trailer Towing Weights Maximum Trailer Weight O Materials Added To Fuel si os ww m Rs 263 e 7 O Fuel System Cautions sees cr 263 he O Carbon Monoxide Warnings 264 lh 9 9 9 768 idi B Adding Fuel sese eee Sn idi Fuel ler Cap Gas Cap ces A EA O Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message 267 5 Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle B Vehicle Lo
56. ENTER again to increase the clock by another minute 5 To decrease the clock by minutes use the Select 4 Encoder to highlight the sign Press ENTER Press ENTER again to decrease the clock by another minute 6 Select DONE to exit from the clock setting mode Press ENTER to save your changes If you press CAN CEL or NAV then your changes will not be saved 1 At the Clock Setup screen highlight Displayed Clock User Defined Clock 2 To increase the clock by hours make sure HR is highlighted and press ENTER Press ENTER again to increase the clock by another hour You will see on the User Defined Time display the number of hours you have increased the clock by 182 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Audio Clock Display 3 To switch the clock to the small clock quickly press Select this option to change the size of the clock on the TUME agan audio screens 1 When you are at an audio screen quickly press the TIME button on the navigation faceplate 2 In this example the large clock appears on the screen sas TEETE Petron eee TE a a tae NSSS 5 wees LA b a
57. Flasher Switch To engage the Hazard Warning Flashers depress the switch on the instrument panel When the Hazard Warn ing Switch is activated all directional turn signals will flash on and off to warn oncoming traffic of an emer gency Push the switch a second time to turn off the flashers This is an emergency warning system and it should not ee WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 285 control to maximum heat the Mode control to floor and the fan control to HI This allows the heater core to act as a supplement to the radiator and aids in removing heat A hot engine cooling system is dangerous You or from the engine cooling system others could be badly burned by steam or boiling coolant You may want to call a service center if your vehicle overheats If you decide to look under the CAUTION Driving with a hot cooling system could damage your vehicle If temperature gauge reads H pull hood yourself see Section 7 Maintenance of this manual Follow the warnings under the Cooling System Pressure Cap paragraph over and stop the vehicle Idle the vehicle with the air conditioner turned off until the pointer drops back into the normal range If the pointer remains on the H turn the engine off immediately and call for service 286 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 8 2 1 8 8 8 1 lt 999 JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING Preparations For Jacking 1 Park the vehicle on a firm le
58. HEIR EMERGENCY LIGHTER AND TETHER FOR UCONN ECT HAZARD STEERING FLUID AND WASHER RELEASE HAMDLE CHILDREN LA TEH BUTTON 0 2 AIRBAG PA Au fa aipe ii iu n MALFUNCTION TRANS ENGINE COOLANT SUPPLEMENTAL PASSENGER DODR AJAR CONVERTIBLE CONVERTIELE HORH SEE OWNER S 81912970 INDICATOR LIGHT OIL TEMPE TEMPERATURE RESTRAINT SYSTEM AIRBAG OFF TOP DOWN TOP UF 3 e VIN LOCATION NOTE It is illegal to remove the VIN 6 INTRODUCTION WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS This manual contains WARNINGS against operating procedures which could result in an accident or bodily injury It also contains CAUTIONS against procedures which could result in damage to your vehicle If you do not read this entire manual you may miss important information Observe all Warnings and Cautions VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER The vehicle identification number VIN is on the left front corner of the instrument panel The VIN is visible from outside of the vehicle through the windshield This number also appears on the Automobile Information Disclosure Label affixed to a window on your vehicle the vehicle registration and the title A INTRODUCTION 7 VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS ALTERATIONS WARNING Any modifications or alterations to this vehicle could seriously affect its roadworthiness and safety and may lead to an accident resulting in serious injury or death THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE CONTENTS an la
59. III pe Rd e nan Trl TYuTSNMN TS nem iL mur iit NE IRE yii Tenai i ae UI VOTRE IR Toe SI SI Child Lock Control 3 Repeat Steps 1 and 2 on the opposite rear door 2 z 2 5134196 3 t uvm E LM x ae EE 22 EE ae EE I z 2 E E x IT 3 La LS uve ve ee 0 Power Window Switches NOTE After disengaging the child protection door lock system always test the door from the inside to make certain it is in the desired position There are single window controls on each passenger door trim panel which operate the passenger door windows The window controls will operate only when the ignition switch is in the ON or ACCESSORY position 28 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 7 000000000000 96 9 9 2 10000 For vehicles not equipped with the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC the power window switches will remain active for 10 minutes after the ignition switch is turned off Opening either front door will cancel this feature For vehicles equipped with the EVIC the power window switches will remai
60. Recircula tion Control button will temporarily put the system in recirculation mode ten minutes This can be used when outside conditions such as smoke odors dust or high humidity are present Activating recirculation will cause the LED in the control button to illuminate After ten minutes the system will return to normal AUTO mode function and the LED will turn off NOTE e The surface of the climate control panel and the top center of the instrument panel should be kept free of debris due to the location of the climate control sensors Mud on the windshield may also cause poor operation of this system CER e Extended use of recirculation may cause the windows to fog If the interior of the windows begins to fog press the Recirculation button to return to outside air The system will Air Temperature Air Recirculation Cunt ril Control AMC Operation AMG bul ean Automatis he overridden lor 169 minutes dia ume Autemaric Aumale but can be overridden Tor 10 minutes Aurmatic Automatic liser selee tahle GUST or rev ulateu Loser selectable AC on liser selee tahle outside er reca ule Loser selectable AAS on or edt A Ut TALL 851341027 Mode Control ALLL Automatic liser selectable lo ny air delivery point User selecrahle lo dny air delivery point Blinver Contrul um mulie Loser selectable ume speed AUN Loser select
61. Recorder Exhaust Gas Caution 071181085 578063 seasea esami a Exterior Folding Mirrors 5650671071165036 aod does ec ea Filters 160767 e604 aS Air Conditioning EneiDe DUBl POE ON uou cas eee ao d Engine Oil Disposal Nn INDEX 387 lean ee eee 262 510766000008167 snes D 140 EDOL T 262 1961016167 accu 9 aput ee hee eas oe ee d 140 Piller Cap Gas Cap 9464556 v ES ERI P PS 205 Gear Ranges 315 392 Xu MIS qe Ce 25 lli M7 315 General Information 15 122 261 SONG c9 eu Ol CONSO CEINE SEGA SSDS 335 t oo 140 Gross Axle Weight Rating 268 270 o rm 327 Gross Vehicle Weight Rating 268 270 5 esae pA RENE DO I Da rr awa 28 Octane 11511085 o 63s s 404 ood IHR 261 351 Requirements xa wea ha ewe ny e4ee as 261 350 Hands Free Phone UConnect 70 Tan Capa 4 244 eee eae 350 Hazard Warning Flasher mr Ree 284 Fuel System CaU OR secara dace de deme 266 Head ReshalilS 22444404 deg d quand dodo sch rds 22 PACINO 2 566929 45 5 bonu EUM Seco ates 265 Headlights 50968 P rrr 337 ChE ANG s oo
62. Should Make Outside The Vehicle Tires Examine tires for excessive tread wear and uneven wear patterns Check for stones nails glass or other objects lodged in the tread Inspect tread and sidewall for cuts and cracks Check the wheel nuts for tightness Check the tires including spare for proper pressure Lights Have someone observe the operation of exterior lights while you work the controls Check turn signal and high beam indicator lights on the instrument panel Door Latches Check for positive closing latching and locking Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The Vehicle Seat Belts Inspect the belt system periodically checking for cuts frays and loose parts Damaged parts must be replaced immediately Do not disassemble or modify the system Front seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a collision Rear seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a collision if they have been damaged bent retractor torn webbing etc If there is any question regarding belt or retractor condition replace the belt Airbag Warning Light The light should come on and remain on for 6 to 8 seconds as a bulb check when the ignition switch is first turned ON If the light is not lit during starting see you authorized dealer If the light stays on flickers or comes on while driving have the system checked by an autho rized dealer 62 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 99 400 8 1 999 Flui
63. The interior lights will remain off when the doors are open Parade Mode Daytime Brightness Feature Rotate the dimmer control upward to the first detent This feature brightens all text displays such as the odometer Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC if equipped and radio when the parking lights or headlights are on WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND WASHERS T The multi function lever operates the windshield wipers and washer when the ignition switch is in the ON position The lever is located on the left side of the steering column 102 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M WARNING Sudden loss of visibility through the windshield could lead to an accident You might not see other vehicles or other obstacles To avoid sudden icing of the windshield during freezing weather warm the windshield with defroster before and during wind shield washer use Mist Feature Push the multi function lever inward toward the steer ing column to the first detent to activate a single wipe cycle to clear off road mist or spray from a passing vehicle The wipers will continue to operate until you release the lever Windshield Washers To use the washer push the multi function lever inward toward the steering column to the second detent and hold it for as long as washer spray is desired If you activate the washer while the windshield wiper control is in the delay range the wipers will operate for CAUTION Turn the
64. Your cellular phone s audio is trans mitted through your vehicle s audio system the system will automatically mute your radio when using the UConnect system NOTE The UConnect system use requires a cellular phone equipped with the Bluetooth Hands Free Profile version 0 96 or higher See www chrysler com uconnect for supported phones UConnect allows you to transfer calls between the system and your cellular phone as you enter or exit your vehicle and enables you to mute the system s micro phone for private conversation The UConnect phonebook enables you to store up to 32 names and four numbers per name Each language has a separate 32 name phonebook accessible only in that C UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 1 system can be adjusted either from the radio volume control knob or from the steering wheel radio control right switch if so equipped The radio display will be used for visual prompts from the UConnect system such as CELL or caller ID on certain radios Operations Voice commands can be used to operate the UConnect system and to navigate through the UConnect menu structure Voice commands are required after most UConnect system prompts You will be prompted for a specific command and then guided through the available options e Prior to giving a voice command one must wait for the voice on beep which follows the Ready prompt or another prompt e For certain opera
65. airbag system If you do have a collision which deploys the airbags any or all of the following may occur e The nylon airbag material may sometimes cause abra sions and or skin reddening to the driver and front passenger as the airbags deploy and unfold The abrasions are similar to friction rope burns or those 48 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 9 9990 9 9 406 7 gt 7 7 you might get sliding along a carpet or gymnasium floor They are not caused by contact with chemicals They are not permanent and normally heal quickly Deployed airbags can t protect you in another colli However if you haven t healed significantly within a sion Have the airbags replaced by an authorized few days or if you have any blistering see your doctor dealer as soon as possible immediately e As the airbags deflate you may see some smoke like Enhanced Accident Response Feature particles The particles are a normal by product of the If the airbags deploy after an impact and the electrical process that generates the nontoxic gas used for airbag system remains functional vehicles equipped with inflation These airborne particles may irritate the skin power door locks will unlock automatically In addition eyes nose or throat If you have skin or eye irritation approximately 5 seconds after the vehicle has stopped rinse the area with cool water For nose or throat moving the interior lights will illuminate to a
66. airbag deployment in terms of ignition cycles and vehicle mileage e Airbag deployment level if applicable e Seatbelt status the electronic data may be used by DaimlerChrysler and others to learn more about the possible causes of crashes and associated injuries in order to assess and improve vehicle performance In addition to crash investigations initiated by DaimlerChrysler such investigations may be requested by customers insurance carriers government officials and professional crash researchers such as those associated with universities and with hospital and insur ance organizations In the event that an investigation is undertaken by DaimlerChrysler regardless of initiative the company or its designated representative will first obtain permis sion of the appropriate custodial entity for the vehicle usually the vehicle owner or lessee before accessing the electronic data stored unless ordered to download data by a court with legal jurisdiction ie pursuant to a warrant A copy of the data will be provided to the custodial entity upon request General data that does not identify particular vehicles or crashes may be released for incorporation in aggregate crash databases such as those maintained by the US government and various states Data of a potentially sensitive nature such as would identify a particular driver vehicle or crash will be ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 51 WARNING In a co
67. and rear brake linings and rotors um SS i Check and replace if necessary the PCV Replace the air conditioning filter Rotate the tires 360 SCHEDULE B Kilometers 65 000 70 000 75 000 80 000 85 000 90 000 Change engine oil and engine oil filter if not X X X replaced at 3 months Inspect the air cleaner filter and replace if re X X X quired Replace the air cleaner filter EE NENNEN me eee L L I3 rotors Change the rear axle fluid X Replace the air conditioning filter O O X NENNEN Rotate the tires X Change the Transfer Case Fluid All Wheel Drive AWD only NN NEN NNNM M A N Li E N A N C E 5 C H E 0 U L E S 8 SCHEDULE B 1 66 000 69 000 72 000 110 000 115 000 120 000 X Miles 57 000 60 000 63 000 Kilometers 95 000 100 000 105 000 Change engine oil and engine oil filter if not X replaced at 3 months Inspect the air cleaner filter and replace if re quired X X X Replace the air cleaner filter Replace the spark plugs 5 7L Engine Inspect the front and rear brake linings and rotors Check and Inspect the accessory drive belt and tensioner Replace if required Check and replace if necessary the PCV valve f X M A N T E N A N C E 5 C H E 0 U L E S 8 X X X X X
68. back to LOCK 4 times ending up in the LOCK position 3 Depress the power door unlock switch to unlock the doors 4 A single chime will indicate the completion of the programming 5 Repeat these steps if you want to return this feature to its previous setting NOTE Use the Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit feature in accordance with local laws Child Protection Door Lock To provide a safer environment for small children riding in the rear seats the rear doors are equipped with a child protection door lock system Automatic Unlock Doors on Exit The doors will unlock automatically on vehicles with power door locks if 1 The Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit feature is en abled 2 The transmission was in gear and the vehicle speed returned to 0 mph 0 km h 3 The transmission is in NEUTRAL or PARK 4 The driver door is opened 5 The doors were not previously unlocked 6 The vehicle speed is 0 mph 0 km h Automatic Unlock Doors on Exit Programming The Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit feature can be enabled or disabled as follows e For vehicles equipped with the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC refer to Personal Settings Customer Programmable Features under Elec tronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC in Section 4 of this manual for details 26 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 8 999000 9 7 9 0000209 WARNINCG Avoid trapping anyone in a vehicle in a collision
69. battery Let the engine idle for a few minutes Then start the engine in the vehicle with the discharged battery NOTE For vehicles equipped with ESP refer to Syn chronizing ESP under Electronic Stability Program in Section 5 of this manual if the ESP BAS light in the instrument cluster remains on continuously after start ing the engine of the vehicle with the discharged battery ee WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 297 CAUTION e When rocking a stuck vehicle by moving be tween First and R Reverse do not spin the wheels faster than 15 mph 24 km h or drivetrain damage may result Racing the engine or spinning the wheels too fast may lead to transmission overheating and failure It can also damage the tires Do not spin the wheels above 35 mph 55 km h WARNING Fast spinning tires can be dangerous Forces gener ated by excessive wheel speeds may cause tire dam age or failure A tire could explode and injure someone Do not spin your vehicle s wheels faster than 35 mph 55 km h when you are stuck and don t let anyone near a spinning wheel no matter what the speed FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE If your vehicle becomes stuck in mud sand or snow it can often be moved by a rocking motion Turn your steering wheel right and left to clear the area around the front wheels Then shift back and forth between Reverse and Drive Usually the least accelerator pedal pressure to maintain the rocking motion
70. ce 241 267 268 Vehicle Modifications Alterations y Vehicle Glori gE 198 344 Vehicle Theft Alarm Security Alarm 15 Video Entertainment System Rear Seat Video Lm 183 5 Warning Flasher Hazard 284 Warning Lights Instrument Cluster 065671011631 obo boa oe Row as 140 Warnings and Cautions 4 a3 x RR eee ood 6 Warranty Information 44 4 44 2 4 4 0 24 376 NOTES NOTES NOTES NOTES
71. chil dren directly from its satellites and broadcasting studios ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 185 With the ignition in the ACCESSORY position and the radio off press the CD Eject and Set buttons simulta neously until the 12 digits of the ESN SID appear on the screen Selecting Satellite Mode in REF RAQ and RAK Radios Selecting Satellite Mode REF Radio Press the MODE button repeatedly until the word SAT appears in the display A CD may remain in the radio while in the Satellite radio mode Selecting Satellite Mode RAQ and RAK Radio Press the MODE button repeatedly until the word SAT appears in the display These radios will also display the current station name and program type For more information such as song title and artist press the MSG or INFO button A CD or tape may remain in the radio while in the Satellite radio mode simultaneously for 3 seconds The first four digits of the twelve digit ESN SID number will display Press the SEEK UP button to display the next four digits Continue to press the SEEK UP button until all twelve ESN SID digits display The SEEK DOWN will page down until the first four digits display The radio will exit the ESN SID mode when any other button is pushed the ignition is turned OFF or 5 minutes has passed since any button was pushed ESN SID Access With RAO and RAK Radios With the ignition switch in the ACCESSORY position and the radio OFF press the
72. cid 8 15 Amp Lights License Park gi i Blue Side Marker Stop Turn Front Power Distribution Center 9 uu 15 Amp Front Control Module Blue FCM 10 5 Amp Powertrain Control Orange Module PCM Starter 338 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 8 0 Cavity Car Mini Description Cavity Car Mini Description tridge Fuse tridge Fuse Fuse 11 25 Amp Auto Shutdown 20 20 Amp Starter Clear Powertrain Control Blue oo Module PCCM 2 50 Amp Anti lock Brakes System 12 Red ABS Pump Motor if 13 Z e equipped 14 25 Amp Powertrain Control 22 40 Amp AC Clutch Radiator Fan Clear Module PCM Green High Low 15 20 Amp Injectors Ignition Coils 25 Yellow 24 60 Amp Radiator Fan AWD 16 un Yellow 17 30Amp Anti lock Brakes System 25 30 Amp Front Control Module Pink ABS Valves if Pink FCM equipped Powertrain 26 20 Amp Transmission RLE Control Module PCM Blue 18 30 Amp Windshield Wiper 27 30 Amp Front Control Module Pink Washer Pink FCM 19 50 Amp Radiator Fan Red A MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 339 Fuses Rear Power Distribution Center There is also a power distribution center located under a hinged access cover in the load floor in the cargo area This center contains hae and bns x EEEE e When installing the Power Distribution Center cover it is important to ensure the cover i
73. cover and the upper passenger side of the instrument panel separate and fold out of the way as the bags inflate to frontal collision is severe enough to require the airbags to inflate The front airbag inflators are designed to provide different rates of airbag inflation from direc tion provided by the ACM The ACM will not detect roll over e The ACM also monitors the readiness of the electronic parts of the system whenever the ignition switch is in the START or ON positions These include all of the items listed above except the knee bolster the instru ment panel and the steering wheel and column If the key is in the LOCK position in the ACC position or not in the ignition the airbags are not on and will not inflate e The ACM also turns on the Airbag Warning Light in the instrument panel for 6 to 8 seconds as a self check when the ignition is first turned on After the self check the Airbag Warning Light will turn off If the ACM detects a malfunction in any part of the system it turns on the t A THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 47 airbag inflates This especially applies to children The side curtain airbag is only about 3 1 2 inches 9 cm their full size The bags fully inflate in about 50 70 milliseconds This is about half of the time that it takes thick when it is inflated e The Knee Impact Bolsters help protect the knees of 2 the driver and the front passenger and position every one
74. door will lock Therefore make sure the keys are not A power door lock switch is on each front door trim inside the vehicle before closing the door panel Use this switch to lock or unlock the doors WARNING e For personal security and safety in the event of an accident lock the vehicle doors as you drive as well as when you park and leave the vehicle T2 When leaving the vehicle always remove the key from the ignition lock and lock your vehicle Unsupervised use of vehicle equipment may cause severe personal injuries and death Never leave children alone in a vehicle Leaving children in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number of reasons A child or others could be seriously or fatally injured Don t leave the keys in the ignition A child could operate power windows other controls or move the vehicle Power Door Lock Switch If you press the power door lock switch while the key is in the ignition and any front door is open the power locks will not operate This prevents you from acciden tally locking your keys in the vehicle Removing the key or closing the door will allow the locks to operate A 24 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 77 81810 77 gt 5 7 080 e For vehicles equipped with the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC refer to Personal Settings Customer Programmable Features under Elec tronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC in Section 4 of this
75. either rating is exceeded You could lose control of the vehicle and have an accident TRAILER TOWING In this section you will find safety tips and information on limits to the type of towing you can reasonably do with your vehicle Before towing a trailer carefully review this information to tow your load as efficiently and safely as possible To maintain warranty coverage follow the requirements and recommendations in this manual concerning ve hicles used for trailer towing Common Towing Definitions The following trailer towing related definitions will assist you in understanding the following information Gross Vehicle Weight Rating GVWR The GVWR is the total allowable weight of your vehicle This includes driver passengers cargo and tongue weight The total load must be limited so that you do not exceed the GVWR Gross Trailer Weight GTW The gross trailer weight GTW is the weight of the trailer plus the weight of all cargo consumables and equipment permanent or temporary loaded in or on the trailer in its STARTING AND OPERATING 271 11111 Weight Distributing Hitch A weight distributing system works by applying lever age through spring load bars They are typically used for heavier loads to distribute trailer tongue weight to the tow vehicle s front axle and the trailer axle s When used in accordance
76. evidence of cuts cracks glazing or frayed cords and replaced if there is indication of damage which could ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 315 WARNING Catalytic Converter The catalytic converter requires the use of unleaded fuel The air induction system air cleaner hoses etc can only Leaded gasoline will destroy the effectiveness of the provide a measure of protection in the case of engine catalyst as an emission control device backfire Do not remove the air induction system air Under normal operating conditions the catalytic con cleaner hoses etc unless such removal is necessary verter will not require maintenance However it is im portant to Keep the engine properly tuned to assure proper catalyst operation and prevent possible catalyst damage CAUTION for repair or maintenance Make sure that no one is near the engine compartment before starting the vehicle with the air induction system air cleaner hoses etc removed Failure to do so can result in serious personal injury Fuel Filter A plugged fuel filter can cause stalling limit the speed at which a vehicle can be driven or cause hard starting Should an excessive amount of dirt accumulate in the fuel tank filter replacement may be necessary See your local dealer for service Damage to the catalytic converter can result if your vehicle is not kept in proper operating condition In the event of engine malfunction particularly involv ing engine mis
77. few minutes to warm up for proper operation Sometimes poor playback may be experienced due to a defective cassette tape Clean and demagnetize the tape heads at least twice a year 172 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 8 9 0 00 Noise Reduction The Dolby Noise Reduction System is on whenever the tape player is on but may be switched off To turn off the Dolby Noise reduction System Press Preset 1 after you insert the tape The NR light in the display will go off when the Dolby System is off Dolby noise reduction is manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories Licensing Corporation Dolby and the double D symbol are trademarks of Dolby Labo ratories Licensing Corporation Operation Instructions CD MODE for CD Audio Play NOTE The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC position to operate the radio NOTE Note This Radio is capable of playing compact discs CD recordable compact discs CD R rewritable compact discs CD RW compact discs with MP3 tracks and multisession compact discs with CD and MP3 tracks and WMA Tape Eject Press this button and the cassette will disen A gage and eject from the radio TAPE Scan Button Press this button to play 10 seconds of each selection Press the scan button a second time to cancel the feature Changing Tape Direction If you wish to change the direction of tape travel side being played press Preset 6 The lighted arrow in the display window
78. for temporary emergency use with radial tires It is engineered to be used on your style vehicle only Since this tire has limited tread life the original tire should be repaired or replaced and rein stalled at the first opportunity e Keep tire inflated to 60 PSI 414 KPa Cold Inflation Pressure e Avoid driving more than 50 miles 80 km before replacing tire and wheel This tire is designed as an emergency spare only do not exceed 50 MPH 80 km h speed 6 Raise the vehicle just enough to remove the flat tire and install the spare tire WARNING Raising the vehicle higher than necessary can make the vehicle less stable It could slip off the jack and hurt someone near it Raise the vehicle only enough to remove the tire 7 Remove the lug nuts wheel cover if equipped and tire Remove the cover by hand Do not pry it off 8 Mount the spare tire For vehicles equipped with wheel covers refer to Wheel Cover Installation Do not attempt to install a wheel cover on a compact spare 9 Tighten all the lug nuts on the mounting studs 10 Lower the vehicle to the ground by turning the jack handle counter clockwise 11 Fully tighten the lug nuts Torque the wheel lug nuts to 100 ft lb 135 N m ee WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 293 1 Tighten the two lug nuts on the mounting studs on each side of the stud which is in alignment with the valve stem 2 Align the valve notch in the wheel cover with the
79. heat level for both cushion and back should be adjusted so that the upper edge is as high as The driver seat and front passenger seat are heated practical ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 93 If high level heating is selected the system will automati cally switch to the low level after 30 minutes of continu ous operation At that time the number of illuminated LEDs changes from two to one indicating the change Operation on the low setting also turns off automatically after 30 minutes NOTE Once a heat setting is selected heat will be felt within two to five minutes WARNING Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin because of advanced age chronic illness diabetes spinal cord injury medication alcohol use exhaus tion or other physical condition must exercise care when using the seat heater It may cause burns even at low temperatures especially if used for long periods Do not place anything on the seat that insulates against heat such as a blanket or cushion This may cause the seat heater to overheat The controls for each heater are located near the bottom center of the instrument panel After turning on the ignition you can choose from High Off or Low heat settings Amber LEDs in the top portion of each switch indicate the level of heat in use Two LEDs will illuminate for high one for low and none for off ce aa Front Heated Seat Switch Press the switch once to select hi
80. in the open position To prevent possible damage do not slam the hood to close it Lower the hood until it is open approximately 6 inches 15 cm and then drop it This should secure both latches Never drive your vehicle unless the hood is fully closed with both latches engaged TO OPEN AND CLOSE THE HOOD Two latches must be released to open the hood First pull the hood release lever located under the left side of the instrument panel IHH AI oe seers fc EE e T i Tree Sees eee E PE crt ae see TESTES iU ES i NISI E a trrre Mito Ik 5 Hood Release Lever Next move to the outside of the vehicle and push the safety catch to the left The safety catch is located under the center front edge of the hood 96 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 0 9 9090909999 Headlight Switch Rotate the headlight switch clockwise to the first detent for parking light and instrument panel light operation Turn it to the second detent for headlight park light and instrument panel light operation Automatic Headlights
81. is disconnected or goes dead the auto up function will be disabled To reactivate the auto up feature perform the following steps after vehicle power is restored 1 Pull the window switch up to close window com pletely and continue to hold the switch up for an additional two seconds after the window is closed 2 Push the window switch down firmly to the second detent to open the window completely and continue to hold the switch down for an additional two seconds after the window is fully open Wind Buffeting Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of pressure on the ears or a helicopter type sound in the ears Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the windows down or the sunroof if equipped in certain open or partially open positions This is a normal occur rence and can be minimized If the buffeting occurs with the rear windows open then open the front and rear windows together to minimize the buffeting If the Window Lockout Switch The window lockout switch on the driver s door allows you to disable the window controls on the passenger doors When the switch is pressed the window controls on the passenger doors will not illuminate and the passenger windows will be disabled ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 1 5134530 Liftgate Release Switch The liftgate will not open manually if the gear selector is moved out of the PARK position or the vehicle speed is above 0 mph 0 km h
82. lever in the P Park position when the ignition switch is in the LOCK position To move the selector lever out of the P Park position the ignition switch must be turned to the ON position and the brake pedal must be depressed The selector lever is automatically locked while in the P Park position To move the selector lever out of the P Park position the brake pedal must be firmly depressed before the shift lock will release Shift the selector lever to the desired position only when the engine is idling normally and the brake pedal is applied Do not release the brake until ready to drive The vehicle may otherwise accelerate quickly when the selec tor lever is in D Drive or R Reverse position WARNING Unintended movement of a vehicle could injure those in and near the vehicle As with all vehicles you should never exit a vehicle while the engine is running Before exiting a vehicle you should always shift the vehicle into P Park remove the key from the ignition and apply the parking brake Once the key is removed from the ignition the transmission selector lever is locked in the P Park position securing the vehicle against unwanted movement Furthermore you should never leave children unat tended inside a vehicle 214 STARTING AND OPERATING 0 out of the park position without pressing the brake After operation return the rubber storage tray to its original position 4 Speed Automatic Transmissio
83. manual for details e For vehicles not equipped with the EVIC performing the following procedure 1 Close all doors and place the key in the ignition 2 Cycle the ignition switch between LOCK and ON and then back to LOCK 4 times ending up in the LOCK position 3 Depress the power door lock switch to lock the doors 4 A single chime will indicate the completion of the programming 5 Repeat these steps if you want to return this feature to its previous setting NOTE Use the Automatic Door Locks feature in accor dance with local laws chime will sound if the key is in the LOCK or ACC position and a door is open as a reminder to remove the key Automatic Door Locks The doors will lock automatically on vehicles with power door locks if all of the following conditions are met 1 The Automatic Door Locks feature is enabled 2 The transmission is in gear 3 All doors are closed 4 The throttle is pressed 5 The vehicle speed is above 15 mph 24 km h 6 The doors were not previously locked using the power door lock switch or remote keyless entry transmitter Automatic Door Locks Programming The Automatic Door Locks feature can be enabled or disabled as follows ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 25 e For vehicles not equipped with the EVIC performing the following procedure 1 Close all doors and place the key in the ignition 2 Cycle the ignition switch between LOCK and ON and then
84. of the vehicle at the comfort levels desired by the driver and passenger To accomplish this the system gathers information from Panel Air flows through the outlets located in the instrument panel Air flows through the regis ters in the back of the center console to the rear seat passengers These registers can be closed to block airflow e e Recirculation Control The mode control knob also controls the C recirculation feature You can choose Bi Level Recirculation air outlets Panel Re circulation air outlets or a mix or both while in this mode Normally air enters from out side the vehicle However when in Recirculation mode air inside the vehicle is re used Use this mode to cool the inside of the vehicle rapidly The Recirculation mode can also be used to temporarily block out outside odors smoke and dust Air Conditioning Control Press this button to turn on and turn off the air conditioning When the air conditioning is turned on cool dehumidified air will flow through the outlets selected with the mode control Press this button 194 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL would like the system to maintain by rotating the driver or passenger Temperature Control knob Once the com fort level is selected the system will maintain that level automatically using the heating system Should the de sired comfort level require air conditioning the system will automatically make the adjustment
85. on the driver s door control all the A xu z 22 zu 7 MILI PATATE LUE ELS pp EAE 2 ne A EEL MI E HHS i LE m rx s T End i md E m ui m il E E Lu HE en n unus E 21 2 TE ite INI iren f Dur IU EE 2 RE II I TI hy Hing B ce inue m eee E Iur E E r EM 7 EE i A IIl SIDDSINERU i Lu BIN RD E II PETET x Ww INIBENI 3 mE ir T Bebe ett mE TEESE 2 SE UIIUMeI iE i ANIME Tuve 221 i IEEE ES EH VILIA i Eu x IL INI Illi ilt in IL i in Ei i ES Rr mE i iu E EIE 2 i Nun LI Pee a 2 2 E EARR eee Uii i e ee re ts ea a a Ta Fa See DEDERE Fa a Fa a Mn nnn nM aa z A SRD z ED s um 3 IM mer IDEM pH md SR 3 iS m 2 HN I 2 E TE m n E 0 E pb 2 TEES 2 i EE p Mi E HITE i itn as i BM A NEA n RAELE m PLU a a a a a En
86. oo ns 107 0 Overhead Console Map Reading Lights 100 VIO Resume Speed x exu cac we Ps 107 N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 65 o To Vary The Speed Setting 108 Pinch Protect Feature ses s ou ood x deae ders 116 To Accelerate For Passing uas dussesks ses 108 Tien rotot Ovenide lees 117 W Overhead Console 109 O Venting Sunroor EXpress 224 ess teenie ws 117 o Courtesy Reading Lights 109 O Sunshade Operation TSEC SOE fuse ease es 109 E Ond BUCE a one 1 99 a vu Garage Door Opener HomeLink If O 500170607 Maintenance s s seam dere REIR dcn 117 117 n nnn 2 O Ignition Off Operation Equipped M O Sunroof Fully Closed 118 O Canadian Programming Gate Programming 113 B Electrical Power Outlets 118 tnt eibi us oO Electrical Outlet Use With Engine Off 120 00 O Erasing HomeLink Buttons 114 M Cup Holders ccc eee 121 121 RR EEEO 8 OFront oeat Cap HOES a css DSCC A 115 D Rear Seat Cup Holders 121 W Power Sunroof If Equipped H9 fervorem 122 00011 0107 107757 SE us El Console Features 122 O Closing Sunroof Express ssc ex 116 B Cargo Management S
87. optimized for the original equipment tires and wheels TPMS pressures and warning have been established for the tire size equipped on your vehicle Undesirable system operation or sensor damage may result when using replacement equipment that is not of the same size type and or style After market wheels can cause sensor damage Do not use tire sealant from a can or balance beads if your vehicle is equipped with a TPMS as damage to the sensors may result After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure always reinstall the valve stem cap This will prevent moisture and dirt from entering the valve stem which could damage the Tire Pressure Monitoring Sensor ee STARTING AND OPERATING 257 receives the updated tire pressures the system will automatically update and the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will turn off The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 10 minutes above 15 mph 25 km h in order for the TPMS to receive this information Low pressure in the spare tire will not cause the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light to illuminate or the chime to sound Check TPMS Warning The Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will flash on and off for 60 seconds and an audible chime will sound when a system fault is detected The flash cycle will repeat every ten minutes without an audible chime until the fault condition no longer exists If the ignition key is cycled this sequence will repeat providing the syste
88. or gain may occur so it may be preferable to drive without speed control WARNING Speed Control can be dangerous where the system can t maintain a constant speed Your vehicle could go too fast for the conditions and you could lose control An accident could be the result Don t use Speed Control in heavy traffic or on roads that are winding icy snow covered or slippery speed To do so push the lever up and release RES ACCEL and then remove your foot from the accelerator pedal To Vary the Speed Setting When the speed control is set you can increase speed by pushing the lever up and holding RES ACCEL When the lever is released a new set speed will be established Pushing the lever up and releasing RES ACCEL once will result in a 1 mph 1 6 km h speed increase Each time the lever is pushed up and released speed increases so that pushing the lever up and releasing three times will increase speed by 3 mph 4 8 km h etc To decrease speed while speed control is set push the lever down and hold SET DECEL Release the lever when the desired speed is reached and a new set speed will be established Pushing down and releasing the lever SET DECEL once will result in a 1 mph 1 6 km h speed decrease Each time the lever is pushed down and released speed decreases ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 109 Courtesy Reading Lights At the forward end of the c
89. q 3 ted RE 141 284 Pregnant Women and Seat Belts 40 Owner s Manual Operator Manual 377 Preparation for Jacking 286 392 INDEX 1 1 00 Recreational IOWIBE ous REP dadas 282 Reformulated Gasoline 262 1 6 8168670715 ere ys a8 319 Reminder Seat Belt uu 39 Remote Keyless Entry RKE 17 Remote Sound System Radio Controls 187 Replacement Paris 1404526454 ERA 44546 308 Replacement TIES pu cea cto sess aebaeeuass 250 1 6 707 105 59700710616618 muda cdduad ame sa 77 Restraint Head ceres 92 Restraints Child 25324 sd caee se wees 51 Restraints Qecupantl 24042554584 edo dedos deed 33 Rocking Vehicle When Stuck sss ss Rex 297 Roof Rack Luggage Rack 129 Rotation Tires 4 6 44 Ev ed Y Sae 253 Safety Checks Inside Vehicle 61 Safety Checks Outside Vehicle 61 Safety Defects Reporting 377 Salety Exhaust GAS aai aad EX EY TREES 32 Safety Information Tire 236 I DES C eee eens hee eoea dS 58 Satellite Radio Pretensioners Seat DES 22 3019 978 979 93 4 899 ur PORE REOR 38 Programmable Electronic Features 111 114 156 Programming Transmitters Re
90. racks that require perma nent attachments bolts or screws for installation on the vehicle roof Do not drill into the roof of the vehicle for any reason Do not drill cut or tamper with the knee bolster in any Way Do not mount any accessories to the knee bolster such as alarm lights stereos citizens band radios etc 44 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 0009999 9 7 777 7 0000 6 You should read the instructions provided with your child restraint to make sure that you are using it properly 7 All occupants should use their seat belts properly 8 The driver and front passenger seats should be moved back as far as practical to allow the airbags time to inflate 9 If your vehicle has side curtain airbags do not lean against the door airbags will inflate forcefully into the space between you and the door 10 If the airbag system in this vehicle needs to be modified to accommodate a disabled person contact the Customer Center Phone numbers are provided in the If You Need Customer Assistance section in this manual Here are some simple steps you can take to minimize the risk of harm from a deploying airbag 1 Children 12 years old and under should ride buckled up in the rear seat 2 Infants in rear facing child restraints should NEVER ride in the front seat of a vehicle with a passenger front airbag An airbag deployment could cause severe injury or death to infants in that position 3 Ch
91. re commonly used to tow small and medium sized trailers 272 STARTING AND OPERATING WARNING EXAMPLE ONLY e An improperly adjusted Weight Distributing Hitch system may reduce handling stability braking performance and could result in an acci dent Weight Distributing Systems may not be compat ible with Surge Brake Couplers Consult with your hitch and trailer manufacturer or a reputable Recreational Vehicle dealer for additional infor mation 8186115 Weight Distributing Hitch System STARTING AND OPERATING 273 0 1 Refer to the Trailer Towing Weights Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings chart for the Max GTW towable for your given drivetrain Trailer Hitch Classification Class Max GTW Gross Trailer Wt Class I Light Dut 2 000 Ibs 907 kg Class II Medium 3 500 Ibs 1587 kg Dut Class III Heavy Dut 5 000 Ibs 2268 kg Class IV Extra 10 000 Ibs 4540 kg Heavy Duty All trailer hitches should be professionally installed on your vehicle Trailer Towing Weights Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings The following chart provides the maximum trailer weight ratings towable for your given drivetrain EXAMPLE ONLY FIG 3 IMPROPER ADJUSTMENT INCORRECT 118197 Improper Adjustment of Weight Distributing System Trailer Hitch Classification Your vehicle may be factory equipped for safe towing of trailers weighing over 2 000 Ibs 907 kg with
92. say the name of the person you want to call For example you can say John Doe where John Doe is a previ ously stored name entry in the UConnect phone book Refer to Add Names to Your UConnect Phonebook to learn how to store a name in the phonebook e The UConnect system will confirm the name and then dial the corresponding phone number which may appear in the display of certain radios N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 75 After you are finished editing an entry in the phonebook you will be given the opportunities to edit another entry in the phonebook call the number you just edited or return to the main menu Phonebook Edit can be used to add another phone number to a name entry that already exists in the phonebook For example the entry John Doe may have a mobile and a home number but you can add John Doe s work number later using the Phonebook Edit feature Delete Entries in the UConnect Phonebook NOTE Editing phonebook entries is recommended when vehicle is not in motion e Press the Phone button to begin e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Phonebook Delete e After you enter the Phonebook Delete menu you will then be asked for the name of the entry that you wish to delete You can either say the name of a phonebook entry that you wish to delete or you can say List Names to hear a list of the entries in the phonebook The UConnect system
93. spark plug Malfunctioning spark plugs can damage the cata lytic converter For proper type of replacement spark plugs refer to the Vehicle Emission Control Informa tion label in the engine compartment Engine Air Cleaner Filter For normal driving conditions inspect and replace the engine air cleaner filter at the intervals shown on Sched ule A For vehicles driven frequently in dusty or under severe conditions inspect and replace the engine air cleaner filter at the intervals shown on Schedule B Engine Oil Filter The engine oil filter should be replaced at every engine oil change Engine Oil Filter Selection This manufacturer s engines have a full flow type oil filter Use a filter of this type for replacement The quality of replacement filters varies considerably Only high quality filters should be used to assure most efficient service Mopar Engine Oil Filters are a high quality oil filter and are recommended Drive Belts Check Condition and Tension Belt tension is controlled by means of an automatic tensioner Therefore no belt tension adjustments are required However belt and belt tensioner condition should be inspected at the specified intervals and re placed if required Improper belt tension can cause belt slippage and failure Low generator belt tension can cause battery failure At the mileage indicated in the maintenance schedule inspect belt and belt tensioner condition Inspect belts for
94. steps 1 Press the LOCK button on a programmed transmitter for at least 4 seconds but not longer than 10 seconds Then press the PANIC button while still holding the LOCK button 2 Release both buttons at the same time ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 1 2 Separate the two halves of the transmitter with a flat blade tool Do not damage the rubber seal during re moval Separating Transmitter Halves 81682 3 Remove and replace the battery Avoid touching the new battery with your fingers Skin oils may cause battery deterioration If you touch a battery clean it with rubbing alcohol NOTE e The interior lights will turn off if you turn the ignition switch to the ACC or ON position while the panic alarm is activated However the exterior lights and horn will remain on e You may need to be less than 23 feet 7 meters from the vehicle when using the transmitter to turn off the panic alarm due to the radio frequency noises emitted by the system Programming Additional Transmitters Refer to SENTRY KEY Customer Key Programming See page 14 for more information If you do not have a programmed transmitter contact your dealer for details Battery Replacement The recommended replacement battery is CR2032 NOTE Do not touch the battery terminals that are on the back housing or the printed circuit board 1 With the transmitter buttons facing downward re move the small screw if equipped
95. that option without having to listen to the rest of the voice prompt 82 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 7 7 7 2 e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Mute In order to un mute the UConnect system e Press the Voice Recognition button e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Mute off Information Service When using AT amp I Wireless Service dialing to phone number 121 you can access voice activated automated system to receive news weather stocks traffic etc related information Advanced Phone Connectivity Transfer Call to and from Cellular Phone The UConnect system allows on going calls to be transferred from your cellular phone to the UConnect system without terminating the call To transfer an ongo ing call from your UConnect paired cellular phone to the UConnect system or vice versa press the Voice Recognition button and say Transfer Call Dialing Using the Cellular Phone Keypad You can dial a phone number with your cellular phone keypad and still use the UConnect system while dialing via the cell phone keypad the user must exercise caution and take precautionary safety measures By dialing a number with your paired Bluetooth cellular phone the audio will be played through your vehicle s audio system The UConnect system will work the same as if you dial the number using voice recognition NOTE C
96. the 3 5L Engine during cold weather only to improve cold weather starting American Petroleum Institute API Engine Oil Identification Symbol This symbol means that the oil has been certified by the American Petroleum Institute API The manufacture only recommends API Certified engine oils Engine Oil Viscosity SAE Grade 2 7L and 5 7L Engines SAE 5W 20 engine oil is recommended for all operating temperatures This engine oil improves low temperature starting and vehicle fuel economy The engine oil filler cap also shows the recommended engine oil viscosity for your engine For information on engine oil filler cap location refer to the Engine Com partment illustration in this section NOTE Vehicles equipped with a 5 7L engine must use SAE 5W 20 oil Failure to do so may result in improper ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 313 ENGINE OIL VISCOSITY CHART Lubricants that do not have both the engine oil certifica tion mark and the correct SAE viscosity grade number should not be used Synthetic Engine Oils You may use synthetic engine oils provided the recom mended oil quality requirements are met and the recom mended maintenance intervals for oil and filter changes are followed Materials Added to Engine Oil The manufacturer strongly recommends against the ad dition of any additives other than leak detection dyes to the engine oil Engine oil is an engineered product and its performance may be impaired b
97. the ABS Light will turn on in the event of an EBD failure Immediate repair of the ABS system is required in the event of an EBD failure The operation of the Brake Warning Light can be checked by turning the ignition switch from the OFF position to 146 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M The Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will illumi nate in the instrument cluster and an audible chime will be activated when one or more tire pressures is low The Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will flash on and off for 60 seconds when a system fault is detected The flash cycle will repeat every ten minutes or until the fault condition is removed and reset See page 254 for more information CAUTION The TPMS has been optimized for the original equipment tires and wheels TPMS pressures and warning have been established for the tire size equipped on your vehicle Undesirable system op eration or sensor damage may result when using replacement equipment that is not of the same size type and or style After market wheels can cause sensor damage Do not use tire sealant from a can or balance beads if your vehicle is equipped with a TPMS as damage to the sensors may result vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label If your vehicle has tires of a different size than the size indicated on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pres sure label you should determine the proper tire inflation pressure for those tires
98. the Speed Symbol should only be achieved un der specified operating conditions i e tire pressure vehicle loading road conditions and posted speed limits blank Absence of any text on sidewall of the tire indicates a Standard Load SL Tire Maximum Load Maximum Load indicates the maximum load this tire is designed to carry Maximum Pressure Maximum Pressure indicates the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure for this tire es STARTING AND OPERATING 239 Tire Identification Number TIN Look for the TIN on the outboard side of black sidewall The TIN may be found on one or both sides of the tire tires as mounted on the vehicle If the TIN is not found on however the date code may only be on one side Tires the outboard side then you will find it on the inboard side with white sidewalls will have the full TIN including of the tire date code located on the white sidewall side of the tire EXAMPLE DOT MA L9 ABCD 0301 DOT Department of Transportation This symbol certifies that the tire is in compliance with the U S Department of Transportation tire safety standards and is approved for hiehway use its L9 Code representing ABCD Code used by tire manufacturer 1 to 4 digits 03 Number representing the week in which the tire was manufactured 2 digits 03 means the 3rd week 01 Number representing the year in which the tire was manufactured 2 digits 01 means the year 2001
99. the System If something triggers the alarm and no action is taken to disarm it the system will turn off the horn after 29 seconds turn off all of the visual signals after 31 seconds and then the system will rearm itself To Arm the System Remove the key from the ignition switch and either press a power door lock switch while the driver or passenger door is open or press the LOCK button on the keyless entry transmitter After the last door is closed or if all doors are closed the system will arm itself in about 16 seconds During that time the Vehicle Security Alarm Indicator light will flash If it does not illuminate the The new Sentry Key is programmed The Keyless Entry Transmitter will also be programmed during this pro cedure Repeat this procedure to program up to 8 keys If you do not have a programmed sentry key contact your dealer for details NOTE If a programmed key is lost see your dealer to have all remaining keys erased from the systems memory This will prevent the lost key from starting your vehicle The remaining keys must then be repro grammed All vehicle keys must be taken to the dealer at the time of service to be reprogrammed General Information The Sentry Key system complies with FCC rules part 15 and with RSS 210 of Industry Canada Operation is subject to the following conditions e This device may not cause harmful interference e This device must accept any interference that may be rec
100. the first push of the button and will turn off after approximately 5 minutes for the second push of the button Adding Washer Fluid The windshield washer and rear window washer share the same fluid reservoir The reservoir is located in the front of the engine compartment on the passenger side of the vehicle Be sure to check the fluid level at regular intervals Fill the reservoir with windshield washer sol vent not radiator antifreeze and operate the system for ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 203 CAUTION To avoid damaging the electrical conductors of the rear window defroster do not use scrapers sharp instruments or abrasive window cleaners on the interior surface of the window Labels can be peeled off after soaking with warm water STARTING AND OPERATING CONTENTS Starting Procedures 208 04 Speed Automatic Transmission 214 HD Automatic Transmission 209 05 Speed Automatic Transmission Normal SURES EEEIPEES S 200 W AutoStick If Equipped H Extremely Cold Weather Below 20 F B Auto5lick Operaion dde e mg mk dns 223 Or 29 C e n nn n 77 All Wheel Drive If Equipped 223 Oif Engine Fails To Start wes 2 652 dox eee 209 Driving On Slippery Surfaces 224 D After Starting 7 210 6661678116071 e quu uu Geen seeps
101. the optional Trailer Tow Prep Package See your authorized dealer for package content The following chart provides the industry standard for the maximum trailer weight a given trailer hitch class can tow and should be used to assist you in selecting the correct trailer hitch for your intended towing condition 274 STARTING AND OPERATING 0 Max Tongue Wt 100 Ibs 45 kg 100 Ibs 45 kg 100 Ibs 45 kg Up to 2 persons amp Lug gage 1 000 lbs 454 kg Up to 3 persons amp gage 1 000 lbs 454 kg Up to 4 persons amp T gage 1 000 lbs 454 kg Up to 5 persons amp Luggage 1 000 lbs 454 kg Up to 2 persons amp Lug gage 2 000 lbs 907 kg Up to 3 persons amp gage 2 000 lbs 907 kg Up to 4 persons amp gage 1 500 lbs 680 kg Up to 5 persons amp z Luggage 1 000 lbs 454 kg 22 SQ FT 2 04 square ee 22 SQ FT 2 04 square meters 22 SQ FT 2 04 square meters 22 SQ FT 2 04 square meters 32 SQ FT 2 97 square meters 32 SQ FT 2 97 square meters 32 SQ FT 2 97 square meters 32 SQ FT 2 97 square meters Engine Transmission Max GTW Gross Trailer Wt 2 7L Automatic 3 5L amp 5 7L Automatic ee STARTING AND OPERATING 275 Max Tongue Wt 380 Ibs 172 kg 300 Ibs 136 kg Up to 2 persons amp Lug gage 3 800 lbs 1724 ke Up to 3 persons amp Lug gage 3 000 lbs 1361 ke Up to 4 persons amp Lug gage 1 500 lbs
102. through an automated system such as voice mail or when sending a page at the end of speaking the digit string make sure to say send Storing names in phonebook when vehicle is not in motion is recommended It is not recommended to store similar sounding names in the UConnect phonebook Delete UConnect Paired Cellular Phones e Press the Phone button to begin e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Setup Phone Pairing e At the next prompt say Delete and follow the prompts e You can also press the Voice Recognition button anytime while the list is being played and then choose the phone you wish to delete Things You Should Know About Your UConnect System Voice Recognition VR o e Always wait for the beep before speaking e Speak normally without pausing just as you would speak to a person sitting approximately eight 8 feet away from you e Make sure that no one other than you is speaking during a voice recognition period ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 85 e UConnect phonebook nametag recognition rate is e Operation from driver seat optimized for the voice of the person who stored the e Performance such as audio clarity echo and loudness name in the phonebook to a large degree rely on the phone and network and e You can say O letter O for 0 zero 800 must be not the UConnect system Ws h 5 _ s 00 706 e Echo at far end can so
103. to a trailer connector Do not connect trailer brakes to your vehicle s hy Refer to the following illustrations draulic brake lines It can overload your brake sys tem and cause it to fail You might not have brakes when you need them and could have an accident RIGHT A STOP TURN Towing any trailer will increase your stopping dis LEFT FEMALE tance When towing you should allow for additional STOP TURN PINS space between your vehicle and the vehicle in front O ra of you Failure to do so could result in an accident PARK eL Towing Requirements Trailer Lights amp Wiring MALE PIN Whenever you pull a trailer regardless of the trailer size stop lights and turn signals on the trailer are required for 813262be motoring safety 4 Pin Connector The Trailer Tow Package may include a 4 and 7 pin wiring harness Use a factory approved trailer harness and connector NOTE Do not cut or splice wiring into the vehicles wiring harness Towing Tips Before setting out on a trip practice turning stopping and backing the trailer in an area located away from heavy traffic Towing Tips Automatic Transmission The D range can be selected when towing However if frequent shifting occurs while in this range the 3 range should be selected NOTE Using the 3 range while operating the vehicle under heavy operating conditions will improve perfor mance and extend transmission life by reducing exces sive shi
104. to steering and suspension components You could lose control e Fast tire wear and have an accident resulting in serious injury or death Use only the tire and wheel sizes with load ratings approved for your vehicle Never use a tire with a smaller load index or e Vehicle pull to right or left capacity other than what was originally equipped on your vehicle Using a tire with a smaller load index could result in tire overloading and failure You could lose control and have an accident may result in false speedometer and odometer read ings Alignment And Balance Poor suspension alignment may result in rem e Uneven tire wear such as feathering and one sided wear Tires may also cause the vehicle to pull to the left or right Alignment will not correct this condition See your dealer for proper diagnosis Improper alignment will not cause vehicle vibration Vibration may be a result of tire and wheel out of balance Proper balancing will reduce vibration and avoid tire cupping and spotty wear Failure to equip your vehicle with tires having adequate speed capability can result in sudden tire failure and loss of vehicle control 252 STARTING AND OPERATING 0 7 76 33 3 7 7 7 _ SELF SEALING TIRES IF EQUIPPED CAUTION A non hardening viscous sealant applied to the inner liner of each tire fills punctures up to 0 19 in 5 mm to To avoid damage to your vehicle or tires obse
105. using the highest priority phone present in or near approximately with in 30 feet the vehicle Connect or Disconnect Link Between the UConnect System and Cellular Phone Your cellular phone can be paired with many different electronic devices but can only be actively connected with one electronic device at a time If you would like to connect or disconnect the Blue tooth connection between a UConnect paired cellular phone and the UConnect system then follow the instruction described in your cellular phone user s manual List Paired Cellular Phone Names e Press the Phone button to begin e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Setup Phone pairing e When prompted say List Phones e The UConnect system will play the phone names of all paired cellular phones in order from the highest to the lowest priority To select or delete a paired phone being announced press the Voice recognition 84 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 5 6 01 11 7 02 5 7 Performance is maximized under e low to medium blower setting e low to medium vehicle speed e low road noise e smooth road surface e fully closed windows e dry weather condition Even though the system is designed for users speaking in North American English French and Spanish ac cents the system may not always work for some When navigating
106. valve stem on the wheel 3 Install the cover by hand snapping the cover over the two lug nuts Do not use a hammer or excessive force to install the cover 4 Install the remaining lug nuts 5 Return to Step 9 of the Jacking and Changing a Tire procedure Wheel Cover Installation If Required VALVE VALVE NOTCH were E Be HER j ny n ur a 3 WHEE LUG NUT MOUNTING STUD WHEEL COVER 5006360 52 0 0 6 9 090990027 999 0 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 294 JUMP STARTING PROCEDURES NOTE The battery is stored under a hinged access cover in the load floor in the cargo area Remote battery terminals are located in the engine compartment for WARNING jump starting Take care to avoid the radiator cooling fan whenever the hood is raised It can start anytime the ignition switch is on 1 Wear eye protection and remove any metal jewelry You can be hurt by the fan such as watchbands or bracelets that might make an Do not attempt to push or tow your vehicle to get it started inadvertent electrical contact Vehicles equipped with an automatic transmission cannot be started this way Unburned fuel could enter the catalytic 2 When boost is provided by a battery in another t d th ine has started ignite and dana bes a e mE vehicle park that vehicle within booster cable reach but discharged batte
107. vehicle handling To avoid loss of control result ing in personal injury follow these guidelines for loading your vehicle e Always place cargo evenly on the cargo floor Put heavier objects as low and as far forward as possible ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 129 e Place as much cargo as possible in front of the rar ROOF LUGGAGE RACK IF EQUIPPED axle Too much weight or improperly placed weight The roof luggage rack consists of side rails and adjustable over or behind the rear axle can cause the rear of the crossbars The roof luggage rack is designed to carry up vehicle to sway to 150 Ibs 68 kg of cargo uniformly distributed over e Do not pile luggage or cargo higher than the top of the 0 l8 seatback This could impair visibility or become a When loading cargo on the roof luggage rack distribute dangerous projectile in a sudden stop or collision the cargo weight evenly on the crossbars The roof luggage rack does not increase the total load carrying WARNING capacity of the vehicle Be sure that the total load of cargo inside the vehicle plus that on the external rack To help protect against personal injury passengers does not exceed the maximum vehicle load capacity should not be seated in the rear cargo area The rear Refer to the Tire and Loading Information placard for cargo space is intended for load carrying purposes more information about cargo and load capacity The only not for passengers who
108. when the turn signal lever is operated NOTE Acontinuous chime will sound if the vehicle is driven more than 1 mile 1 6 km with either turn signal on NOTE Check for a defective outside light bulb if either indicator flashes at a rapid rate See page 99 for more information UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 143 Do not operate the vehicle until the cause is corrected This light does not show how much oil is in the engine The engine oil level must be checked using the procedure shown in section 7 See page 309 for more information 15 High Beam Light z This light will turn on when the high beam headlights are ON Push the Multi Function lever away from the steering wheel to switch the headlights to high beam See page 99 for more information 16 Seat Belt Reminder Light This light will turn on for 5 to 8 seconds as a bulb check when the ignition switch is first turned ON A chime will sound if the driver s seat belt is unbuckled during the bulb check The Seat Belt Warning Light will flash or remain on continu ously if the driver s seat belt remains unbuckled after the bulb check or when driving See page 39 for more information 17 Transmission Range Indicator This display indicator shows the automatic transmission gear selection and driving to the prevailing road conditions and do not switch off the ESP or TCS if equipped See page 230 for more information 5ee page 233 for mor
109. while cranking the engine This should clear any excess fuel in case the engine is flooded CAUTION To prevent damage to the starter do not crank the engine for more than 15 seconds at a time Wait 10 to 15 seconds before trying again Automatic Transmission The gear selector must be in the NEUTRAL or PARK position before you can start the engine Apply the brakes before shifting into any driving gear Normal Starting Normal Starting of either a cold or a warm engine is obtained without pumping or depressing the accelerator pedal Turn the key to the START position and release when the engine starts If the engine has not started within 3 seconds slightly depress the accelerator pedal while continuing to crank If the engine fails to start within 15 seconds turn the key to the LOCK position wait 10 to 15 seconds then repeat the normal starting procedure Extremely Cold Weather below 20 F or 29 C To insure reliable starting at these temperatures use of an externally powered electric engine block heater available from your dealer is recommended 20028 0 7 7 0808000091080902 11484100 STARTING AND OPERATING 210 If the engine is flooded it may start to run but not have enough power to continue running when the key is released If this occurs continue cranking up to 15 seconds with the accelerator pedal pushed all the way to the floor Release the accelerator pedal and the key once th
110. will allow you to enter up to 32 names in the phonebook with each name having up to four associated phone numbers and designations Each language has a separate 32 name phonebook accessible only in that language Edit Entries in the UConnect Phonebook NOTE Editing phonebook entries is recommended when vehicle is not in motion Press the Phone button to begin After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Phonebook Edit You will then be asked for the name of the phonebook entry that you wish to edit Next choose the number designation home work mobile or pager that you wish to edit When prompted recite the new phone number for the phonebook entry that you are editing 8 79 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR 76 After confirmation the phonebook entries will be deleted List All Names in the UConnect Phonebook Press the Phone button to begin After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Phonebook List Names The UConnect system will play the names of all the phonebook entries To call one of the names in the list press the Voice Recognition button during the playing of the desired name and then say Call NOTE the user can also exercise Edit or Delete operations at this point The UConnect system will then prompt you as to number designation you wish to call The selected nu
111. will show the new direction Metal Tape Selection If a standard metal tape is inserted into the player the player will automatically select the correct equalization Pinch Roller Release If ignition power or the radio ON OFF switch is turned off the pinch roller will automatically retract to protect the tape from any damage When power is restored to the tape player the pinch roller will automatically reengage and the tape will resume play ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 173 SCAN Button CD MODE for CD Audio Play Press the Scan button to scan through each track on the CD currently playing LOAD EJECT Button CD Mode for CD Audio Play LOAD EJECT Load Press the LOAD EJT button and the push button with the corresponding number where the CD is being loaded The radio will display PLEASE WAIT and prompt when to INSERT DISC After the radio displays INSERT DISC insert the CD into the player Radio display will show LOADING DISC when the disc is loading and READING DISC when the radio is reading the disc LOAD EJT Eject Press the LOAD EJT button and the push A button with the corresponding number where LOAD the CD was loaded and the disc will unload and move to the entrance for easy removal LOAD Inserting Compact Disc s CAUTION This CD player will accept 4 3 4 inch 12 cm discs only The use of other sized discs may damage the CD player mechanism You may eject a disc with the radi
112. windshield wipers off when driving through an automatic car wash Damage to the windshield wipers may result if the wiper switch is left in any position other than OFF Intermittent Wiper System Use the intermittent wiper when weather conditions make a single wiping cycle with a variable pause be tween cycles desirable Rotate the end of the multi function lever to the first detent position and then turn the end of the lever to select the desired delay interval There are six delay settings which allow you to regulate the wipe interval from a minimum of one cycle every second to a maximum of approximately 23 seconds between cycles E UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 103 Adding Washer Fluid The windshield washer fluid reservoir is located in the front of the engine compartment on the passenger side of the vehicle Be sure to check the fluid level in the reservoir at regular intervals Fill the reservoir with windshield washer solvent not radiator antifreeze and operate the system for a few seconds to flush out the Ea mrn Washer Fluid Reservoir two wipe cycles after releasing the lever and then resume the intermittent interval previously selected If you activate the washer while the windshield wiper is turned OFF the wipers will operate for two wipe cycles and then turn OFF Headlights On with Wipers Available with Auto Headlights Only When this feature is active the headlights will turn o
113. with the manufacturers directions it provides for a more level ride offering more consistent steering and brake control thereby enhancing towing safety The addition of a friction hydraulic sway control also dampens sway caused by traffic and crosswinds and contributes positively to tow vehicle and trailer stability Trailer sway control and a weight distributing load equalizing hitch are recommended for heavier Tongue Weights TW and may be required depending on Vehicle and Trailer configuration loading to comply with gross axle weight rating GAWR requirements Tongue Weight TW Tongue weight TW is the downward force exerted on the hitch ball by the trailer In most cases it should not be less than 10 or more than 15 of the trailer load You must consider this as part of the load on your vehicle Frontal Area Frontal area is the maximum height and maximum width of the front of a trailer Trailer Sway Control The trailer sway control is a telescoping link that can be installed between the hitch receiver and the trailer tongue that typically provides adjustable friction associated with the telescoping motion to dampen any unwanted trailer swaying motions while traveling Weight Carrying Hitch A weight carrying hitch supports the trailer tongue weight just as if it were luggage located at a hitch ball or some other connecting point of the vehicle These kinds of hitches are the most popular on the market today and they
114. 0 Service Engine Soon Malfunction Indicator 147 Electronic Throttle Control Warning 141 Tire Pressure Monitoring TPMS 145 254 Engine Jemperature Warning 142 TIacHon COO 4262464548 uos RAE CR RR 235 ROG Pr 98 144 TU Rl cde e Te a qc d d 99 142 Hazard Warning Flasher a4 Ex E 284 p opo Pr TPTP 140 Headlight Switch aue desc iet Rr een 96 Warning Instrument Cluster Description 140 dM 20 m 904040 19 0 0 0 INDEX 390 Methanol 262 Mini Inip Computer B rs 150 MIDO 3554992 soe bee Oooh Cee 24 1133 67 AutomabBc DIMIN p eo see 9 e ied ia 67 Electric Remote 2d aua ace 93 ae aad 69 Exterior Folding os 445646 end CR ri eee aC 68 1 8 1 152 229392219190 0272559299999 9 9 69 30185106 oua ae 3e E qnuS PE AG doe Eee 68 REVIEW 309 5 9 3 3 qo 498 PER UE E ag db 67 WAY edir inrer o SOR 69 Modifications Alterations Vehicle 7 Monitor Tire Pressure System 254 Mopar PariS se sot ote eh g 308 376 NITBE BIBBE lt 2 4c4 2605 2424550644086 8R8 24 262 Multi Displacement Engine System 230 Multi Function Control Lever 99 Navigation Radio TEE DEEP Y ns 179 NAVIGON SVEN PN 179 New Vehicle Break In Period
115. 000 132 000 Kilometers 180 000 190 000 200000 210 000 220 000 Months Change engine oil and engine oil filter Inspect the air cleaner filter and replace if re X quired X Replace the spark plugs 5 7L Engine sioner Replace if required months if not replaced at 102 000 miles Rotate the tires X M A N T E N A N C E 5 C H E 0 U L E S 8 o Bc as nal d SCHEDULE A 371 138 000 144 000 150 000 230 000 240 000 250 000 138 144 150 Miles Kilometers Months Change engine oil and engine oil filter Inspect the air cleaner filter and replace if required X J XxX Replace the air cleaner filter X Inspect the front and rear brake linings and rotors XxX o Replace the air conditioning filter XX Rotate the tire XXX Change the Transfer Case Fluid All Wheel Drive AWD only PX WARNING You can be badly injured working on or around a motor vehicle Only do service work for which you have the knowledge and the right equipment If you have any doubt about your ability to perform a service job take your vehicle to a competent me chanic his maintenance is recommended by the manufacturer to the owner but is not required to maintain the emis sions warranty f This maintenance is not required if previously replaced Inspection and service should a
116. 000 Mile Formula HOAT Hybrid Or ganic Additive Technology or equivalent Engine Oil 2 7 Liter Use API Certified engine oil SAE 5W 20 is recommended Refer to the en gine oil fill cap for the correct SAE grade meeting DaimlerChrysler Material Standard MS 6395 Engine Oil 3 5 Liter Use API Certified engine oil SAE 10W 30 is recommended Refer to the en gine oil viscosity chart for the correct SAE grade meeting DaimlerChrysler Material Standard MS 6395 Engine Oil 5 7 Liter Use API Certified engine oil SAE 5W 20 is recommended Refer to the en gine oil fill cap for the correct SAE grade meeting DaimlerChrysler Material Standard MS 6395 Oil Filter 2 7 Liter Mopar 05281090 or equivalent Oil Filter 3 5 Liter Mopar 05281090 or equivalent Oil Filter 5 7 Liter Mopar 05281090 or equivalent Spark Plugs Refer to the Vehicle Emission Control Information label in the engine com partment Fuel Selection 2 7 Liter Fuel Selection 3 5 Liter 87 to 89 Octane Fuel Selection 5 7 Liter 87 to 89 Octane 352 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 2 5459999998261 009 57 9 01111 9 0 gt gt Chassis Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts Automatic Transmission Mopar ATF 4 Automatic Transmission Fluid Brake Master Cylinder Mopar DOT 3 SAE J1703 should be used If DOT 3 SAE J1703 brake fluid is not available then DOT 4 is acceptable Use only recommended brake fluids API Certified GL 5 SAE 75W90 Sy
117. 220 STARTING AND OPERATING 1 08 Neutral position while driving except to coast when the vehicle is in danger of skidding e g on icy roads The engine may be started in this range Use this range for starting your vehicle if it is moving or being towed CAUTION Coasting the vehicle or driving for any other reason with selector lever in NEUTRAL can result in trans mission damage WARNINCG Do not coast in N Neutral and never turn off the ignition to coast down a hill These are unsafe practices that limit your response to changing traffic or road conditions You might lose control of the vehicle and have an accident The following indicators should be used to ensure that you have engaged the selector lever into the P Park position e When shifting into P Park move the lever all the way forward until it stops and is fully seated e Look at the shift indicator display on the instrument panel to ensure it is in the P Park position CAUTION Damage to the shifter could result if the selector lever is moved out of P Park before the ignition is turned from the LOCK to ON position R Reverse Shift into R Reverse gear only when the vehicle is completely stopped N Neutral No power is transmitted from the engine to the drive axle When the brakes are released the vehicle can be moved freely pushed or towed Do not engage N ee STARTING AND OPERATING 221 Press and hold the selector lever
118. 40 km h toward the driver Electronic Speed Control Operation e The pedals can be adjusted with the ignition OFF sone mnt 2 e The pedals can be adjusted while driving e The pedals cannot be adjusted when the vehicle is in R Reverse or when the Speed Control is ON CAUTION Do not place any article under the adjustable pedals or impede its ability to move as it may cause damage to the pedal controls Pedal travel may become limited if movement is stopped by an obstruction in the adjustable pedal s path 6 78 1 RESUME ACCEL 2 SET DECEL 3 CANCEL 4 ON OFF UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 107 NOTE e Speed control will only function in third fourth or fifth gear when in the Autostick Mode if equipped e The speed control may not engage if a different size tire is installed on one wheel such as the compact spare tire To Deactivate The system will disable Electronic Speed Control without erasing the memory if you e Softly tap the brake pedal e Depress the brake pedal e Push the speed control lever away from you CAN CEL Pushing and releasing the lever ON OFF or turning off the ignition erases the set speed from memory To Resume Speed If you deactivated the speed control without erasing the set speed from memory and your vehicle speed is above 20 mph 32 km h you can resume the previous set To Activate The indicator
119. 48 44 1 32 MPEG 2 Audio Layer 3 24 22 05 16 ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 177 The radio display will show LOADING DISC when the disc is loading LOAD EJT Eject Press the LOAD EJT button and the push button with the corresponding number where LOAD the CD was loaded and the disc will unload and move to the entrance for easy removal Radio display will show EJECTING DISC when the disc is being ejected and prompt the user to remove the disc If you have ejected a disc and have not removed it within 15 seconds it will be reloaded If the CD is not removed the radio will continue to play the non removed CD If the CD is removed and there are other CD s in the radio the radio will play the next CD after a 2 minute timeout If the CD is removed and there are no other CD s in the radio the radio will remain in CD mode and display INSERT DISC for 2 minutes After 2 minutes the radio will go to the previous tuner mode To increase the speed of disc loading it is recommended to use CD R media and single session discs To create a single session disc enable the Disc at Once option before writing to the disc Operation Instructions CD Mode for MP3 and WMA Audio Play SEEK Button CD Mode for MP3 and WMA Play Pressing the right side of the SEEK button plays the next file Pressing the left side of the SEEK button plays the beginning of the file Pressing the button within the first ten seconds plays th
120. 499 3 Sd nd ose eor des 201 Washers Windshield 102 321 35 7216707616 rm 333 Wheel Alignment and Balance 251 Wheel and Wheel Trim 334 Wheel and Wheel Trim Care 334 Wheel 968711858 P 332 MDC BUCE da soie eee 4a AN 30 117 Window Airbag Side Curtain 42 47 Widow BOSSINS x22d235e332 2 5 22 ee Ro CE E 199 nm 5666652 babe 27 ROWE a0 20 3 Gaye deer SURE n dei gos 27 Windshield Defroster 192 197 Windshield Washers 101 102 321 Iti rr 321 Windshield Wiper Blades 320 Windshield Wipers xS ERESTRE YA 101 Wiper Blade Replacement 320 0 077 5 uada Eee Rx d 201 DLT APT 201 Wipers Iitermuttent dou Rmo 102 201 Tti Sinal 22x 35 9wtidb imt es 99 142 Jp Odometer 4 45 riod 2 oe sees 140 UConnect Hands Free Phone 70 Uniform Tire Quality Grades 970 Universal 173715375187 110 Unleaded Gasoline 261 Untwisting Procedure Seat Belt 38 11177771777005 2 4 2454 2 62 3 P ped ic eR Re e es 69 Vakance COMPASS uias vue Bora teg ey a purs 13 Vehicle Certification Label 267 Vehicle Identification Number VIN 6 Vehicle Loadi g
121. 680 kg Up to 5 persons amp 2 150 Ibs 68 kg 100 Ibs 45 kg Trailer and Tongue Weight Always load a trailer with 60 to 65 of the weight in the front of the trailer This places 10 to 15 of the Gross Trailer Weight GTW on the tow hitch of your vehicle Loads balanced over the wheels or heavier in the rear can cause the trailer to sway severely side to side which will cause loss of control of the vehicle and trailer Failure to load trailers heavier in front is the cause of many trailer accidents Max GTW Gross Trailer Wt Luggage 1 000 Ibs 454 kg Frontal Area Engine Transmission 5 7L Automatic with trailer tow package 40 SQ FT 3 72 square meters 40 SQ FT 3 72 square meters 40 SQ FT 3 72 square meters 40 SQ FT 3 72 square meters Refer to local laws for maximum trailer towing speeds NOTE The trailer tongue weight must be considered as part of the combined weight of occupants and cargo and should never exceed the weight referenced on the Tire and Loading Information placard Refer to Tire Safety Information in this section 276 STARTING AND OPERATING 0 NOTE Remember that everything put into or on the trailer adds to the load on your vehicle Also additional factory installed options or dealer installed options must be considered as part of the total load on your vehicle Refer to the Tire and Loading Information placard for the maximum combined weight of occupants
122. 81005611607 ouvir Tio 349 a cM 770 W Fluids And Capacities 350 Fluids Lubricants And Genuine Parts 351 9 Sar nd 760 332 RE RERO COLFOSION ullo she T Cr 351 o Cleaning The Center Console Cup Holders 336 rie Dro A 902 eee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 303 2 7L ENGINE COMPARTMENT FUSES POWER ENGINE OIL BRAKE FLUID RESERVOIR COOLANT DISTRIBUTION CENTER DIPSTICK ACCESS COVER BOTTLE m tM RIS Sn AULA ca ta I NNI Ut MM Beer Pres PEE WASHER REMOTE JUMP START ENGINE COOLANT AIR CLEANER POWER STEERING FLUID POSITIVE BATTERY POST OIL FIEL PRESSURE CAP FILTER FLUID BOTTLE 818d5hibs p ry 304 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 09809 77 849 901 5 lt 5690 9 93 0 3 5L ENGINE COMPARTMENT FUSES POWER AIR CLEANER BRAKE FLUID COOLANT DISTRIBUTION CENTER FILTER RESERVOIR PRESSURE ACCESS COVER CAP H ES aru ETE BANAS FASS a I Sores egg cena eee REMOTE JUMP WASHER START POSITIVE FLUID ENGINE OIL ENGINE COOLANT POWER STEERING BATTERY POST BOTTLE DIPSTICK OIL FILL BOTTLE FLUID 1191984 eee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 305 5 7L ENGINE COMPARTMENT FUSES POWER COOLANT
123. AINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 347 7 Pull tail light assembly clear from vehicle to access bulbs 8 Turn the appropriate bulb and socket assembly counter clockwise to remove it from the tail light assem bly 81833 1 Tail Stop Light Bulb 3 Push the electrical connector locking tab to the side 4 Disconnect the electrical connector Remove 1 wing nut from the back of the tail light assembly 6 Remove 2 push pin fasteners under the liftgate with a flat blade tool 1 51800 348 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 085 51513762 2 Turn Signal Light Bulb 3 Backup Light Bulb 9 Pull the bulb out of the socket assembly 10 Push the replacement bulb into the socket assembly 11 Reinstall the bulb and socket assembly into the tail light assembly and then turn it clockwise 12 Reinstall the tail light assembly fasteners and elec trical connector 13 Close the liftgate MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 9 4 Push the replacement bulb into the socket assembly 5 Reinstall the bulb and socket assembly 6 Reattach the light to the rear fascia and then install the 8 9 License Light 1 Remove the screws securing the light to the rear fascia 2 Remove the bulb and socket assembly 3 Pull the bulb out of the socket assembly ERROREM ETTI 81823 1 License Light Bulb 2 Socket Metric 68 liters 68 liters 72 liter
124. AUTION Failure to perform the required maintenance items may result in damage to the vehicle At Each Stop for Fuel e Check the engine oil level about 5 minutes after a fully warmed engine is shut off Checking the oil level while ee MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 355 e Extensive engine idling e Driving in dusty conditions e Short trips of less than 10 miles 16 km e More than 50 of your driving is at sustained high speeds during hot weather above 90 F 32 C e Trailer towing e Taxi police or delivery service commercial ser vice e Off road or desert operation NOTE If ANY of these apply to you then change your engine oil every 3 000 miles 5 000 km or 3 months whichever comes first and follow the maintenance rec ommendations in Schedule B in this section NOTE If ANY of these apply to you then flush and replace the engine coolant every 102 000 miles 170 000 km or 60 months whichever comes first and follow the maintenance recommendations in Schedule B in this section 89 7 00809909 8 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 356 the vehicle is on level ground will improve the accu Check all lights and all other electrical items for correct racy of the oil level reading Add oil only when the operation level is at or below the ADD or MIN mark e Check rubber seals on each side of the radiator for e Check the windshield washer solvent and a
125. Anchorages Installing the LATCH Compatible Child Restraint System We urge that you carefully follow the directions of the manufacturer when installing your child restraint Not all child restraint systems will be installed as described here Again carefully follow the installation instructions that were provided with the child restraint system 56 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 8 080 10101080 9040 0 778 should stow the seat belt out of the reach of an inquisitive child Remind all children in the vehicle that the seat belts are not toys and should not be played with and never leave your child unattended in the vehicle WARNING Improper installation of a child restraint to the LATCH anchorages can lead to failure of an infant or child restraint The child could be badly injured or killed Follow the manufacturer s directions exactly when installing an infant or child restraint Installing Child Restraints Using the Vehicle Seat belt The passenger seat belts are equipped with either cinch ing latch plates or automatic locking retractors which are designed to keep the lap portion tight around the child restraint so that it is not necessary to use a locking clip Pulling up on the shoulder portion of the lap shoulder belt will tighten the belt The cinching latch plate will cover directly behind the seat where you are placing the child restraint and attach the tether strap to t
126. BRAKE FLUID COOLANT DISTRIBUTION PRESSURE RESERVOIR BOTTLE CENTER CAP ACCESS COVER ERES owe iv we eek ES Pipe Mx Manut stt os Sean sees ae Se Nee eee rra WASHER REMOTE JUMP START ENGINE OIL ENGINE AIR CLEANER POWER STEERING FLUID POSITIVE BATTERY POST DIPSTICK OIL FILL FILTER FLUID BOTTLE 81848 9 1 0 4 0 8282041 809 959 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 306 CAUTION Prolonged driving with the Malfunction Indicator Light on could cause further damage to the emis sion control system It could also affect fuel economy and driveability The vehicle must be serviced before any emissions tests can be performed If the Malfunction Indicator Light is flashing while the engine is running severe catalytic con verter damage and power loss will soon occur Im mediate service is required Loose Fuel Filler Cap If the vehicle diagnostic system determines that the fuel filler cap is loose improperly installed or damaged a Check Gascap message will display in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC if equipped If this occurs tighten the fuel filler cap properly and press the odometer reset button to turn off the message If the problem continues the message will appear the next time the vehicle is started ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM OBD Il You
127. CD Eject and TIME buttons simultaneously for 3 seconds All twelve ESN SID num bers will display The radio will exit the ESN SID mode when any other button is pushed the ignition is turned OFF or 5 minutes has passed since any button was pushed ESN SID Access With REC Navigation Radios Please refer to your Navigation User s Manual 8 0 7 80 8 8 8 9 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 186 erase any AM or FM pre set memory stations Follow the memory pre set procedures that apply to your radio Using the PTY Program Type Button if equipped Follow the PTY button instructions that apply to your radio PTY Button SCAN When the desired program type is obtained press the SCAN button within five seconds The radio will play 7 seconds of the selected channel before moving to the next channel of the selected program type Press the SCAN button a second time to stop the search NOTE Pressing the SEEK or SCAN button while performing a music type scan will change the channel by one and stop the search Pressing a pre set memory button during a music type scan will call up the memory channel and stop the search Selecting a Channel Press and release the SEEK or TUNE knob to search for the next channel Press the top of the button to search up and the bottom of the button to search down Holding the TUNE button causes the radio to bypass channels until the button is released Press and
128. ESP is combined with BAS indicator If the power supply is interrupted battery disconnected or discharged the ESP BAS malfunction indica tor light may illuminate with the engine running If this should occur turn the steering wheel completely to the left and then to the right The ESP BAS malfunction indicator light should go out ESP BAS 236 STARTING AND OPERATING 181 2 0 0 0 00 8 e European Metric tire sizing is based on European design standards Tires designed to this standard have the tire size molded into the sidewall beginning with the section width The letter P is absent from this tire size designation Example 215 65R15 96H e LT Light Truck Metric tire sizing is based on U S design standards The size designation for LT Metric tires is the same as for P Metric tires except for the letters LT that are molded into the sidewall preced ing the size designation Example LT235 85R16 e Temporary Spare tires are high pressure compact spares designed for temporary emergency use only Tires designed to this standard have the letter T molded into the sidewall preceding the size designa tion Example T145 80D18 103M e High Flotation tire sizing is based on U S design standards and it begins with the tire diameter molded into the sidewall Example 31x10 5 R15 LT TIRE SAFETY INFORMATION Tire Markings SERVICE DESCRIPTION MAXIMUM LOAD MAXIMUM SI DES
129. Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC 148 Emergency In Case of Freeing Vehicle When Stuck 297 Hazard Warning Flasher sss ss ess esos ess 284 T ETT 286 Jomp SIUS arses 9 dod Eos s ege See Re d 294 Overheating woe eet EE SER 284 IOWANS 2226 298 Emission Control System Maintenance 307 354 5772106 4444040050855 e 80855 idc 8 303 304 305 Pit Gleaner MT 314 Plocek Hedler rrr 211 Break In Recommendations 59 Checking Oil Level 309 310 601711097137810 ou suede wie baee a et 303 304 305 Coolant Antifreeze 322 351 COONS gagag g 995 978 9p MERI 322 Exhaust Gas Caution 32 60 264 Fals to DIOE oita ie iias teed 209 O ET 140 Cup 1161067 sessssssrasussal bees 121 336 Customer Assistance 374 Data Recorder Event 2s 46200445 e 49 Daytime Running Lights i246 teris 98 Dealer Service 1 soe 99 308 Defroster Rear Window 202 Defroster Windshield 61 192 197 Delay Intermittent Wipers 102 201 Diagnostic System Onboard 306 Dimmer Switch Headlight 99 Disposal Antifreeze Engine Coolant 325 WOOP LOCKS SEE eat ears sy 22 Door Locks Automatic 004 24
130. HICLE 7 97 0 0 _ _ 1 lt 09 9 o Lumbar Support If Equipped 92 811161107716805 dea 7 Ei Een Yes 100 55118801 RE TINE wa oues wd Ve X AY SUPR ees 92 W Windshield Wipers And Washers 101 o Heated Seats If Equipped 92 HIntermittent Wiper System cretese eei 102 Al Folding Rear Seat case 6t dope 237115 7200076 94 tue eee hes 102 To Open And Close The Hood 95 O Windshield Washers 102 Bero T 96 O Headlights On With Wipers Available With OHeadught SWIN 4 cnegn8 eee badawaw nade 96 0 mo 4 Automatic Headlights If Equipped 96 OAdding Washer PUIG s issu dasa vor 103 2 Headlights On With Wipers Available With Tilt Telescoping Steering Column 104 Auto Headlights Only ee ee came 97 W Adjustable Pedals If Equipped 105 O0 Headlight lime Delay 4442 5444 530 RR RR 97 WW Electronic Speed Control 106 o Daytime Running Lights Canada Only 98 O Electronic Speed Control Operation 106 O Taghis On ReEMmMder 1 acea x en md 98 8510770007016 P 107 O Fog Lights If Equipped 98 H To Set At A Desired Speed 107 A Mu lt F nction Levet ss 23 3 6 a RR 99 To Deicide aq va ma oo ee
131. IALLLULNLlLLUL UAL8E4dcGI UooOLGu4 uUAMAo LJ J a A OGAOAOA 2GUBUL 2 2 90727 MOOG COSC P dag FERRE P Ed ecd 95 LISSOBe HIS 23 2 uq item Eq AER 96 Lead Pree Gasoline s carte qoa eas agi 261 Headlights On With Wipers 97 103 607 MICS P Cr eee oes 250 Lih beau 24445 nce hoses arb 99 143 ioo E CS oan eae es ee 31 High Beam Indicator 143 Liftgate Window Wiper Washer 201 11101311171601 ENS Geb yee arie eed baa es 17 Ip PTT 61 96 Instrument Cluster 96 140 AUDI ee OT PRESSE SINE E 46 49 61 142 1708810 2 2 229 99 PIE A EEG 100 109 Anti Lock 322224293 ORO 147 228 LICENSE 1 ee AAGAUREASUPERAX ET 349 Automatic Headlights 96 LION SON Reminger 98 Brake Assist Warning xexsexvee ge 235 Ow HUG rm 147 Brake Waring eS heey News 144 226 Ow 1116 6 sa hess ee ee eo 145 Bulb Replacement e der bans 344 Malfunction Indicator Check Engine 147 Courtesy Readl g9 sss sn 100 109 OIL TEESE sr eaa apap aes ee 143 7050 TTE 140 ccc Pr 2 Do UME RUNMING 2ee ss3B54gxcu e ed ve 98 ERT uasa riches es PER PIRE dde 109 Dimmer Switch Headlelit 522222 ns 99 Seat Delt Remiapdet 12x sri tms senna 143 Electronic Stability Program ESP igi LE 344 345 150160107 PE 299 29
132. IGNATION PRESSURE TREADWEAR U S DOT TRACTION SAFETY A d STANDARDS P TEMPERATURE CODE iuga v NON GRADES TIN amp 11b44e8 NOTE e P Passenger Metric tire sizing is based on U S design standards P Metric tires have the letter P molded into the sidewall preceding the size designation Ex ample P215 65R15 95H ee STARTING AND OPERATING 237 Tire Sizing Chart EXAMPLE Size Designation P Passenger car tire size based on U S design standards blank Passenger car tire based on European design standards LT Light Truck tire based on U S design standards T Temporary Spare tire 31 Overall Diameter in Inches in 215 Section Width in Millimeters mm 65 Aspect Ratio in Percent 76 Ratio of section height to section width of tire 10 5 Section Width in Inches in R Construction Code R means Radial Construction p means Diagonal or Bias Construction 15 Rim Diameter in Inches in 238 STARTING AND OPERATING 1 77 0 4 42 8 7 gt gt gt 2 2 _ 0 EXAMPLE Service Description 95 Load Index A numerical code associated with the maximum load a tire can carry H Speed Symbol A symbol indicating the range of speeds at which a tire can carry a load corresponding to its load index under certain operating conditions The maximum speed corresponding to
133. INING YOUR VEHICLE 323 Cooling System Drain Flush and Refill AUTION The system should be drained flushed and refilled at the CAU HON intervals shown on the Maintenance Schedule e Mixing of coolants other than specified HOAT If the solution is dirty or contains a considerable amount engine coolants result in engine damage and of sediment clean and flush with a reliable cooling may decrease corrosion protection If a non HOAT system cleaner Follow with a thorough rinsing to remove coolant is introduced into the cooling system In an all deposits and chemicals Properly dispose of old emergency it should be replaced with the speci antitieoza eoluton fied coolant as soon as possible Do not use plain water alone or alcohol base engine coolant antifreeze products Do not use additional rust inhibitors or antirust products as they may not be compatible with the radiator engine coolant and may plug the radiator Selection of Coolant Use only the manufacturer s recommended coolant Re fer to Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts for the correct coolant type e This vehicle has not been designed for use with Propylene Glycol based coolants Use of Propy lene Glycol based coolants is not recommended Adding Coolant Your vehicle has been built with an improved engine coolant that allows extended maintenance intervals This coolant can be used up to 5 Years or 100 000 miles 160 000 km before replacement To prevent
134. LOCK button on the transmitter with the ignition in the LOCK position and the key removed 4 Repeat these steps if you want to return this feature to its previous setting NOTE Pressing the LOCK button on the transmitter while you are in the vehicle will activate the Security Alarm Opening a door with the Security Alarm activated will cause the alarm to sound Press the UNLOCK button to deactivate the Security Alarm Using The Panic Alarm To turn the panic alarm feature ON or OFF press and hold the PANIC button on the transmitter for at least one second and release When the panic alarm is on the headlights and park lights will flash the horn will pulse on and off and the interior lights will turn on The panic alarm will stay on for 3 minutes unless you turn it off by either pressing the PANIC button a second time or drive the vehicle at a speed of 15 mph 24 km h or greater Sound Horn with Remote Key Lock This feature will cause the horn to chirp when the doors are locked with the transmitter This feature can be turned on or off To change the current setting proceed as follows e For vehicles equipped with the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC refer to Sound Horn with Remote Key Lock under Personal Settings Cus tomer Programmable Features under Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC in Section 4 of this manual for details e For vehicles not equipped with the EVIC perform the following
135. M sey ee epee 28 10 Amp Curtain Airbag if 16 20 Amp Rear Power Outlet Red equipped o 29 5 Amp Anti lock Brakes Module 17 20 Amp Cluster Orange if equipped Cluster Yellow Front Control Module 18 20 Amp Selectable Power Outlet FCM Powertrain Con Yellow trol Module PCM 19 10 Amp Stop Lights Sentry Key Remote Key Red less Entry Stop Lights 20 20 Amp Rear Wiper 30 10 Amp Door Modules Power Yellow Red Mirrors if equipped z 9 Steering Control Module Qm 38 32 23 m m m 342 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 7 990010 4 79 1 1 Cavity Car Mini Description Cavity Car Mini Description tridge Fuse tridge Fuse Fuse Fuse 33 38 5 Amp Overhead Console 24 _ m m Orange 35 5Amp Amplifier if equipped 39 10 Amp Heated Mirrors if Orange Antenna Ignition Red equipped Delay Overhead 40 5 Amp Heated Seats if Console Passenger Door Orange equipped Inside Rear Lock amp Express Power view Mirror D E 41 10 Amp AC Heater Control Tire 000007 Red Pressure Monitoring if rors if equipped Rear equipped ll 42 30 Amp Front Blower Motor 36 20 Amp Hands Free Phone if Pink e SIUE PEE Lud 0 43 30 Amp Amplifier if equipped Monitor DVD if Pink Antenna Rear Defrost equipped Radio ae OP MO MIC CRM Ree Gatellite Baceiver 44 20 Amp Amplifier if equ
136. Moving the selector lever to the Left triggers a downshift and to 224 STARTING AND OPERATING 0 3 99 9 9 09 lt 00 lt 0 2 9 8 CAUTION All wheels must have the same size and type tires Traction When driving on wet or slushy roads it is possible for a wedge of water to build up between the tire and road surface This is known as hydroplaning and may cause partial or complete loss of vehicle control and stopping ability To reduce this possibility the following precau tions should be observed 1 Slow down during rainstorms or when the roads are slushy 2 Slow down if road has standing water or puddles 3 Replace tires when tread wear indicators first become visible 4 Keep tires properly inflated 5 Maintain sufficient distance between your vehicle and the vehicle in front to avoid a collision in a sudden stop Unequal tire sizes must not be used Unequal tire size may cause failure of the front differential and or the transfer case DRIVING ON SLIPPERY SURFACES Acceleration Rapid acceleration on snow covered wet or other slip pery surfaces may cause the rear wheels to pull errati cally to the right or left This phenomenon occurs when there is a difference in the surface traction under the rear driving wheels WARNING Rapid acceleration on slippery surfaces is danger ous Unequal traction can cause sudden pulling of the rear wheels You could lose control
137. OF YOUR VEHICLE 87 Voice Tree Phonebook Phonebook Emar tame Entries Listed one at a time Enter Name 1st Confirmation Enter Location end Gonfirmatian Entry Deleted Gurrent Number Enter New Phonebook Cleared Entry is modified Note Available Voice commands are shown in bold face and are underlined 81315294 88 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Voice Tree Setup Setup Confirmation Confirmation will Prompts aelect a language English Espanol temporarily or Francais priorities to be deleted Say 4 digit override pin code Phones phone ei List Phones oystem System Lists Phone Deleted confirms Phones All Phones Deleted Note Available Voice commands are shown in bold face and are underlined 81940224 ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 9 SEATS Manual Seats If Equipped Seat Adjustment The adjusting bar is at the front of the seat near the floor Pull the bar upward to move the seat forward or rear a ward Release the bar once the seat is in the position desired Then using body pressure move forward and rearward on the seat to be sure that the seat adjusters have latched S North American English Primary Alternate s Zero Oh Add location Add new All All of them Confirmation prompts Confirmations prompts Delete a name Delete Language Select language List names List all List paired phones List phon
138. Press the right side of the button to seek up and the left side to seek down The radio will remain tuned to the new station until you make another selec tion Holding the button will bypass stations without stopping until you release it MUTE Button Radio Mode Press the MUTE button to cancel the sound from the speakers MUTE will display Press the MUTE button a second time and the sound from the speakers will return Rotating the volume control turning the radio ON OFF or turning ON OFF the ignition will cancel the MUTE feature NOTE In Hands Free Phone if equipped mode the MUTE button mutes the microphone SCAN Button Radio Mode Pressing the SCAN button causes the tuner to search for the next listenable station in either AM FM or Satellite ee NW UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 163 Press the rotary TUNE control a third time and TREB will display Turn the TUNE control to the right or left to increase or decrease the Treble tones Press the rotary TUNE control a fourth time and BAL will display Turn the TUNE control to the right or left to adjust the sound level from the right or left side speakers Press the rotary TUNE control a fifth time and FADE will display Turn the TUNE control to the left or right to adjust the sound level between the front and rear speak ers Press the tune control again or wait 5 seconds to exit setting tone balance and fade RND SET Button Radio Mode To SET The Push B
139. Pressure Monitoring Tell tale Light will turn OFF and the graphic in the EVIC will stop flashing and display a new pressure value as long no tire pressure is below the low pressure warning limit in any of the four active road tires The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 10 minutes above 15 mph 25 km h in order for the TPMS to receive this information 81979401 NOTE You can change the pressure units to display in PSI KPA or BAR Refer to Language under Personal Settings Customer Programmable Features under Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC in Sec tion 4 of this manual for details If the ignition key is cycled this sequence will repeat providing the system fault still exists If the system fault no longer exists the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will no longer flash and the CHECK TPM SYS TEM message will no longer display and a pressure value will display in place of the dashes STARTING AND OPERATING 1 FUEL REQUIREMENTS 2 7L Engine Your vehicle is designed to meet all emis sions regulations and provide satisfactory fuel economy and performance when us ing high quality unleaded gasoline having e0edtabe an octane of 87 3 5L and 5 7L Engines The 3 5L and 5 7L engines are designed to meet all emissions regulations and provide satisfactory fuel economy and perfor mance when using high quality unleaded gasoline with an octane rating of 87 to 89 The manufacturer recommends
140. R INSTRUMENT PANEL 21 7 771 gt 0 0 0 0 Trip Functions Press and release the MENU button until one of the following Trip Functions displays in the EVIC e Average Fuel Economy Fuel Saver Mode e Distance To Empty e Trip A e Trip B e Elapsed Time e Display Units of Measure in Press the SCROLL button to cycle through all the Trip Computer functions The Trip Functions mode displays the following e Average Fuel Economy Fuel Saver Mode Shows the average fuel economy since the last reset When the fuel economy is reset the display will read RESET or show dashes for two seconds Then the history information will be erased and the averaging will continue from the last fuel average reading before the reset Left Right Front Door Ajar one or more with a single chime if speed is above 1 mph 1 6 km Left Right Rear Door Ajar one or more with a single chime if speed is above 1 mph 1 6 km Door s Ajar with a single chime if vehicle is in motion Trunk Ajar with a single chime Low Washer Fluid with a single chime Channel 1 2 OR 3 Transmit Channel 1 2 OR 3 Training Channel 1 2 OR 3 Trained Clearing Channels Channels Cleared Channels Defaulted Did Not Train Check Gascap refer to Adding Fuel in Section 5 of this manual for more details E UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 1 Vehicles with the 5 7L Multi Displacement System MDS This feature allows you to monitor whe
141. Remember that the rear doors can only be opened from the outside when the child protection locks are engaged NOTE e After engaging the child protection door lock system always test the door from the inside to make certain it is in the desired position e For emergency exit with the system engaged move the door lock switch to the UNLOCK position roll down the window and open the door with the outside door handle To Disengage the Child Protection Door Lock 1 Open the rear door To Engage the Child Protection Door Lock 1 Open the rear door 2 Insert the tip of the vehicle s ignition key or alike into the child lock control and pull it upward E pute LA piis 0 Poppo Child Lock Control 3 Repeat Steps 1 and 2 on the opposite rear door NOTE When the child lock system is engaged the door can be opened only by using the outside door handle even though the inside door lock is in the unlocked position ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 27 WINDOWS Power Windows 2 Insert the tip of the vehicle s ignition key or alike into the child lock control and pull it downward 7 0 E usi E E inem t apes E J i zl Ls e window controls
142. STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 33 Buckle up even though you are an excellent driver even on short trips Someone on the road may be a poor driver and cause a collision that includes you This can happen far away from home or on your own street Research has shown that seat belts save lives and they can reduce the seriousness of injuries in a collision Some of the worst injuries happen when people are thrown from the vehicle Seat belts reduce the possibility of ejection and the risk of injury caused by striking the inside of the vehicle Everyone in a motor vehicle should be belted at all times Lap Shoulder Belts All seating positions in your vehicle are equipped with Lap Shoulder Belts The belt webbing retractor is designed to lock during very sudden stops or impacts This feature allows the shoulder part of the belt to move freely with you under normal conditions However in a collision the belt will lock and reduce your risk of striking the inside of the vehicle or being thrown out OCCUPANT RESTRAINTS Some of the most important safety features in your vehicle are the restraint systems These include the front and rear seat belts for the driver and all passengers front airbags for both the driver and front passenger and if so equipped side curtain airbags for the driver and passen gers seated next to a window If you will be carrying children too small for adult size belts your seat belts also can be used to hold infant and child
143. Side Curtain Airbags above Side Win dows if equipped If the vehicle has side curtain airbags they also e Steering Wheel and Column need room to inflate Do not lean against the door e Instrument Panel or window Sit upright in the center of the seat e Interconnecting Wiring e Seatbelt Reminder Light e Knee Impact Bolsters e Front Acceleration Sensors e Driver and Front Passenger Seat Belt Pretensioners 46 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 099090 9 050 709 Airbag Warning Light either momentarily or continu ously A single chime will sound if the light comes on How The Airbag System Works e The Airbag Control Module ACM determines if a again after initial start up WARNINCG Ignoring the AIRBAG Warning Light in your instru ment panel could mean you won t have the airbags to protect you in a collision If the light does not come on stays on after you start the vehicle or if it comes on as you drive have the airbag system checked right away e The Driver and Front Passenger Airbag Inflator Units are located in the center of the steering wheel and the passenger side of the instrument panel When the ACM detects a collision requiring the airbags it signals the inflator units A large quantity of nontoxic gas is generated to inflate the front airbags Different airbag inflation rates may be possible based on colli sion severity The steering wheel hub trim
144. Standards We also recommend that you make sure that you can install the child restraint in the vehicle where you will use it before you buy it Children Too Large For Booster Seats Children who are large enough to wear the shoulder belt comfortably and whose legs are long enough to bend over the front of the seat when their back is against the seat back should use the lap shoulder belt in a rear seat e Make sure that the child is upright in the seat e The lap portion should be low on the hips and as snug as possible e Check belt fit periodically A child s squirming or slouching can move the belt out of position If the shoulder belt contacts the face or neck move the child closer to the center of the vehicle Never allow a child to put the shoulder belt under an arm or behind their back NOTE For additional information refer to www seatcheck org or call 1 866 SEATCHECK 178 gt __ THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 54 the child restraint using lower anchorages and upper tether straps from the child restraint to the vehicle structure LATCH compatible child restraint systems are now avail able However because the lower anchorages are to be introduced over a period of years child restraint systems having attachments for those anchorages will continue to have features for installation using the vehicle s seat belts Child restraints having tether straps an
145. TABLE OF CONTENTS o m O 4 O Z INTRODUCTION 53349 409 994 3 soe 0 9009 309 SS eee Gs eee ee Ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 26 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 4 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 2 cece nce cnr enn t nce STARTING AND OPERATING 34354 34 0844684504 2 S669 464494644 9 044206 65540844 0 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 44433434334 3 444933 X XWRA GENS MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 43 349 404 23 RC 92H ORC AR JACO MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES wantin 99 8 92 29 3 cos aes ee 4 0 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 425443599349 3 97 9 AERE ARR ACER KE RAE INDEX 6 65 0 2 SS INTRODUCTION CONTENTS W Introduction 00u 4 B Vehicle Identification Number 6 B How To Use This Manual 4 B Vehicle Modifications Alterations 7 Warnings And Cautions 6 00 0 5080 5 8 7 0 0 0 5 65 gt INTRODUCTION 4 WARNING Engine exhaust some of its constituents and certain vehicle components contain or emit chemicals known to the State of California to cause canc
146. The tire pressure will also increase as the vehicle is driven this is normal and there should be no adjustment for this increased pressure ee STARTING AND OPERATING 255 For example your vehicle may have a recom mended cold parked for more than 3 hours placard pressure of 30 psi 207 kPa If the ambient tempera ture is 68 F 20 C and the measured tire pressure is 27 psi 186 kPa a temperature drop to 20 F 7 C will decrease the tire pressure to approximately 23 psi 157 kPa This tire pressure is sufficiently low enough to turn ON the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale light Driving the vehicle may cause the tire pressure to rise to approximately 27 psi 186 kPa but the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will still be ON In this situation the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will turn OFF only after the tires are inflated to the vehicle s recommended cold placard pressure value e The TPM System will warn the driver of a low tire pressure if the tire pressure falls below the low pressure warning limit for any reason including low temperature effects The TPM System will continue to warn the driver of low tire pressure as long as the condition exists and will not turn off until the tire pressure is at or above the recommended cold placard pressure Once the low tire pressure warning Tire Pressure Monitoring Tell tale Light illuminates you must increase the tire pressure to the recommended c
147. Therefore you should not have to add anything to the fuel Fuel System Cautions CAUTION Follow these guidelines to maintain your vehicle s performance e The use of leaded gas is prohibited by Federal law Using leaded gasoline can impair engine performance or damage the emission control system e An out of tune engine or certain fuel or ignition malfunctions can cause the catalytic converter to overheat If you notice a pungent burning odor or some light smoke your engine may be out of tune or Problems that result from using methanol gasoline or E85 Ethanol blends are not the responsibility of the manufacturer While MTBE is an oxygenate made from Methanol it does not have the negative effects of Metha nol MMT In Gasoline MMT is a manganese containing metallic additive that is blended into some gasoline to increase the octane num ber Gasolines blended with MMT offer no performance advantage beyond gasolines of the same octane number without MMT Gasolines blended with MMT have shown to reduce spark plug life and reduce emission system performance in some vehicles The manufacturer recom mends using gasolines without MMT Since the MMT content of gasoline may not be indicated on the pump you should ask your gasoline retailer if his her gasoline contains MMT It is even more important to look for gasolines without MMT in Canada because MMT can be used at levels higher than allowed in the United States MMT is
148. To turn the system ON again momentarily press the ESP OFF button and the indicator light will turn OFF NOTE To improve the vehicle s traction when driving with snow chains or starting off in deep snow sand or gravel switch off the ESP by pressing the ESP OFF button ee STARTING AND OPERATING 235 CAUTION If the vehicle is towed with the front axle raised the engine must be shut off key in the ignition switch to ESP BAS Malfunction Indicator and ESP TCS Indicator Lights The malfunction indicator light for the ESP is combined with the BAS indicator The yellow ESP BAS malfunction indicator light and the yellow ESP TCS indicator light in the instru ment cluster both come on when the ignition switch is turned to the ON position They should go out with the engine running ESP BAS The system will turn the ESP BAS malfunction indicator light on continuously while the engine running if it detects a malfunction in either the ESP or the BAS or both If the light remains on after several ignition cycles and you have driven the vehicle several miles at speeds greater than 30 mph 48 km h and the ESP is synchro nized refer to Synchronizing ESP see your authorized dealer as soon as possible to have the problem diagnosed and corrected the OFF LOCK or ACC position Otherwise the ESP will immediately be engaged and will apply the rear wheel brakes Synchronizing ESP The malfunction indicator light for the
149. Total Clean or equivalent Care should be taken to avoid soaking your leather upholstery with any liquid Please do not use polishes oils cleaning fluids solvents detergents or ammonia based cleaners to clean your leather upholstery Application of a leather condi tioner is not required to maintain the original condition WARNING Do not use volatile solvents for cleaning purposes Many are potentially flammable and if used in closed areas they may cause respiratory harm Cleaning Headlights Your vehicle has plastic headlights that are lighter and less susceptible to stone breakage than glass headlights Plastic is not as scratch resistant as glass and therefore different lens cleaning procedures must be followed To minimize the possibility of scratching the lenses and reducing light output avoid wiping with a dry cloth To remove road dirt wash with a mild soap solution fol lowed by rinsing 336 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 7 000900 99 0 7 220 09 Cleaning the Center Console Cup Holders Perform the following steps to clean the center console cup holders e Grab the center of the rubber portion of the cup holder firmly and lift upward to remove e Soak the rubber cup holder liner in a mixture of medium hot tap water and one teaspoon of mild liquid dish soap Let soak for approximately one hour e After one hour pull the liner from the water and dip it back into the water about six times This will loosen any r
150. UR INSTRUMENT PANEL 1 RADIO OPERATION AND CELLULAR PHONES Manual Air Conditioning and Heating System Under certain conditions the cellular phone being On in your vehicle can cause erratic or noisy performance from your radio This condition may be lessened or eliminated by relocating the cellular phone antenna This condition is not harmful to the radio If your radio performance does not satisfactorily clear by the repositioning of the antenna it is recommended that the radio volume be turned down or off during cellular phone operation CLIMATE CONTROLS The Air Conditioning and Heating System is designed to make you comfortable in all types of weather 81350206 Manual Temperature Controls Blower Control The rotary knob on the left controls the blower The control has an OFF posi tion and four speed settings The blower will remain on until the con trol is turned to the OFF position or the ignition is turned OFF 812d1942 NOTE To improve fuel economy leave in defrost only when necessary e DefrostlFloor qH Air flows through the front and rear floor y outlets and the outlets at the base of the windshield Air is also directed to the front door windows through the side window demister grilles e Floor Air flows through the floor outlets located under the instrument panel and into the rear seating area through vents under the front seats e Bi Level ugh Air flows through the outlets located
151. You will experience the greatest efficiency by simply allowing the system to function automatically Selecting the OFF position on the fan control stops the system completely and closes the outside air intake 727 22 C is the recommended setting for maximum comfort for the average person however this may vary NOTE The temperature setting can be adjusted at any time without affecting automatic operation Air conditioning in this system is automatic Pressing the Air Conditioning Control button while in AUTO mode will cause the LED in the control button to flash three times and then turn off This indicates that the system is in AUTO mode and requesting the air conditioning is not necessary the controls on the climate control from a dual sun sensor located in the top of the instrument panel from an infrared sensor located in the face of the climate control and from various sensors located throughout the vehicle The controls on the climate control provide the system with operator input The dual sun sensor monitors sun load coming through the windshield The infrared sensor independently measures the surface temperature of the driver and passenger Other sensors take account of vehicle speed A C pressure outside temperature and engine cooling temperature Using all of these inputs the system automatically adjusts airflow temperature air flow distribution airflow volume and the amount of outside air recirculation This main
152. able o uny speed 196 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Set hhiwger knob 10 ether Hi or Lo Auw Sec mede knob lo Auto Set temperature knobs foe vomturt Sel blower knob to any desired 0 level other than Hi qr 1 Auto Set mode knab re Aube Sep Iempierature knobs forc Nel mode knob to any desired delivery point other than Aulo Set blower knob 10 either HI er Lo Auto Set lemperature knobs for comfort Nel Hower knob 10 ans desired airtlese level ether than Hi or Jas Autos Set mede knob to any desired air delivers poani other than Aulo Set temperature knobs Far gomfur Automatic Temperature anteo Operation Operation Full Aulonmauv peratien Blower Preferred Automati hole Preferred Aubnmarie Blower and Male Preterred Automatic UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 7 e Bi Level gd Air flows through the outlets located in the instrument panel and through the outlets lo cated on the floor Air flows through the registers in the back of the center console to the rear seat passengers These registers can be closed to block airflow e Panel A Air flows through the outlets located in the instrument panel Air flows through the regis ters in the back of the center console to the rear seat passengers These registers can be closed to block airflow e Air Conditioning Control ro Press this button to turn on the air condition ing during manual operation only When the air
153. ading 004 267 Flat Towing With All Four Wheels On The Ground erisera s 282 O Vehicle Certification Label 267 208 STARTING AND OPERATING 0 7 0 STARTING PROCEDURES WARNING Before starting your vehicle adjust your seat adjust the inside and outside mirrors fasten your seat belt and if e Never leave children alone in a vehicle Leaving present instruct all other occupants to buckle their seat children in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for belts a number of reasons A child or others could be seriously or fatally injured Don t leave the keys in the ignition A child could operate power windows other controls or move the vehicle Do not leave animals or children inside parked vehicles in hot weather interior heat build up may cause serious injury or death Be sure to turn off the engine if you want to rest or sleep in your car Accidents can be caused by inadvertently moving the gear selection lever or by pressing the accelerator pedal This may cause excessive heat in the exhaust system resulting in overheating and vehicle fire which may cause serious or fatal injuries 1 6 711 1 7 2 STARTING AND OPERATING 209 If Engine Fails To Start If the engine fails to start after you have followed the NORMAL STARTING procedure it may be flooded Push the accelerator pedal all the way to the floor and hold it there
154. age display priority mode or elapsed time display priority mode will display the song title for each file RW FF CD Mode for MP3 and WMA Play Press the FF side of the button to move forward through the file or MP3 and WMA selection TUNE Control CD Mode for MP3 Play Pressing the TUNE Control allows the adjustment of Tone Balance and Fade AM FM Button CD Mode for MP3 Play Switches back to Radio mode C UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 179 screen to provide maps turn identification selection menus and instructions for selecting a variety of destina tions and routes AM FM stereo radio and six disc CD changer with MP3 capability Mapping information for navigation is supplied on a DVD that is loaded into the unit One map DVD covers all of North America Refer to your Navigation User s Manual for detailed operating instructions Operating Instructions Satellite Radio If Equipped Refer to your Navigation User s Manual for detailed operating instructions REC Setting the Clock GPS Clock The GPS receiver used in this system is synchronized to the time data being transmitted by the GPS satellites The satellites clock is Greenwich Mean Time GMT This is the worldwide standard for time This makes the sys tem s clock very accurate once the appropriate time zone and daylight savings information is set Operating Instructions Video Entertainment System VES If Equipped Refer to separate Vide
155. ailers use the AutoStick mode and select the 3 range AutoStick Gear selection The AutoStick feature can be selected by pressing the selector lever to the right or the left with the lever in the D Drive position The gear currently selected is indi cated in the instrument cluster display Briefly press the selector lever in the D direction and the transmission will shift from the current gear to the next lower gear 9 gt 7 9 7 0 1 0 STARTING AND OPERATING 222 Move the selector lever to the P Park position Turn off the engine 2 3 4 Wait approximately 10 seconds 5 Restart the engine 6 Move the selector lever to the desired range If the problem is no longer detected the transmission will return to normal operation NOTE Even if the transmission can be reset we recommend that you visit a dealer at your earliest possible convenience Your dealer has diagnostic equip ment to determine if the problem could recur Have the transmission checked at your authorized dealer as soon as possible If the problem has been momentary the transmission can be reset to regain all forward gears Permanent Transmission Limp Home Mode Permanent Limp Home Mode will be activated if the transmission enters temporary Limp Home Mode three Delayed Shifts in Cold Temperatures During cold temperature operation you may notice delayed upshifts depending on engine and transmissio
156. an invalid key to start the engine NOTE A key which has not been programmed is also considered an invalid key even if it is cut to fit the ignition lock cylinder for that vehicle During normal operation after turning on the ignition switch the Vehicle Security Alarm Indicator Light will turn on for three 3 seconds for a bulb check If the light remains on after the bulb check it indicates that there is a problem with the electronics In addition if the light begins to flash after the bulb check it indicates that 14 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 0 000 Customer Key Programming If you have two valid sentry keys you can program new sentry keys to the system by performing the following procedure 1 Cut the additional Sentry Key Transponder blank s to match the ignition switch lock cylinder key code 2 Insert the first valid key into the ignition switch and turn the ignition switch ON for at least 3 seconds but no longer than 15 seconds Turn the ignition switch OFF and remove the first key 3 Insert the second valid key and turn the ignition switch ON within 15 seconds After ten seconds a chime will sound and the Vehicle Security Alarm Indicator Light will begin to flash Turn the ignition switch OFF and remove the second key 4 Insert a blank Sentry Key into the ignition switch and turn the ignition switch ON within 60 seconds After 10 seconds a single chime will sound and the Vehicle Security Al
157. and then proceed to the next step NOTE You must perform the following steps within 60 seconds of turning the ignition switch to the ON RUN position 3 Within 60 seconds of turning the ignition switch to the ON RUN position unbuckle and then re buckle the driver s seat belt at least three times within 10 seconds ending with the seat belt buckled NOTE These devices are not a substitute for proper seat belt placement by the occupant The seat belt still must be worn snugly and positioned properly The pretensioners are triggered by the Airbag Control Module refer to information on Airbags in this section Like the front airbags the pretensioners are single use items After a collision that is severe enough to deploy the airbags and pretensioners both must be replaced Enhanced Seat Belt Reminder System BeltAlert If the driver s seat belt has not been buckled within 60 seconds of starting the vehicle and if the vehicle speed is greater than 5 mph 8 km h the Enhanced Warning System BeltAlert will alert the driver to buckle their seat belt The driver should also instruct all other occupants to buckle their seat belts Once the warning is triggered the Enhanced Warning System BeltAlert will continue to chime and flash the Seat Belt Reminder Light for 96 seconds or until the driver s seat belt is buckled The Enhanced Warning System BeltAlert will be reactivated if the driver s seat belt is unbuckled for more than 10 sec
158. antenna location Metal objects placed within the line of sight of the antenna will cause decreased performance Larger luggage items should be placed as far forward as possible Do not place items directly on or above the antenna Reception Quality Satellite reception may be interrupted due to one of the following reasons e The vehicle is parked in an underground parking structure or under a physical obstacle e Dense tree coverage may interrupt reception in the form of short audio mutes e Driving under wide bridges or along tall buildings can cause intermittent reception 188 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL _ 577 076 7 9 3 When the EVIC is in the Compass Temp Audio screen press the FUNCTION SELECT button to advance the radio to the next preset FUNC Station to change the side of the tape being TION played if so equipped or to change the cur SELECT rent CD track being played if so equipped Button when the EVIC is in the Compass Temp A Audio screen press the SCROLL button to seek v up and down the radio stations CD track SCROLL numbers if so equipped or satellite radio Button channels if so equipped The following describes the operation of the SCROLL button in each mode Radio Operation Press the top of the SCROLL button once to SEEK the next listenable station up from the current setting Press the bottom of the SCROLL button once to SEEK the next listenable statio
159. any obstacle during auto closure it will reverse direction and then stop Remove the obstacle and use the window switch again to close the window e Any impact due to rough road conditions may trigger the auto reverse function unexpectedly during auto closure If this happens pull the switch lightly to the first detent and hold to close window manually WARNING There is no anti pinch protection when the window is almost closed Be sure to clear all objects from the window before closing To close the window part way lift the window switch to the first detent and release it when you want the window to stop For vehicles not equipped with the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC the power window switches will remain active for 10 minutes after the ignition switch is turned off Opening either front door will cancel this feature For vehicles equipped with the EVIC the power window switches will remain active for up to 60 minutes after the ignition switch is turned off Opening either front door will cancel this feature The time is programmable through For details refer to Delay Power Off to Acces sories Until Exit under Personal Settings Customer Programmable Features under Electronic Vehicle In formation Center EVIC in Section 4 of this manual 30 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 0 9 0 lt 19890 9 9 lt 0 0 7 08 Reset Any time the vehicle battery
160. are supported by the radio Multisession discs may contain combinations of normal CD audio tracks and computer files including MP3 files Discs created with an option such as keep disc open after writing are most likely multisession discs The use of multisession for CD audio or MP3 playback may result in longer disc loading times Press and hold the FF button to fast forward through the tracks Release the FF button to stop the fast forward feature If the RW button is pressed the current track will reverse to the beginning of the track and begin playing Press the RND button a second time to stop Random Play Buttons 1 6 CD MODE for CD Audio Play Selects disc positions 1 6 for Play Load Eject Notes On Playing MP3 Files The radio can play MP3 files however acceptable MP3 file recording media and formats are limited When writing MP3 files pay attention to the following restric tions Supported Media Disc Types The MP3 file recording media supported by the radio are CD ROM CD R and CD RW Supported Medium Formats File Systems The medium formats supported by the radio are ISO 9660 Level 1 and Level 2 and includes the Joliet extension When reading discs recorded using formats other than ISO 9660 Level 1 and Level 2 the radio may fail to read 176 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 00000090 0099990909090 0 01 2 ID3 Tag information for artist song title and album title are supported for versio
161. arm Indicator Light will stop flashing turn on again for 3 seconds and then turn off All of the keys provided with your new vehicle have been programmed to the vehicle electronics Replacement Keys NOTE Only keys that are programmed to the vehicle electronics can be used to start and operate the vehicle Once a Sentry Key is programmed to a vehicle it cannot be programmed to any other vehicle At the time of purchase the original owner is provided with a four digit PIN number This number is required for dealer replacement of keys Duplication of keys may be performed at an authorized dealer or by using the Customer Key Programming procedure This procedure consists of programming a blank key to the vehicle electronics A blank key is one which has never been programmed NOTE When having the Sentry Key Immobilizer System serviced bring all vehicle keys with you to the dealer THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 15 0 1 SECURITY ALARM SYSTEM IF EQUIPPED The Vehicle Security Alarm system monitors the vehicle doors for unauthorized entry and the ignition switch for unauthorized operation If something triggers the alarm the system will prevent the vehicle from starting and provide the following audible and visual signals the horn will pulse the headlights will flash the park lights will flash and the Vehicle Security Alarm Indicator light in the instrument cluster will flash Rearming of
162. ate This Reset feature allows the vehicle to be driven to a dealer for service without damaging the transmission If the problem has been momentary the transmission can be reset to regain all forward gears e Stop the vehicle and shift into P Park e Turn the key to LOCK then start the engine e Shift into D Drive and resume driving NOTE Even if the transmission can be reset we recommend that you visit a dealer at your earliest possible convenience Your dealer has diagnostic equip ment to determine if the problem could recur If the transmission cannot be reset dealer service is required clutch is not engaged it may seem as if the transmis sion is not shifting into Overdrive when cold This is considered a normal condition Pulling the selector lever into the 3 position will show that the transmis sion is able to shift into and out of Overdrive e f the vehicle has not been driven for several days the first few seconds of operation after shifting the trans mission into gear may seem sluggish This is due to the transmission fluid partially draining from the torque converter into the transmission This is considered a normal condition and it will not cause damage to the transmission The torque converter will refill within 5 seconds of shifting from P Park into any other gear position Transmission Limp Home Mode The transmission is monitored for abnormal conditions If a condition is detected that could c
163. atically be pulled into the CD Player and the CD icon will illuminate on the radio display If the volume control is ON the unit will switch to CD mode and begin to play The display will show the track number and play time in minutes and seconds Play will begin at the start of track one NOTE e On some vehicles you may insert or eject a disc with the radio or ignition switch OFF e f you insert a disc with the ignition ON and the radio OFF the CD will automatically be pulled into the CD Player e This radio does not play discs with MP3 tracks selected within 5 seconds after pressing the SET button the station will continue to play but will not be stored into push button memory You may add a second station to each push button by repeating the above procedure with this exception Press the SET button twice and SET 2 will show in the display window Each button can be set for SET 1 and SET 2 in both AM and FM This allows a total of 12 AM 12 FM and 12 Satellite if equipped stations to be stored into push button memory The stations stored in SET 2 memory can be selected by pressing the push button twice Every time a preset button is used a corresponding button number will display Preset Buttons 1 6 Radio Mode These buttons tune the Radio to the stations that you commit to push button memory 12 AM 12 FM and 12 Satellite if equipped stations UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 165
164. ause damage the transmission automatically shifts into second gear The transmission remains in second gear despite the forward gear selected P Park R Reverse and N Neutral will ee STARTING AND OPERATING 219 5 Speed Automatic Transmission Never use P Park while the vehicle is in motion Shifting from D Drive to P Park or R Reverse or Apply the parking brake when leaving the vehicle in from P or R to D should be done only after the this range accelerator pedal is released and the vehicle is stopped Be sure to keep your foot on the brake when moving the selector lever between these gears When parking on a flat surface place the gear selector in the P Park position first and then apply the parking brake When parking on a hill it is important to set the parking brake before placing the gear selector in P Park other wise the load on the transmission locking mechanism may make it difficult to move the selector out of park As an added precaution turn the front wheels toward the curb on a downhill grade and away from the curb on an uphill grade WARNINCG Never use Park position on an automatic transmis Selector Lever sion as a substitute for the parking brake Always Gear Ranges apply parking brake fully when parked to guard P Park against vehicle movement and possible injury or P Park supplements the parking brake by locking the damage transmission The engine can be started in this range
165. belts Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and using a seat belt properly ENGINE BREAK IN RECOMMENDATIONS A long break in period is not required for the engine in your new vehicle Drive moderately during the first 300 miles 500 km After the initial 60 miles 100 km speeds up to 50 or 55 mph 80 or 90 km h are desirable While cruising brief full throttle acceleration within the limits of local traffic laws contributes to a good break in Wide open throttle acceleration in low gear can be detri mental and should be avoided The engine oil installed in the engine at the factory is a high quality energy conserving type lubricant Oil changes should be consistent with anticipated climate conditions under which vehicle operations will occur The recommended viscosity and quality grades are shown in Section 7 of this manual NON DETERGENT OR STRAIGHT MINERAL OILS MUST NEVER BE USED 60 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 9 9 lt 0 1 0 damaged deteriorated or mispositioned parts Open seams or loose connections could permit exhaust fumes to seep into the passenger compartment In addition inspect the exhaust system each time the vehicle is raised for lubrication or oil change Replace as required WARNINCG e Exhaust gases can injure or kill They contain carbon monoxide CO which is colorless and odorless Breathing it can make you unconscious and can eventually poison you To avoid breath ing
166. ble features e Compass display e Outside temperature display e Trip computer functions e UConnect hands free communication system dis plays if equipped e Navigation system screens if equipped e Audio mode display The system allows the driver to select information by pressing the following buttons mounted on the steering wheel Press and release the MENU button and the mode displayed will change between Trip Functions Navigation if equipped System MENU Status Personal Settings and Telephone if Button equipped ELECTRONIC VEHICLE INFORMATION CENTER EVIC IF EQUIPPED d185c384 Electronic Vehicle Information Center The Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC fea tures a driver interactive display It is located in the instrument cluster below the speedometer Vehicles equipped with steering wheel mounted buttons de scribed in this section are also equipped with the EVIC The EVIC consists of the following e System Status UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 9 If Compass Temp Audio is already displayed when the AUDIO MODE button is pressed then the radio mode will change from AM to FM to Tape to CD or to Satellite SAT accordingly Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Displays When the appropriate conditions exist the Electronic 4 Vehicle Information Center EVIC displays the following messages Turn Signal On with a continuous warning chime if the vehicle is dri
167. bsites may also provide detailed instructions for pairing with the brand of phone that you have NOTE e www chrysler com uconnect e www dodge com uconnect e For each feature explanation in this section only the combined form of the voice command is given You can also break the commands into parts and say each part of the command when you are asked for it For example you can use the combined form voice com mand Phonebook New Entry or you can break the combined form command into two voice commands Phonebook and New Entry Please remember the UConnect system works best when you talk in a normal conversational tone as if speaking to some one sitting eight feet away from you Voice Command Tree Refer to Voice Tree at the end of this section Help Command If you need assistance at any prompt or if you want to know your options are at any prompt say Help follow ing the voice on beep The UConnect system will play all the options at any prompt if you ask for help To activate the UConnect system from idle simply press the Phone button and follow audible prompts for directions All UConnect system sessions begin with a press of the Phone button on the mirror ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 73 your UConnect system However at any given time only one cellular phone can be in use connected to your UConnect System The priority allows the UConnect system to know which
168. cable should never exceed the weight referenced here 007 44001 01 0 000909999090 13 STARTING AND OPERATING 242 illustration purposes only and may not be accurate for the seating and load carry capacity of your vehicle NOTE For the following example the combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed 865 Ibs 392 Kg manual to determine how this reduces the available cargo and luggage load capacity of your vehicle NOTE The following table shows examples on how to calculate total load cargo luggage and towing capaci ties of your vehicle with varying seating configurations and number and size of occupants This table is for STARTING AND OPERATING 243 AVAILABLE Cargo Luggage and Trailer Tongue Weight 195 Ibs 325 Ibs 465 Ibs 81 1 Combined Occupant s weight Occunant 1 200 Ibs Occupant 2 PII Ies Occupant 3 t0 Ibs Be Occupa t0 Occupant 1 210 Ibs Secupant 2 TBO fos Bor uaant 2 E50 ths TOTAL WEIGHT 540 Ibs 940 Ibs Occupant 1 200 Ibs EPAL HQ Ii TOTAL WEIGHT 10 Is 400 Ibs Combined weight of occupants and cargo from Tire Placard 865 Ibs 869 lbs Occupants EXAMPLE 1 EXAMPLE 2 EXAMPLE 3 244 STARTING AND OPERATING 1833 3 0 2 0 000 00 0 0 2 2 WARNING 1 Safety WARNING e Improperly inflated tires are dangerous and can cause accidents Overloading of your tires is danger
169. ccur when the remote keyless entry Lock button is pressed This feature may be selected with or without the flash lights Press and release the MENU button until Personal Set tings displays in the EVIC Use the SCROLL button to display one of the following choices Language When in this display you may select one of five lan guages for all display nomenclature including the trip functions and the navigation system if equipped Press the FUNCTION SELECT button while in this display to select English Espanol Deutsch Italiano or Francais Then as you continue the information will display in the selected language NOTE The EVIC will not change the UConnect language selection Please refer to Language Selection in the HANDS FREE COMMUNICATION UConnect section of this manual for details Lock Doors Automatically at 15 mph 24 Km h When ON is selected all doors will lock automatically when the vehicle reaches a speed of 15 mph 24 km h To make your selection press and release the FUNC TION SELECT button until ON or OFF appears 158 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT 2 0 0 8 NOTE Turning the headlights on during the daytime causes the instrument panel lights to dim To increase the brightness refer to Lights in Section 3 of this manual Delay Turning Headlights Off When this feature is selected the driver can choose to have the headlights remain on for 0 30 60 or 90 seconds whe
170. cellular phone to use if multiple cellular phones are in the vehicle at the same time For example if priority 3 and priority 5 phones are present in the vehicle the UConnect system will use the priority 3 cellular phone when you make a call You can select to use a lower priority cellular phone at any time refer to Advanced Phone Connectivity www jeep com uconnect The following are general phone to UConnect System pairing instructions Press the Phone button to begin After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Setup Phone Pairing and follow the audible prompts When prompted after the voice on beep say Pair a Phone and follow the audible prompts You will be asked to say a four digit pin number which you will later need to enter into your cellular You can enter any four digit pin number You will not need to remember this pin number after the initial pairing process Call Dial by Saying a Number e Press the Phone button to begin e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Dial System will prompt you to say the number you want call For example you can say 234 567 8901 For identification purposes you will be prompted to give the UConnect system a name for your cellular phone Each cellular phone that is paired should be given a unique phone name You will then be asked to give your cellular phone a priority level between 1 and 7 1 being the highe
171. check the engine oil level is about 5 minutes after a fully warmed engine is shut off or before starting the engine after it has sat overnight Checking the oil while the vehicle is on level ground will improve the accuracy of the oil level readings Maintain the oil level between the MIN and MAX markings on the dipstick Adding 1 0 quart 1 0L of oil when the reading i is at the MIN mark will result in a MAX reading on these engines WARNING You can be badly injured working on or around a motor vehicle Only do service work for which you have the knowledge and the proper equipment If you have any doubt about your ability to perform a service job take your vehicle to a competent me chanic MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES The pages that follow contain the required maintenance services determined by the engineers who designed your vehicle Besides the maintenance items for which there are fixed maintenance intervals there are other items that should operate satisfactorily without periodic maintenance However if a malfunction of these items does occur it could adversely affect the engine or vehicle performance These items should be inspected if a malfunction is observed or suspected The best time to check the engine oil level is about 5 minutes after a fully warmed engine is shut off or before starting the engine after it has sat overnight Checking the oil while the vehicle is on level ground will improve the accuracy
172. conditioning is turned on cool dehumidi fied air will flow through the outlets selected with the Mode control dial Press this button a second time to turn off the air conditioning An LED in the button illuminates when manual compressor opera tion is selected The operator can override the AUTO mode setting to change airflow distribution by rotating the Mode Control knob on the right to one of the following positions e Defrost QU Air is directed to the windshield through the outlets at the base of the windshield Air is also directed to the front door windows through the side window demister grilles e DefrostlFloor qH Air flows through the front and rear floor y outlets and the outlets at the base of the windshield Air is also directed to the front door windows through the side window demister grilles e Floor Air flows through the floor outlets located under the instrument panel and into the rear seating area through vents under the front seats 198 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 0 0 0 0 Operating Tips NOTE Refer to the chart at the end of this section for suggested control settings for various weather condi tions Summer Operation The engine cooling system in air conditioned vehicles must be protected with a high quality antifreeze coolant to provide proper corrosion protection and to protect against engine overheating A 50 solution of ethylene glycol antifreeze coolant in water i
173. d access cover in the load floor in the cargo area Follow these steps to access the jack and spare tire NOTE The spare tire must be removed in order to access the jack 1 Open the liftgate 2 Fold up the tri fold floor if equipped by lifting the handle 288 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 0 0 3 Lift the access cover using the pull strap 4 Remove the fastener securing the spare tire i 812c5587 Lifting The Access Cover Spare Tire Fastener ee WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 9 5 Remove the spare tire WARNING A loose tire or jack thrown forward in a collision or hard stop could endanger the occupants of the ve 6 Remove the fastener securing the jack hicle Always stow the jack parts and the spare tire in the places provided 1 Block the wheel diagonally opposite the flat tire Passengers 6 should not remain in the vehicle when the vehicle is being jacked BLOCK Jack Fastener mE 2 Remove the spare tire jack and lug wrench 3 If equipped with steel wheels do not remove the wheel cover at this time If equipped with aluminum wheels before raising the vehicle use the lug wrench to pry the center cap off carefully 290 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 7 7 1 57 7 0 7 00 79 4 Before raising the vehicle use the lug wrench to loosen but not remove the lug nuts on the wheel with the flat tire Turn the lug nuts counter clockwise one turn while the whee
174. d HomeLink Universal Transceiver and your garage door opener is manufactured after 1995 it may have a multiple security code system rolling code system Please proceed to Steps 6 8 to complete the programming of a rolling code equipped device most common garage door openers require this step 6 At the garage door opener receiver motor head unit in the garage locate the learn or smart button This can usually be found where the hanging antenna wire is attached to the motor head unit 7 Firmly press and release the learn or smart button The name and color of the button may vary by manu facturer NOTE You will have 30 seconds in which to initiate otep 8 8 Return to the vehicle and firmly press hold for two seconds and release the programmed HomeLink button Repeat the press hold release sequence a second time and depending on the brand of the garage door opener 114 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 1 0 gt 7 _ 1 Erasing HomeLink Buttons To erase programming from the three buttons individual buttons cannot be erased but can be reprogrammed note below follow the step noted e Press and hold the two outer HomeLink buttons Release the buttons only when the EVIC displays Channels Cleared after 20 seconds however do not hold the buttons for longer than 30 seconds HomeLink is now in the train or learning mode and can be programmed a
175. d Leaks Check area under vehicle after overnight parking for fuel engine coolant oil or other fluid leaks Also if gasoline fumes are detected or if fuel power steering fluid or brake fluid leaks are suspected the cause should be located and corrected immediately UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE CONTENTS 1 nt eee RERESES DES 9212 ced 67 Wl Hands Free Communication UConnect If O Inside Day Night Mirror 67 971 i Automatic Dimming Inside Mirror If signi 425 44 0 noun ae 2 D 72 7 U Phone Call Features sac ees 77 67 vee ngayon 1678691 Otgtside 31178678 4 uoa F4 Ro Ry she bens 68 HU Connect System Features 79 O Exterior Mirrors Folding Feature If H Advanced Phone Connectivity 82 sos aus chien s oo teh he are aes 68 7 Things You Should Know About Your 018880 os 84 ConnecP 5v SEES s ra E O Driver s Side Outside Mirror Auto Dimmer If 89 hea eee ie ob eee pe id 7 8 D Power Remote Control Mirrors 69 Manual Seats If Equipped 89 Heated Remote Control Mirrors If 3 PP 69 00 7 a Power Reclining Seats If Equipped 91 0 Illuminated Vanity Mirrors If Equipped 69 64 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VE
176. d facing or forward facing in the vehicle Convertible child seats often have a higher weight limit in the rearward facing direction than infant carriers do so they can be used rearward facing by children who weigh more than 20 lbs 9 kg but are less than one year old Both types of child restraints are held in the vehicle by the lap shoulder belt or the LATCH child restraint anchorage system Refer to LATCH Child Seat Anchorage System Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren in this section Rearward facing child seats must NEVER be used in the front seat of a vehicle with the front passenger airbag unless the airbag is turned off An airbag deployment could cause severe injury or death to infants in this position ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 53 WARNING e Improper installation can lead to failure of an infant or child restraint It could come loose in a collision The child could be badly injured or killed Follow the manufacturer s directions ex actly when installing an infant or child restraint A rearward facing child restraint should only be used in a rear seat A rearward facing child re straint in the front seat may be struck by a deploying passenger airbag which may cause severe or fatal injury to the infant Here are some tips on getting the most out of your child restraint e Before buying any restraint system make sure that it has a label certifying that it meets all applicable Safety
177. d hooks for connection to the top tether anchorages have been avail able for some time For some older child restraints many child restraint manufacturers offer add on tether strap kits or retro fit kits You are urged to take advantage of all the available attachments provided with your child re straint in any vehicle All three rear seating positions have lower anchorages that are capable of accommodating LATCH compatible child seats You should NEVER install LATCH compatible child seats such that two seats share a com mon lower anchorage If installing child seats in adjacent e The restraint must be appropriate for your child s weight and height Check the label on the restraint for weight and height limits e Carefully follow the instructions that come with the restraint If you install the restraint improperly it may not work when you need it e Buckle the child into the seat according to the child restraint manufacturer s directions e When your child restraint is not in use secure it in the vehicle with the seat belt or remove it from the vehicle Do not leave it loose in the vehicle In a sudden stop or collision it could strike the occupants or seat backs and cause serious personal injury LATCH Child Seat Anchorage System Lower Anchors and Tether for CH ildren Your vehicle s rear seat is equipped with the child restraint anchorage system called LATCH The LATCH system provides for the installation of the child
178. dd if proper fit required At Each Oil Change Once a Month e Change the engine oil filter e Check tire pressure and look for unusual wear or e Inspect the exhaust system damage I t the brake hoses e Inspect the battery and clean and tighten the termi a 1 7 nals as required Inspect the CV joints and front and rear suspension e Check the fluid levels of coolant reservoir and brake 000 a master cylinder and add as needed e Check the coolant level hoses and clamps N T E N A N C E 5 C H E 0 U L E S 8 e Trailer towing e Taxi police or delivery service commercial ser vices Off road or desert operation NOTE If ANY of these apply to you then change your engine oil every 3 000 miles 5 000 km or 3 months whichever comes first and follow the maintenance rec ommendations in Schedule B in this section NOTE If ANY of these apply to you then flush and replace the engine coolant every 102 000 miles 170 000 km or 60 months whichever comes first and follow the maintenance recommendations in Schedule B in this section M A l N T E N A N C E 5 C H E 0 U L E S 8 ee SCHEDULE B 357 SCHEDULE B Follow Schedule B if you usually operate your vehicle under one or more of the following conditions Change the automatic transmission fluid and filter every 60 000 miles 100 000 km if the vehicle is usually operated u
179. dows down or the sunroof if equipped in certain open or partially open positions This is a normal occur rence and can be minimized If the buffeting occurs with the rear windows open then open the front and rear windows together to minimize the buffeting If the buffeting occurs with the sunroof open then adjust the sunroof opening to minimize the buffeting or open any window sunroof Maintenance Use only a non abrasive cleaner and a soft cloth to clean the glass panel Ignition Off Operation For vehicles not equipped with the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC the power sunroof switch will remain active for 10 minutes after the ignition switch is turned off Opening either front door will cancel this feature Pinch Protect Override If a known obstruction ice debris etc prevents closing press the switch forward and hold for two seconds after the reversal occurs This allows the sunroof to move towards the closed position NOTE Pinch protection is disabled while the switch is pressed Venting Sunroof Express Press and release the V button and the sunroof will open to the vent position This is called Express Vent which operates regardless of sunroof position During Express Vent operation any movement of the switch will stop the sunroof Sunshade Operation The sunshade can be opened manually However the sunshade will open automatically as the sunroof opens NOTE The sunshade cannot be closed i
180. e Battery Strength The EVIC displays this symbol to indicate that R a phone connection has been made Call in Progress The EVIC displays this symbol to indicate that X the UConnect phone is currently not avail able Phone Not Avail able Navigation If Equipped Navigation Display Control Press and release the MENU button until Navigation displays in the EVIC When the Navigation System is On the steering wheel buttons can be used to select the Map ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 157 Unlock Doors Automatically on Exit When ON is selected all doors will unlock when the vehicle is stopped and the transmission is in the P Park or N Neutral position and the driver s door is opened To make your selection press and release the FUNC TION SELECT button until ON or OFF appears Remote Key Unlock When Driver Door 1st Press is selected only the driver s door will unlock on the first press of the remote keyless entry unlock button When Driver Door 1st Press is selected you must press of the remote keyless entry unlock button twice to unlock the passenger s doors When All Doors 1st Press is selected all of the doors will unlock on the first press of the remote keyless entry unlock button To make your selection press and release the FUNCTION SELECT button until Driver Door 1st Press or All Doors 1st Press appears Sound Horn with Remote Key Lock When ON is selected a short horn sound will o
181. e information 13 Electronic Stability Program ESP Brake Assist System BAS Malfunction Indicator Light If Equipped The yellow ESP BAS malfunction indicator light will turn on when the key in the ignition switch is turned to the ON posi tion The light should go out with the engine running The system will turn this light on continu ously while the engine running if it detects a malfunc tion in either the ESP or the BAS or both See page 233 for more information ESP BAS 14 Oil Pressure Warning Light i This light shows low engine oil pressure The light should turn on momentarily when the engine is started If the light turns on while driving stop the vehicle and shut off the engine as soon as possible A single chime will sound when this light turns on 144 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 9 01 919 0000080980 6 60 gt 75 5 A loose improperly installed or damaged fuel filler cap may also turn on the Malfunction Indicator Light MIL See page 306 for more information 20 Brake System Warning Light This light monitors various brake functions BRAKE including brake fluid level and parking brake application If the brake light turns on it may indicate that the parking brake is applied that the brake fluid level is low or that there is a problem with the anti lock brake system if equipped The dual brake system provides a reserve braking capac ity to a port
182. e red area This light will turn on when the electronic speed control is ON See page 106 for more information 6 Voltage Light This light monitors the electrical system volt age The light should turn on momentarily as the engine is started If the light stays on or turns on while driving it indicates a problem with the charging system Immediate service should be obtained 140 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DESCRIPTIONS 1 Fuel Gauge The pointer shows the level of fuel in the fuel tank when the ignition switch is in the ON position 2 Trip Odometer Button Base Cluster The word TRIP will appear when this button is pressed Push in and hold the button for two seconds when the trip odometer displays to reset it to 0 miles kilometers A second press of the button will display the outside temperature in the odometer Premium Cluster Press this button to change the display from odometer to either of two trip odometer settings The letter A or B will appear when in the trip odometer mode Push in and hold the button for two seconds to reset the trip odometer to 0 miles kilometers The odometer must be in trip mode to reset it UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 1 8 Temperature Gauge The temperature gauge shows engine coolant tempera ture Any reading within the normal range indicates that the engine cooling system is operating satisfactorily The gauge pointer will likely
183. e vehicle must be driven to reset the system UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL O Personal Settings Customer Programmable Features 6554684654 9 Lalas ls 4 Radio General Information 159 Radio Broadcast Signals 159 B Two Types Of Signals acs cise erewa 159 B Electrical Disturbances 160 HAM 56866711047310 uil a4 ts 10 AFM RECEPUORN oss Oe ooo 10 Sales Code REF AM FM CD Single Disc Radio With Optional Satellite Radio And Hands Free Phone Capability is de aun eee aos 161 O Operating Instructions Radio Mode CONTENTS B Instrument Panel And Controls 137 Bl Base Instrument Cluster 138 ll Premium Instrument Cluster If Equipped 139 W Instrument Cluster Descriptions 140 Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC If 148 s coss xui ope E QU eee D Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Bi Ciel eae ea ee a TES 149 EMP MINGHONS ede 2644 08 moun ca oS am ee pA 150 LCompass Display eoa hun heuer een ana 153 B Telephone If Equipped 154 o Navigation If Equipped 156 134 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 7770000000000008 O Operation Instructions CD Mode 164 o Metal Tape Selection 172 O Operation Inst
184. e Air Intake Make sure the air intake located directly in front of the windshield is free of obstructions such as leaves Leaves collected in the air intake may reduce airflow and if they enter the plenum they could plug the water drains In winter months make sure the air intake is clear of ice slush and snow A C Air Filter If Equipped The climate control system filters outside air containing dust pollen and some odors Strong odors cannot be totally filtered out Refer to Maintenance Procedures in Section 7 of this manual for filter replacement instruc tions system lubrication to minimize the possibility of com pressor damage when the system is started again Window Fogging Interior fogging on the windshield can be quickly re moved by turning the mode selector to Defrost The Defrost Floor mode can be used to maintain a clear windshield and provide sufficient heating If side win dow fogging becomes a problem increase blower speed Vehicle windows tend to fog on the inside in mild but rainy or humid weather NOTE Recirculate without A C should not be used for long periods as fogging may occur 200 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 9 0 999 91 lt 0 0 94 00 Control Setting Suggestions for Various Weather Conditions WEATHER CONTROL SETTINGS HOT WEATHER Open the windows start the vehicle set the Mode control to Panel __ or Bi Level AND VEHICLE INTERIOR S ET and turn on A
185. e belt over your shoulder so that your strongest bones will take the force in a collision e A shoulder belt placed behind you will not protect you from injury during a collision You are more likely to hit your head in a collision if you do not wear your shoulder belt The lap and shoulder belt are meant to be used together T LII PES See ee Ps mm T E 36 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 999 90 0 9 8 9899090 0 WARNING e A lap belt worn too high can increase the risk of internal injury in a collision The belt forces won t be at the strong hip and pelvic bones but across your abdomen Always wear the lap belt as low as pos sible and keep it snug e A twisted belt can t do its job as well In a collision it could even cut into you Be sure the belt is straight If you can t straighten a belt in your vehicle take it to your dealer and have it fixed 5 Position the shoulder belt on your chest so that it is comfortable and not resting on your neck The retractor will withdraw any slack in the belt 6 To release the belt push the red button on the buckle The belt will automatically retract to its stowed position If necessary slide the latch plate down the webbing to allow the belt to retract fully 4 Position the lap belt acro
186. e engine is running smoothly Do not overspeed the engine If the engine shows no sign of starting after two 15 second periods of cranking with the accelerator pedal held to the floor the NORMAL STARTING procedure should be repeated After Starting The idle speed is controlled automatically and it will decrease as the engine warms up WARNINCG e Never pour fuel or other flammable liquid into the throttle body air inlet opening in an attempt to start the vehicle This could result in flash fire causing serious personal injury Do not attempt to push or tow your vehicle to get it started Vehicles equipped with an automatic transmission cannot be started this way Un burned fuel could enter the catalytic converter and once the engine has started ignite and damage the converter and vehicle If the vehicle has a dis charged battery booster cables may be used to obtain a start from a booster battery or the battery in another vehicle This type of start can be dangerous if done improperly See section 6 of this manual for the proper jump starting proce dures and follow them carefully ee STARTING AND OPERATING 211 AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION CAUTION Damage to the transmission may occur if the follow ing precautions are not observed e Shift into PARK only after the vehicle has come to a complete stop Shift into or out of REVERSE only after the vehicle has come to a complete stop and the engine is at idle speed
187. e engine s eight cylinders during light load and cruise conditions The system is automatic with no driver inputs or additional driving skills required NOTE The MDS system may take some time to return to full functionality after a battery disconnect ee STARTING AND OPERATING 1 NOTE To improve the vehicle s traction when driving with snow chains or starting off in deep snow sand or gravel switch off the TCS by pressing the TCS OFF button CAUTION When the TCS Indicator Light is illuminated con tinuously the TCS is switched off Avoid spinning one drive wheel This may cause serious damage to the drive train NOTE e The Traction Control System comes on each time the ignition switch is turned ON This will occur even if you used the TCS OFF button to turn OFF the system e The Traction Control System will make buzzing or clicking sounds when in operation acceleration ease up on the accelerator and apply as little throttle as possible Be sure to adapt your speed and driving to the prevailing road conditions The TCS OFF button is located in the center of the instrument panel To turn OFF the TCS momentarily press the button and the TCS Indicator Light will illumi nate To turn the system ON again momentarily press the TCS OFF button and the indicator light will turn OFF 0 82 9 9 9 09 000 40 1 STARTING AND OPERATING 232 The Brake Assist System BAS is standard on vehic
188. e previous file LOAD EJECT Button CD Mode for MP3 and WMA Play LOAD EJT Load Press the LOAD EJT button and the push A button with the corresponding number where LOAD the CD is being loaded The radio will display PLEASE WAIT and prompt when to INSERT DISC After the radio displays INSERT DISC insert the CD into the player 7 7 12 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 178 RND PTY Button CD Mode for MP3 Play Pressing this button plays files randomly SET DIR Button CD Mode for MP3 Play Press the SET DIR Button to display folders when playing an MP3 discs that have a file folder structure Turn the TUNE control to display available folders or move through available folders Press the TUNE control to select a folder Buttons 1 6 CD Mode for MP3 Play Selects disc positions 1 6 for Play Load Eject Operating Instructions Hands Free Phone If Equipped Refer to Hands Free Phone in Section 3 of the Owner s Manual Operating Instructions Satellite Radio Mode If Equipped Refer to the Satellite Radio section of the Owner s Manual INFO Button CD Mode for MP3 Play Press and INFO button while playing MP3 or WMA disc The radio scrolls through the following TAG information Song Title Artist File Name and Folder Name if avail able Press the INFO button once more to return to elapsed time priority mode Press and hold the INFO button while in the mess
189. e to do so can lead to brake failure and an accident STARTING AND OPERATING 227 7 0 1000 1 You also may experience the following when the brake system goes into Anti lock e The ABS motor running it may continue to run for a short time after the stop e the clicking sound of solenoid valves e brake pedal pulsations e anda slight drop or fall away of the brake pedal at the end of the stop ra These are all normal characteristics of ABS The electronic brake force distribution EBD prevents the rear wheels from over braking and provides greater control of available braking forces applied to the rear axle When the vehicle is driven over 7 mph 11 km h you may also hear a slight clicking sound as well as some related motor noises These noises are the system per forming its self check cycle to ensure that the ABS system is working properly This self check occurs each time the vehicle is started and accelerated past 7 mph 11 km h ABS is activated during braking under certain road or stopping conditions ABS inducing conditions can in clude ice snow gravel bumps railroad tracks loose debris or panic stops All vehicle wheels and tires must be the same size and type and tires must be properly inflated to produce accurate signals for the computer Anti Lock Brake Light G9 The ABS light monitors the Anti Lock Brake Sys tem The light will come on when the ignition
190. e vehicle TOWING THIS VEHICLE BEHIND ANOTHER VEHICLE Flat towing with all four wheels on the ground Flat towing of vehicles equipped with an automatic transmission is only permitted within the following limitations With The Ignition Key Your vehicle may be towed under the following condi tions The gear selector must be in NEUTRAL the distance to be traveled must not exceed 30 miles 48 km and the towing speed must not exceed 30 mph 48 ee WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 299 If you must use the accessories wipers defrosters etc TOWING THIS VEHICLE BEHIND ANOTHER while being towed the key must be in the ON position VEHICLE WITH A TOW DOLLY not the ACCESSORY position Make certain the transmis The manufacture does not recommend that you tow this sion remains in NEUTRAL vehicle on a tow dolly Vehicle damage may occur 314 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE O Drive Belts Check Condition And Tension Hope TINGS scans E Engine Air Cleaner Iter a as uua DLT M as Catalytic CONVENE oou iuum race grado H Maimtenance Free Battery ss cs ss O Air Conditioner Maintenance 0 A C Air Filter If Equipped O Power Steering Fluid Check O Front amp Rear Suspension Ball Joints EMStectine LIBKOPB S a aan agentes oe Reg RR CONTENTS WB 2 7L Engine Compartment 3 5L Engine Compartment B 5 7L Engine Compartm
191. e vehicle next to the windshield wipers When installing a new filter ensure its proper orientation To replace the filter remove the access door in the cowl screen by pressing the retaining clips Slide the lid on the filter adapter forward and down and remove used filter Install new filter with arrows pointing in the direction of airflow which is toward the rear of the vehicle text and arrows on the filter indicate this 320 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 80 2 11 0 707800 The external lock cylinders should be lubricated twice a year preferably in the fall and spring Apply a small amount of a high quality lubricant such as Mopar Lock Cylinder Lubricant or equivalent directly into the lock cylinder Wiper Blades Clean the rubber edges of the wiper blades and the windshield and rear window periodically with a sponge or soft cloth and a mild nonabrasive cleaner This will remove accumulations of salt or road film Operation of the wipers on dry glass for long periods may cause deterioration of the wiper blades Always use washer fluid when using the wipers to remove salt or dirt from a dry windshield or rear window Avoid using the wiper blades to remove frost or ice from the windshield or rear window Keep the blade rubber out of contact with petroleum products such as engine oil gasoline etc surfaces Refer to Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts in this section for the correct fluid type
192. ed by federal safety stan push of a button The Universal Transceiver operates off dards This includes most garage door opener mod your vehicle s battery and charging system no batteries els manufactured after 1982 Do not use a garage door are needed opener without these safety features it could cause injury or death Call toll free 1 800 355 3515 or on NOTE The HomeLink Universal Transceiver is dis the Internet at www homelink com for safety infor abled when the Vehicle Security Alarm is active mation or assistance Vehicle exhaust contains carbon monoxide a danger ous gas Do not run the vehicle s exhaust while training the transceiver Exhaust gas can cause seri ous injury or death For additional information on HomeLink call 1 800 355 3515 or on the internet at www homelink com Your motorized door or gate will open and close while you are training the Universal Transceiver Do not train the transceiver if people or pets are in the path of the door or gate A moving door or gate can cause serious injury or death to people and pets or damage to objects E UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 111 Programming HomeLink NOTE When programming a garage door opener it is advised to park outside the garage It is also recom mended that you install a new battery in the hand held transmitter of the device being programmed This will allow for quicker training and accurate transmission of the radio frequency
193. ed from the UConnect system to the mobile phone e An active call is automatically transferred to the mobile phone after ignition key is switched to off UConnect System Features Language Selection To change the language that the UConnect system is using e Press the Phone button to begin e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say the name of the language you wish to switch to English Espanol or Francais if so equipped e Continue to follow the system prompts to complete language selection After selecting one of the languages all prompts and voice commands will be in that language 80 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 7 02 0 6 4 09099080 999990 2 9 Please refer to the 24 Hour Towing Assistance cover age details in the Warranty information booklet and on the 24 Hour Towing Assistance Card Paging To learn how to page refer to Working with Automated Systems Paging works properly except for pagers of certain companies which time out a little too soon to work properly with the UConnect system Voice Mail Calling To learn how to access your voice mail refer to Working with Automated Systems Working with Automated Systems This method is designed to be used in instances where one generally has to press numbers on the cellular phone keypad while navigating through an automated tele phone system You can use your UConnect system to access a
194. ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 333 What Causes Corrosion e Use Mopar Cleaner Wax to remove road film stains Corrosion is the result of deterioration or removal of and to protect your paint finish Take care never to paint and protective coatings from your vehicle scratch the paint The most common causes are e Avoid using abrasive compounds and power buffing that may diminish the gloss or thin out the paint e Road salt dirt and moisture accumulation finish e Stone and gravel impact e nsects tree sap and tar CAUTION e Salt in the air near seacoast localities Do not use abrasive or strong cleaning materials e Atmospheric fallout industrial pollutants such as steel wool or scouring powder which will scratch metal and painted surfaces Washing e Wash your vehicle regularly Always wash your ve hicle in the shade using Mopar Car Wash or a mild car wash soap and rinse the panels completely with e If you drive on salted or dusty roads or if you drive clear water near the ocean hose off the undercarriage at least once a month Special Care e If insects tar or other similar deposits have accumu lated on your vehicle use Mopar Super Kleen Bug It is important that the drain holes in the lower edges and Tar Remover to remove of the doors rocker panels and rear cargo area be kept clear and open 334 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 990094 993 45 5 01 0 gt 5 Whee
195. eived including interference that may cause undes ired operation 16 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 000 e The system remains armed during liftgate entry If someone enters the vehicle through the liftgate and opens any door the alarm will sound e When the system is armed the interior power door lock switches will not unlock the doors The Vehicle Security Alarm system is designed to protect your vehicle however you can create conditions where the system will give you a false alarm If one of the previously described arming sequences has occurred the system will arm regardless of whether you are in the vehicle or not If you remain in the vehicle and open a door the alarm will sound If this occurs disarm the system The alarm system will be activated when the battery is connected if the system was previously armed The exterior lights will flash the horn will sound and the ignition will not start the vehicle If this occurs disarm the system system is not arming In addition if you open a door during the arming period the system will cancel the arming process If you wish to rearm the system after closing the door you must repeat one of the previously described arming sequences To Disarm the System Either press the UNLOCK button on the remote keyless entry transmitter or insert a valid sentry key into the ignition lock cylinder and turn the key to the ON START position If you open the liftgate a
196. el at tached to the rear of the driver s door for your vehicle s GVWR and GAWRSs This table is only an example driving If weighing the loaded vehicle shows that you have exceeded either GAWR but the total load is within the specified GVWR you must redistribute the weight Improper weight distribution can have an adverse effect on the way your vehicle steers and handles and the way the brakes operate A loaded vehicle is shown in the illustration Note that neither the GVWR nor the GAWR capacities have been exceeded GROSS VEHICLE WEIGHT RATING GVWR 2177 KG 4800 LBS Example nid 513407 270 STARTING AND OPERATING 70 loaded and ready for operation condition The recom mended way to measure GTW is to put your fully loaded trailer on a vehicle scale The entire weight of the trailer must be supported by the scale Gross Combination Weight Rating GCWR The gross combination weight rating GCWR is the total permissible weight of your vehicle and trailer when weighed in combination Note that GCWR ratings in clude a 150 Ibs 68 kg allowance for the presence of a driver Gross Axle Weight Rating GAWR The GAWR is the maximum capacity of the front and rear axles Distribute the load over the front and rear axles evenly Make sure that you do not exceed either front or rear GAWR WARNING It is important that you do not exceed the maximum front or rear GAWR A dangerous driving condition can result if
197. emaining debris e Rinse the liner thoroughly under warm running water Shake the excess water from the liner and dry the outer surfaces with a clean soft cloth e Carefully tuck the front followed by the rear then side edges of the cup holder into the center console 1 Clean with a wet soft rag or micro fiber towel A mild soap solution may be used but do not use high alcohol content or abrasive cleaners If soap is used wipe clean with a clean damp rag 2 Dry with a soft tissue Seat Belt Maintenance Do not bleach dye or clean the belts with chemical solvents or abrasive cleaners This will weaken the fabric Sun damage can also weaken the fabric If the belts need cleaning use Mopar Total Clean a mild soap solution or lukewarm water Do not remove the belts from the vehicle to wash them Replace the belts if they appear frayed or worn or if the buckles do not work properly ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 7 FUSES POWER DISTRIBUTION CENTERS Cavity Car Mini 069 Fuses Front Power Distribution Center CA Fuse use A power distribution center is located in the engine compartment This center contains fuses and relays 1 3 15 Amp Adjustable Pedals if Blue equipped Hun 4 20 Amp AC Clutch Horn Yellow Er E ET T 2 WP POM a M a ag 6 15 Amp Front Control Module a 7 Boe Blue FCM ORE F i dM ME 7 20 Amp Fog Lights if equipped Yellow eo MEE
198. ent ll Onboard Diagnostic System OBD II Loose Fuel Fillet Cap r eua sas Emissions Inspection And Maintenance PROCTOING PE W Replacement Parts W Dealer Service W Maintenance Procedures A opne OM serre soiree ser eR Sx Ears HENE RE CL Piel 4424 40 302 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 7 8 6 77931987 1 9 7 77 6 6 63 gt _ 0 2 7 510 0 gt 6 0 Body Lubrication ws dope sen ru Ghee x 320 W Fuses Power Distribution Centers 337 D Fuses Front Power Distribution Center 307 320 ITEC 571546585 8 O Windshield Washers Rear Window Washer 321 O Fuses Rear Power Distribution Center 339 chee teenage es 344 9484s Pr ed 321 Vehicle Storage 94499 69 O Exhaust System W Replacement Light Bulbs 344 322 RAP SUSIGIIE oA q 506 7078 Bulb Replacement ois cic cba besa 345 327 o Hoses And Vacuum Vapor Harnesses eS 327 DH Low Beam Headlight High Beam Headlight O Piel 578190 sa nana te ae oe E em 327 9 4 O Brake Systemi 20 uex wer D Automatic Transmission 330 mm m Signal ak And Dackup s 346 n
199. er B If Your Engine Overheats Jacking And Tire Changing O Preparations For Jacking H Jack Location Spare Tire Stowage Jacking And Changing a Tire 0 COMPACT Spare TIE as sss vu X3e 99 O Wheel Cover Installation If Required 284 WHAT TO DOIN EMERGENCIES 8998909099 9 9 0900090 lt 0 0 HAZARD WARNING FLASHER The hazard flasher switch is located in the center of the instrument panel below the center air outlets be used when the vehicle is in motion Use it when your vehicle is disabled and it is creating a safety hazard for other motorists When you must leave the vehicle to seek assistance the Hazard Warning Flashers will continue to operate even though the ignition switch is OFF NOTE With extended use the Hazard Warning Flash ers may wear down your battery IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS In any of the following situations you can reduce the potential for overheating by taking the appropriate ac tion e On the highways Slow down e In city traffic While stopped put transmission in neutral but do not increase engine idle speed NOTE There are steps that you can take to slow down an impending overheat condition If your air conditioner is on turn it off The air conditioning system adds heat to the engine cooling system and turning off the A C removes this heat You can also turn the Temperature Hazard
200. er and birth defects or other reproductive harm In addition certain fluids contained in vehicles and certain prod ucts of component wear contain or emit chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL Consult the table of contents to determine which section contains the information you desire The detailed index at the rear of this manual contains a complete listing of all subjects Consult the following table for a description of the symbols that may be used on your vehicle or throughout this owner s manual INTRODUCTION This manual has been prepared with the assistance of service and engineering specialists to acquaint you with the operation and maintenance of your new vehicle It is supplemented by a Warranty Information Booklet and various customer oriented documents You are urged to read these publications carefully Following the instruc tions and recommendations in this manual will help assure safe and enjoyable operation of your vehicle NOTE After you read the manual it should be stored in the vehicle for convenient reference and remain with the vehicle when sold so that the new owner will be aware of all safety warnings When it comes to service remember that your dealer knows your vehicle best has the factory trained techni cians and genuine Mopar parts and is interested in your satisfaction INTRODUCTION 5
201. er use of the power outlet can cause damage The auxiliary outlet is also powered directly from the battery power available at all times Items plugged into this outlet may discharge the battery and or prevent engine starting orte e tnt tee ters erem az E REE 1 8 Auxiliary Power Outlet ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 121 CUP HOLDERS Rear Seat Cup Holders The rear seat cup holders are located in the center armrest between the rear seats The cup holders are positioned forward in the armrest and side by side to provide convenient access to beverage cans or bottles while maintaining a resting place for the rear occupants el Front Seat Cup Holders The cup holders are located in the forward edge of the center console ee eee TE mn kkk 7 el DAY Front Seat Cup Holders Se NANI Rear Seat Cup Holders 122 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 7 6 9 0 999 lt 0 0 0 0 2 00 0 Cargo Management System If Equipped The cargo area has an upper and lower load floor Additional innovative features in the cargo area are the two molded in bins in the quarter trim panels Each bin will hold a gallon of milk and a 2 liter bottle of pop A cargo management system that stores on the lower load floor below the bi l
202. ere your exhaust system can contact any thing that can burn In unusual situations involving grossly malfunctioning engine operation a scorching odor may indicate severe and abnormal catalyst overheating If this should occur safely bring the vehicle to a complete stop shut the engine off and allow the vehicle to cool Thereafter obtain service including a tune up to manufacturer s specifications immediately ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 317 WARNING Battery fluid is a corrosive acid solution and can burn or even blind you Don t allow battery fluid to contact your eyes skin or clothing Don t lean over a battery when attaching clamps If acid splashes in eyes or on skin flush the area imme diately with large amounts of water Battery gas is flammable and explosive Keep flame or sparks away from the battery Don t use a booster battery or any other booster source with an output greater than 12 volts Don t allow cable clamps to touch each other 81342982 Battery Location Battery posts terminals and related accessories contain lead and lead compounds Wash hands after handling The battery in this vehicle has a vent hose that should not be disconnected and should only be replaced with a battery of the same type vented 318 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 9 0 0 0 0900 09 999998999090091 299 CAUTION WARNING e It is essential when replacing the cables on the e Use only re
203. ering ILLUMINATED ENTRY SYSTEM The courtesy lights will turn on when you use the keyless entry transmitter or open the doors or liftgate The lights will fade to off after about 30 seconds or they will immediately fade to off once the ignition switch is turned ON from the LOCK position NOTE e None of the courtesy lights will operate if the dimmer control is in the defeat position extreme downward position unless the overhead map reading lights are turned on manually 18 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 0 999 909 lt lt 9 28888020 8 1 Press and hold the LOCK button on a programmed transmitter for at least 4 seconds but not longer than 10 seconds Then press and hold the UNLOCK button while still holding the LOCK button 2 Release both buttons at the same time 3 Test the feature while outside of the vehicle by pressing the LOCK UNLOCK buttons on the transmitter with the ignition in the LOCK position and the key removed 4 Repeat these steps if you want to return this feature to its previous setting NOTE Pressing the LOCK button on the transmitter while you are inside the vehicle will activate the Security Alarm Opening a door with the Security Alarm activated will cause the alarm to sound Press the UNLOCK button to deactivate the Security Alarm Flash Lights with Remote Key Lock This feature will cause the turn signal lights to flash when the doors are locked or unlocked with the transmi
204. ertain brands of mobile phones do not send the dial ring to the UConnect system to play it on the vehicle audio system so you will not hear it Under this situation after successfully dialing a number the user may feel that the call did not go through even though the call is in progress Once your call is answered you will hear the audio Mute Un mute Mute off When you mute the UConnect system you will still be able to hear the conversation coming from the other party but the other party will not be able to hear you In order to mute the UConnect system e Press the Voice Recognition button ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 83 button and say Select or Delete Also see the next two sections for an alternate way to select or de lete a paired phone Select another Cellular Phone This feature allows you to select and start using another phone with the UConnect system The phone must have been previously paired to the UConnect system that you want to use it with e Press the Phone button to begin e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Setup Select Phone and follow the prompts e You can also press the Voice Recognition button anytime while the list is being played and then choose the phone that you wish to select e The selected phone will be used for the next phone call If the selected phone is not available the UCon nect system will return to
205. es Pager Beeper Phone pairing Pairing Phonebook Phone book Return to main menu Return Main menu Select phone select Set up Phone settings phone set BP 90 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 8999991 0 0917091 000 Power Seat Switch WARNINCG Adjusting a seat while the vehicle is moving is dangerous The sudden movement of the seat could cause you to lose control The seat belt might not be properly adjusted and you could be injured Adjust the seat only while the vehicle is parked WARNING e Adjusting a seat while the vehicle is moving is dangerous The sudden movement of the seat could cause you to lose control The seat belt might not be properly adjusted and you could be injured Adjust the seat only while the vehicle is parked Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the shoulder belt is no longer resting against your chest In a collision you could slide under the seat belt and be seriously or even fatally injured Use the recliner only when the vehicle is parked Power Seats If Equipped The power seat switch is on the outboard side of the seat near the floor Use this switch to move the driver s seat up or down forward or rearward or to tilt the seat The passenger s seat will move up or down forward or rearward E UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 91 CAUTION WARNING Do not place any article under a power seat as it may Do
206. etc be sure that such materials are well packaged and sealed e If a lot of driving is done on gravel roads consider mud or stone shields behind each wheel e Use Mopar touch up paint or equivalent on scratches as soon as possible Your dealer has touch up paint to match the color of your vehicle Wheel and Wheel Trim Care All wheels and wheel trim especially aluminum and chrome plated wheels should be cleaned regularly with a mild soap and water to prevent corrosion To remove heavy soil and or excessive brake dust use Mopar ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 335 Do not use abrasive cleaning components solvents steel wool or other aggressive material to clean the lenses Glass Surfaces All glass surfaces should be cleaned on a regular basis with Mopar Glass Cleaner or any commercial household type glass cleaner Never use an abrasive type cleaner Use caution when cleaning the inside rear win dow equipped with electric defrosters or the right rear quarter window equipped with the radio antenna Do not use scrapers or other sharp instruments which may scratch the elements When cleaning the rear view mirror spray cleaner on the towel or rag that you are using Do not spray cleaner directly on the mirror Cleaning Plastic Instrument Cluster Lenses The lenses in front of the instruments in this vehicle are molded in clear plastic When cleaning the lenses care must be taken to avoid scratching the plastic and Mopar
207. evel cargo floor is optional It includes the following equipment e Waterproof cargo floor liner e Folding cargo management container with net separa tors The bi level cargo floor includes a removable tri fold load bearing upper level Two folds in the panel allow it to be partially or fully folded for storage flexibility Shallow items can be stored underneath the upper load floor The lower load floor is hinged to provide access to the spare tire if equipped battery and rear electrical power distribution center STORAGE Console Features The center console contains a large storage bin The storage bin contains a four slot coin holder designed to hold various size coins and a rubber mat at the bottom of the bin for noise control The bin is large enough to hold a portable AC DC converter to power laptops games or other electrical equipment Two slots at the top right side of the bin provide clearance for power cords to pass conveniently out of the bin with the lid closed This feature is ideal for games laptops cell phones or other electrical equipment The console s front opening lid allows for easy access to the storage bin for the both the driver and the front passenger The inside portion of the arm rest lid contains a penholder a tissue holder and a tire gauge holder In addition to the internal storage the console contains two shift bezel cubby bins with rubber mats for holding small items For vehicles no
208. exhaust fumes to seep into the passenger compartment In addition inspect the exhaust system each time the vehicle is raised for lubrication or oil change Replace as required WARNING Exhaust gases can injure or kill They contain carbon monoxide CO which is colorless and odorless Breathing it can make you unconscious and can eventually poison you To avoid breathing CO refer to Exhaust Gas in the Safety Tips section of this manual Windshield Washers Rear Window Washer The windshield washer and the rear window washer share the same fluid reservoir The fluid reservoir is located in the front of the engine compartment on the passenger side of the vehicle Be sure to check the fluid level in the reservoir at regular intervals Fill the reservoir with windshield washer solvent not radiator antifreeze and operate the system for a few seconds to flush out the residual water The fluid reservoir will hold nearly 1 gallon 4 liters of washer fluid when the message Low Washer Fluid appears in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC if equipped WARNING Commercially available windshield washer solvents are flammable They could ignite and burn you Care must be exercised when filling or working around the washer solution 322 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 7 707 7 2 0 applicable If coolant is dirty or rusty in appearance the system should be drained flus
209. f the sunroof is open 118 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE EBENEN The 12 volt power outlet next to the ash receiver tray if equipped with an optional Smoker s Package has power available only when the ignition is on This outlet will also operate a conventional cigar lighter unit WARNINCG Do not place ashes inside the cubby bin located on the center console on vehicles not equipped with the ash receiver tray A fire leading to bodily injury could result For vehicles equipped with the EVIC the power sunroof switch will remain active for up to 60 minutes after the ignition switch is turned off Opening either front door will cancel this feature The time is programmable For details refer to Delay Power Off to Accessories Until Exit under Personal Settings Customer Program mable Features under Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC in Section 4 of this manual Sunroof Fully Closed Press the switch forward and release to ensure that the sunroof is fully closed ELECTRICAL POWER OUTLETS There are three 12 volt electrical outlets on this vehicle of the outlets are protected by fuses ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 9 The center console outlet is powered directly from the battery power available at all times Items plugged into this outlet may discharge the battery and or prevent engine starting it E E i t re
210. fire or other apparent loss of perfor mance have your vehicle serviced promptly Contin ued operation of your vehicle with a severe malfunction could cause the converter to overheat resulting in possible damage to the converter and the vehicle 316 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 7 008098990990 090 708 9 8 0 8 To minimize the possibility of catalyst damage e Do not shut off the engine or interrupt the ignition when the transmission is in gear and the vehicle is in motion e Do not try to start engine by pushing or towing the vehicle e Do not idle the engine with any spark plug wires disconnected or removed such as when diagnostic testing or for prolonged periods during very rough idling or malfunctioning operating conditions Maintenance Free Battery The top of the MAINTENANCE FREE battery is perma nently sealed You will never have to add water nor is periodic maintenance required NOTE The battery is stored under a hinged access cover in the load floor in the cargo area Remote battery terminals are located in the engine compartment for jump starting NOTE Intentional tampering with emissions control systems can result in civil penalties being assessed against you WARNING A hot exhaust system can start a fire if you park over materials that can burn Such materials might be grass or leaves coming into contact with your ex haust system Do not park or operate your vehicle in areas wh
211. following telephone symbols The EVIC displays this symbol to indicate the signal strength of the UConnect phone The Y number of horizontal bars increases as the Signal strength of the UConnect phone signal in Strength creaSes The EVIC displays this symbol to indicate an ae incoming call Incom ing Call 156 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL See or Menu display on the Navigation Unit When the Menu display is active the SCROLL button can be used to scroll through the list the FUNCTION SELECT button can be used to select an item and the AUDIO MODE button can be used to return to the previous menu When the Map display is active pressing the FUNCTION SELECT but ton will change the Navigation Unit Display to the Menu Turn By Turn Directions The EVIC displays turn by turn directions to a pro grammed destination when Turn by Turn Navigation is enabled through Personal Settings When enabled the EVIC displays the name of the approaching road at the top of the screen followed by an arrow to indicate the direction to turn the vehicle and a count down to indicate the distance to the turn NOTE Refer to your Navigation User s Manual for detailed operating instructions Personal Settings Customer Programmable Features Personal Settings allows the driver to set and recall features when the transmission is in PARK The EVIC displays this symbol to indicate the CO battery strength of the UConnect phon
212. for the best interaction with the front airbag to blink your eyes The bags then quickly deflate while helping to restrain the driver and front passenger The driver s front airbag gas is vented through vent holes in the sides of the airbag The passenger s front airbag gas is vented through vent holes in the sides of the airbag In this way the airbags do not interfere with your control of the vehicle e The Side Impact SRS Side Curtain Airbag are de signed to activate only in certain side collisions When the ACM with side impact option detects a collision requiring the side curtain airbag to inflate it signals the inflators on the crash side of the vehicle A quantity of nontoxic gas is generated to inflate the side curtain airbag The inflating side curtain airbag pushes the outside edge of the headliner out of the way and covers the window The airbag inflates in about 30 milliseconds about one quarter of the time that it takes to blink your eyes with enough force to injure you if you are not belted and seated properly or if items are positioned in the area where the side curtain If A Deployment Occurs The airbag system is designed to deploy when the ACM detects a moderate to severe collision to help restrain the driver and front passenger and then to immediately deflate NOTE A frontal collision that is not severe enough to need airbag protection will not activate the system This does not mean something is wrong with the
213. for the next station in either AM FM or Satellite if equipped mode m UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 9 AM FM Button Radio Mode Press the button to select AM or FM Modes Setting the Tone Balance and Fade Press the rotary TUNE control and BASS will display Turn the TUNE control to the right or left to increase or decrease the Bass tones Press the rotary TUNE control a second time and MID 4 will display Turn the TUNE control to the right or left to increase or decrease the Mid Range tones Press the rotary TUNE control a third time and TREBLE will display Turn the TUNE control to the right or left to increase or decrease the Treble tones Press the rotary TUNE control a fourth time and BAL will display Turn the TUNE control to the right or left to adjust the sound level from the right or left side speakers Press the rotary TUNE control a fifth time and FADE will display Turn the TUNE control to the right or left to adjust the sound level between the front and rear speak ers 3 After the hours are adjusted press the right side Tune Audio control to set the minutes The minutes will begin to blink 4 Adjust the minutes using the right side Tune Audio control 5 To exit press any button knob or wait 5 seconds INFO Button Radio Mode Press the INFO button for an RBDS station one with call letters displayed The radio will return a Radio Text message broadcast if available from an FM station FM
214. fore the first few shifts on a new vehicle may be somewhat abrupt or soft until after the break in period This is a normal condition and pre cision shifts will develop within a few shift cycles It is dangerous to shift the selector lever out of P or N if the engine speed is higher than idle speed If your foot is not firmly on the brake pedal the vehicle could accelerate quickly forward or in re verse You could lose control of the vehicle and hit someone or something Only shift into gear when the engine is idling normally and when your right foot is firmly on the brake pedal WARNING Automatic Transmission General Information The automatic transmission selects individual gears au tomatically dependent upon Altitude Vehicle Loading Driving Style Selector lever position Accelerator position Vehicle speed ee STARTING AND OPERATING 213 Over Temperature Mode The transmission electronics constantly monitor the transmission oil temperature If the transmission exceeds normal operating temperature the transmission will change the way it shifts to help control the condition This may result in a slightly different feeling or response during normal operation in D Drive position After the transmission cools down it will return to normal opera tion Brake Transmission Shift Interlock System This vehicle is equipped with a brake transmission shift interlock system BTSI that holds the selector
215. four wheel wells e Various Tire Pressure Monitoring System Messages which display in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC e Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light Tire Pressure Monitoring Low Pressure Warnings 1 The Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will ref illuminate in the instrument cluster and an audible chime will sound when tire pressure is low in one or more of the four active road tires The audible chime will sound once every ignition cycle for each condition that it detects In addition the Electronic Vehicle Infor mation Center EVIC will display one or more Low Pressure messages Left Front Left Rear Right Front Right Rear for 3 seconds and a graphic showing the pressure values of each tire with the low tire pressure values flashing Should this occur you should stop as soon as possible and inflate the tires with low pressure those flashing in the EVIC graphic to the vehicle s Telltale Light will remain ON and a chime will still sound each ignition key cycle Once you repair or replace the original road tire and reinstall it on the vehicle in place of the compact spare the TPMS will update automatically and the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will turn OFF as long no tire pressure is below the low pressure warning limit in any of the four active road tires The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 10 minutes above 15 mph 25 km h in order for the TPMS to receive this information
216. frigerants and compressor lubricants approved by the manufacturer for your air condi tioning system Some unapproved refrigerants are flammable and can explode injuring you Other unapproved refrigerants or lubricants can cause the system to fail requiring costly repairs Refer to Section 3 of the Warranty Information book for further warranty information e The air conditioning system contains refrigerant under high pressure To avoid risk of personal injury or damage to the system adding refrigerant or any repair requiring lines to be disconnected should be done by an experienced technician battery that the positive cable is attached to the positive post and the negative cable is attached to the negative post Battery posts are marked posi tive and negative and identified on the battery case Cable clamps should be tight on the terminal posts and free of corrosion If a fast charger is used while battery is in vehicle disconnect both vehicle battery cables before connecting the charger to battery Do not use a fast charger to provide starting voltage Air Conditioner Maintenance For best possible performance your air conditioner should be checked and serviced by an Authorized Dealer at the start of each warm season This service should include cleaning of the condenser fins and a performance test Drive belt tension should also be checked at this time ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 319 Refer t
217. fter disarming the system you must use one of the previously described arming se quences if you wish to rearm the system after closing the liftgate NOTE e The driver s door key cylinder cannot arm or disarm the system e Once the alarm is set you have a 30 second one time access into the liftgate area If the liftgate is not opened within 30 seconds the liftgate will automatically re lock within 10 seconds A THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 17 REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY This system allows you to lock or unlock the doors or activate the panic alarm from distances up to about 23 feet 7 meters using a hand held radio transmitter The transmitter need not be pointed at the vehicle to activate the system NOTE Inserting the key into the ignition switch dis ables all buttons on that transmitter however the but tons on the remaining transmitters will continue to work Shifting the vehicle out of PARK disables all transmitter buttons for all keys Tell 3 ee Ne NEN enn nE 2M A a a ha hh 2 1 EL tan 8134508 Keyless Entry Transmitter Tamper Alert If something has triggered the system in your absence the horn will sound three times when you disarm the system Check the vehicle for tamp
218. fting and heat build up This action will also provide better engine braking The automatic transmission fluid and filter should be changed if you REGULARLY tow a trailer for more than 45 minutes of continuous operation See Schedule B in section 8 of this manual for transmission fluid change intervals NOTE Check the automatic transmission fluid level before towing 280 STARTING AND OPERATING RUNNING BATTERY LAMPS BACKUP LAMPS LH STOP OQ RH TURN STOP TURN ELECTRIC BRAKES 612634c6 GROUND 7 Pin Connector ee STARTING AND OPERATING 281 high RPM Return to a higher gear range or vehicle speed when road conditions and RPM level allows Towing Tips Cooling System To reduce potential for engine and transmission over heating take the following actions City Driving When stopped for short periods of time put transmission in neutral and increase engine idle speed Highway Driving Reduce speed Air Conditioning Turn off temporarily Refer to Cooling System under Maintenance Pro cedures in Section 7 of this manual for more informa tion Towing Tips Electronic Speed Control If Equipped Don t use in hilly terrain or with heavy loads When using the speed control if you experience speed drops greater than 10 mph 16 km h disengage until you can get back to cruising speed Use speed control in flat terrain and with light loads to
219. gh level heating Press the switch a second time to select low level heating Press the switch a third time to shut off the heating elements 94 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 738 4 9 gt 00 7 5 7500 0 8 Folding Rear Seat WARNING Be certain that the seatback is securely locked into position If the seatback in not securely locked into position the seat will not provide the proper stability for child seats and or passengers An improperly latched seat could cause serious in jury The cargo area in the rear of the vehicle with the rear seatbacks in the locked up or folded down position should not be used as a play area by children when the vehicle is in motion They could be seriously injured in an accident Chil dren should be seated and using the proper re The rear seatbacks can be folded forward to provide an straint system additional storage area Pull on the loops shown in the illustration to fold down either or both seatbacks These loops can be tucked away when not in use Folding Rear Seats When the seatback is folded to the upright position make sure it is latched by strongly pulling on the top of the seatback above the seat strap N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 95 EE Ene xx 81371845 Hood Safety Catch Use the hood prop rod if equipped to secure the hood
220. gine parts and the brake fluid catching fire Use of a brake fluid that has a lower initial boiling point than the recommended MOPAR DOT 3 product or a brake fluid that is unidentified as to FMVSS specification may result in sudden brake failure during hard prolonged braking You could have an accident Use only brake fluid that has been in a tightly closed container to avoid contamination from foreign matter or moisture WARNING Worn brake hoses can burst and cause brake failure You could have an accident If you see any signs of cracking scuffing or worn spots have the brake hoses replaced immediately Master Cylinder Brake Fluid Level Check Check the fluid level in the master cylinder immediately if the brake system warning light indicates system fail ure Check the fluid level in the master cylinder when per forming underhood services Clean the top of the master cylinder area before removing the cap Add fluid to bring the level up to the top of the FULL mark on the side of the master cylinder reservoir Overfilling of fluid is not recommended because it may cause leaking in the system Add enough fluid to bring the level up to the require ments described on the brake fluid reservoir With disc 330 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 7 0 2 2 CAUTION Do not allow petroleum base fluid to contaminate CAUTION e Using a transmission fluid other than the manu factu
221. glove box light To restore interior light operation either turn the ignition switch ON or cycle the light switch Dimmer Control d i The dimmer control is part of the headlight switch and is located on the left side of the instrument panel With e the parking lights or headlights on pe rotating the dimmer control upward will increase the brightness of the in strument panel lights Dome Light Position Rotate the dimmer control completely upward to the second detent to turn on the interior lights The interior lights will remain on when the dimmer control is in this position Overhead Console Map Reading Lights These lights are mounted between the sun visors on the overhead console Each light is turned ON by pressing the lens Press the lens a second time to turn OFF the light These lights also turn on when a door is opened or when the unlock button on the remote keyless entry transmitter is pressed or when the dimmer control is turned fully upward past the second detent E cx IM zx M E t E 8125e174 Overhead Console eee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 101 2 Windshield Wiper Washer Control Rotate the end of the multi function lever to the first detent past the intermittent settings for Low speed wiper operation or to the second detent past the intermittent settings for High speed wiper operation Interior light Defeat OFF Rotate the dimmer control to the extreme bottom OFF position
222. gt 3 EP ixi CL iin i CL iin ixi 55 LB II HET UU hired pe e as e I p KN Hier Ex E ee H Hs eae 4 lage ne nad tal INI I zi cre II Il II zt 18 0 cover mirror cover upwar i IM as IN zs INI E 5 II E aa 3 II B zs HE IN 25 ii NEM Il HE HE EET n EEE EE Bp bnew PM IEI THERE CLO TIME FEM 7 E ML E IRNNIRIRMI Sane ete i E REGRESSED E as teem cena Nee 27 ere HE Poca fan ae 6 ELE IM HE ror ill HERE I i fires 2 i INL 8 INIM tita tad RR ee ee ee ee e in Eee NE eee Ei IIIA im h un i E kk Toa SS wee nn Iu moam at ot LR n m luu 18 9 8 8 a a CRT IN 1 LEX 22 0 I aC LEM x AM x wae Power Mirror Control wee Seco cee eee EE TS SEE n EEE 2 e E m CEE EE
223. he Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC if equipped and a continuous chime will sound if the vehicle is driven more than 1 mile 1 6 km with either turn signal on Highbeam Lowbeam Select Switch Push the Multi Function Lever away from you to switch the headlights to HIGH beam Pull the Lever towards you to switch the headlights back to LOW beam Flash to Pass You can signal another vehicle with your headlights by lightly pulling the Multi Function Lever toward you This will cause the headlights to turn on at high beam and remain on until the lever is released Multi Function Lever The multi function lever controls the operation of the turn signals headlight beam selection and passing lights The lever is located on the left side of the steering column 818627 Multi Function Lever Turn Signals Move the Multi Function Lever up or down and the corresponding turn signal indicator in the instrument cluster flashes to show proper operation of the front and rear turn signal lights You can also signal a lane change 100 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 0 10 lt 0 909990 00 77770 Interior Lights The interior lights come on when a door is opened To protect the battery the interior lights will turn off automatically 10 minutes after the ignition switch is moved to the LOCK position This will occur if the interior lights were switched on manually or are on because a door is open This includes the
224. he following precautions 1 Handle the disc by its edge avoid touching the surface 2 If the disc is stained clean the surface with a soft cloth wiping from center to edge 3 Do not apply paper paper CD labels or tape to the disc avoid scratching the disc 4 Do not use solvents such as benzine thinner cleaners or antistatic sprays 5 Store the disc in its case after playing 6 Do not expose the disc to direct sunlight 7 Do not store the disc where temperatures may become too high 5 Aloose tape should be corrected before use To rewind a loose tape insert the eraser end of a pencil into the tape drive gear and twist the pencil in the required directions Maintain your cassette tape player The head and capstan shaft in the cassette player can pick up dirt or tape deposits each time a cassette is played The result of deposits on the capstan shaft may cause the tape to wrap around and become lodged in the tape transport The other adverse condition is low or muddy sound from one or both channels as if the treble tone control were turned all the way down To prevent this you should periodically clean the head with a commercially available WET cleaning cassette As preventive maintenance clean the head about every 30 hours of use If you wait until the head becomes very dirty noticeably poor sound it may not be possible to remove all deposits with a simple WET cleaning cassette ee UNDERSTANDING YO
225. he anchor age being careful to route the tether strap to provide the most direct path between the anchor and the child restraint Finally tighten all three straps as you push the child restraint rearward and downward into the seat removing slack in the straps according to the child restraint manufacturer s instructions NOTE e Ensure that the tether strap does not slip into the opening between the seat backs as you remove slack in the strap e When using the LATCH attaching system to install a child restraint please ensure that all seat belts not being used for occupant restraints are stowed and out of reach of children It is recommended that before installing the child restraint buckle the seat belt so the seat belt is tucked behind the child restraint and out of reach If the buckled seat belt interferes with the child restraint installation instead of tucking the seat belt behind the child restraint route the seat belt through the child restraint belt path and then buckle it This ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 57 In the rear seat you may have trouble tightening the lap shoulder belt on the child restraint because the buckle or latch plate is too close to the belt path opening on the restraint Disconnect the latch plate from the buckle and twist the short buckle end belt several times to shorten it Insert the latch plate into the buckle with the release button facing out If the belt still can t be t
226. he facilities factory trained technicians special tools and the latest information to assure your vehicle is fixed correctly and in a timely manner This is why you should always talk to your dealer s service manager first Most matters can be resolved with this process SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE FOR YOUR VEHICLE Prepare For The Appointment If you re having warranty work done be sure to have the right papers with you Take your warranty folder All work to be performed may not be covered by the warranty discuss additional charges with the service manager Keep a maintenance log of your vehicle s service history This can often provide a clue to the current problem Prepare A List Make a written list of your vehicle s problems or the specific work you want done If you ve had an accident or work done that is not on your maintenance log let the service advisor know Be Reasonable With Requests If you list a number of items and you must have your vehicle by the end of the day discuss the situation with the service advisor and list the items in order of priority At many dealers you may obtain a rental vehicle at a ee IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 375 DaimlerChrysler Canada Inc Customer Center P O Box 1621 Windsor Ontario N9A 4H6 Phone 800 465 2001 In Mexico contact Av Prolongacion Paseo de la Reforma 1240 Sante Fe C P 05109 Mexico D F In Mexico 915 729 1248 or 729 1240 Outside Mexico
227. he hose should be replaced immediately Eventual deterioration of the hose can take place resulting in a possibility of a burst failure WARNING Riding the brakes can lead to brake failure and possibly an accident Driving with your foot resting or riding on the brake pedal can result in abnormally high brake temperatures excessive lining wear and possible brake damage You wouldn t have your full braking capacity in an emergency Brake and Power Steering Hoses When the vehicle is serviced for scheduled maintenance inspect surface of hoses and nylon tubing for evidence of heat and mechanical damage Hard and brittle rubber cracking tears cuts abrasion and excessive swelling indicate deterioration of the rubber Particular attention should be made to examining those hose surfaces nearest to high heat sources such as the exhaust manifold Insure nylon tubing in these areas has not melted or collapsed Inspect all hose connections such as clamps and cou plings to make sure they are secure and no leaks are present ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 9 brakes fluid level can be expected to fall as the brake pads wear However low fluid level may be caused by a leak and a checkup may be needed Use only manufacturer s recommended brake fluid Re fer to Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts for the correct fluid type WARNING Overfilling the brake fluid reservoir can result in spilling brake fluid on hot en
228. hed and refilled with fresh coolant Check the front of the A C condenser for any accumulation of bugs leaves etc If dirty clean by gently spraying water from a garden hose vertically down the face of the condenser Check the coolant recovery bottle tubing for brittle rub ber cracking tears cuts and tightness of the connection at the bottle and radiator Inspect the entire system for leaks With the engine at normal operating temperature but not running check the cooling system pressure cap for proper vacuum sealing by draining a small amount of coolant from the radiator drain cock If the cap is sealing properly the engine coolant antifreeze will begin to drain from the coolant recovery bottle DO NOT RE MOVE THE COOLANT PRESSURE CAP WHEN THE COOLING SYSTEM HOT Cooling System WARNING e When working near the radiator cooling fan dis connect the fan motor lead or turn the ignition switch to the OFF position The fan is temperature controlled and can start at any time the ignition switch is in the ON position You or others can be badly burned by hot coolant or steam from your radiator If you see or hear steam coming from under the hood don t open the hood until the radiator has had time to cool Never try to open a cooling system pressure cap when the radiator is hot Coolant Checks Check engine coolant antifreeze protection every 12 months before the onset of freezing weather where ee MAINTA
229. hicle speeds and during parking maneuvers NOTE Increased noise levels at the end of the steering wheel travel are considered normal and do not indicate that there is a problem with the power steering system Upon initial start up in cold weather the power steering pump may make noise for a short amount of time This is due to the cold thick fluid in the steering system This noise should be considered normal and does not in any way damage the steering system 230 STARTING AND 0 1 0 7 0 8 TRACTION CONTROL SYSTEM TCS IF EQUIPPED WARNING The Traction Control System TCS cannot prevent the natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle nor can it increase the traction afforded The TCS cannot prevent accidents including those re sulting from excessive speed in turns or hydroplan ing Only a safe attentive and skillful driver can prevent accidents The capabilities of a TCS equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reck less or dangerous manner which could jeopardize the user s safety or the safety of others Light located in the instrument cluster starts to flash as soon as the tires lose traction and the wheels begin to spin This indicates that the TCS is active If the indicator light begins to flash during e The Traction Control System TCS Indicator MULTI DISPLACEMENT SYSTEM MDS 5 7L Engine Only This feature offers improved fuel economy by shutting off four of th
230. i Safety Tips nnne 29 3Lap Shoulder Belts 33 H Iransporting Passengers 59 3 Lap Shoulder Belt Untwisting Procedure 38 O Lock Your Vehicle avisa dae eee gas 60 O Seat Belt Pretensioners 38 O Exhaust Gas eene 60 O Enhanced Seat Belt Reminder System D Safety Checks You Should Make Inside BeltAlert cesses 39 1116 701106 gk EEG 61 U Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make MEM ee Eee an Outside The Vehicle 61 O Seat Belts And Pregnant Women 40 O Seat Belt Extender lens 41 ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 1 A WORD ABOUT YOUR KEYS Ignition Key Removal You can insert the double sided keys into the locks with The shift lever must be in PARK Turn the key to the either side up LOCK position and then remove the key s 81346bdc Vehicle Key Ignition Key Positions The dealer that sold you your new vehicle has the key NOTE code numbers for your vehicle locks These numbers can e For vehicles not equipped with the Electronic Vehicle be used to order duplicate keys from your dealer Ask Information Center EVIC the power window your dealer for these numbers and keep them in a safe switches radio power sunroof if equipped and place power outlets will remain active for 10 minutes after the ignition switch is turned off Opening either front door will cancel this feature
231. id visibility irritation move to fresh air If the irritation continues see your doctor If these particles settle on your clothing follow the garment manufacturer s instruc tions for cleaning NOTE The interior lights can only be deactivated if the key is removed from the ignition switch or the vehicle is driven e t is not advisable to drive your vehicle after the airbags have been deployed If you are involved in another collision the airbags will not be in place to protect you ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 49 Maintaining Your Airbag System Airbag Warning Light You will want to have the airbags ready to er inflate for your protection in an impact While the airbag system is designed to be mainte e Modifications to any part of the airbag system nance free if any of the following occurs have could cause it to fail when you need it You could an authorized dealer service the system promptly be injured because the airbags are not there to protect you Do not modify the components or wiring including adding any kind of badges or stickers to the steering wheel hub trim cover or the upper passenger side of the instrument panel e The light remains on or flickers after the 6 to 8 second Do not modify the front bumper vehicle body interval structure or frame e The Airbag Warning Light does not come on or flickers during the 6 to 8 seconds when the ignition switch is first turned on e The light flickers
232. ightened or if by pulling and pushing on the restraint loosens the belt you may need to do something more Disconnect the latch plate from the buckle turn the buckle around and insert the latch plate into the buckle again If you still can t make the child restraint secure try a different seating position keep the belt tight however any seat belt system will loosen with time so check the belt occasionally and pull it tight if necessary Seat belts with an automatic locking retractor have a distinctive label on the seat belt webbing The seat belt must be in the automatic locking mode in order to enable a child restraint to be tightly installed Refer to Auto matic Locking Mode in this section for details A locking clip should not be necessary once the automatic locking feature is enabled Position the shoulder and lap belt on the child restraint The automatic locking retractor is activated by first attaching the child seat then pulling all of the webbing out of the retractor then allowing back in Tighten webbing To release simply unbuckle the seat belt by depressing the button allowing the webbing to retract into the retractor 58 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 0 000 90901949 09 NOTE Ensure that the tether strap does not slip into the opening between the seat backs as you remove slack in the strap WARNINCG An incorrectly anchored tether strap could lead to increased head motion and possible inju
233. il filter Inspect the air cleaner filter and replace if required Replace the air cleaner filter Inspect the front and rear brake linings and rotors and tensioner Replace if required if not done at 102 000 miles Check and replace if necessary the PCV valve Replace the air conditioning filter Rotate the tires X Change the Transfer Case Fluid All Wheel Drive AWD only M A N T E N A N C E 5 C H E 0 U L E S 8 SCHEDULE A 9 Miles 78 000 84 000 90 000 96 000 102 000 Kilometers 130 000 140 000 150 000 160 000 170 000 Months 78 84 90 96 102 Change engine oil and engine oil filter AX AX X AX Inspect the air cleaner filter and replace if re quired Replace the air cleaner filter Inspect the front and rear brake linings and rotors Check and Inspect the accessory drive belt and ten sioner Replace if required Replace the spark plugs 2 7L 3 5L Engines Replace the spark plugs 5 7L Engine Check and replace if necessary the PCV valve CO MOmrecomrzronown Replace the engine timing belt 3 5L Engine Change the Transfer Case Fluid All Wheel Drive AWD only Flush and replace the engine coolant at 102 000 miles if not done at 60 months Replace the air conditioning filter Rotate the tires 4 NENNEN So NENNEN NENNEN 370 SCHEDULE A Miles 108 000 114 000 120 000 126
234. ildren that are not big enough to wear the vehicle seat belt properly refer to information on Child Restraint in this section should be secured in the rear seat in child restraints or belt positioning booster seats 4 Older children who do not use child restraints or belt positioning booster seats should ride properly buck led up in the rear seat Never allow children to slide the shoulder belt behind them or under their arm 5 If a child from 1 to 12 years old must ride in the front passenger seat because the vehicle is crowded move the seat as far back as possible and use the proper child restraint refer to information on Child Restraint in this section ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 45 WARNING Air Bag System Components e Relying on the airbags alone could lead to more The airbag system consists of the following severe injuries in a collision The airbags work e Airbag Control Module ACM with your seat belt to restrain you properly In some collisions the airbags won t deploy at all e Side Remote Acceleration Sensors if equipped Always wear your seat belts even though you have airbags e Airbag Warning Light Being too close to the steering wheel or instru e Driver Airbag ment panel during airbag deployment could cause e Front Passenger Airbag serious injury Airbags need room to inflate Sit back comfortably extending your arms to reach the steering wheel or instrument panel e Supplemental
235. imlerChrysler Material Standard MS 6395 Overfilling or underfilling will cause oil aeration or loss of oil pressure This could damage your engine Change Engine Oil Road conditions and your kind of driving affect the interval at which your oil should be changed Check the following list to see if any apply to you e Day or night temperatures are below 32 F 0 C e Stop and Go driving e Extensive engine idling e Driving in dusty conditions e Short trips of less than 10 miles 16 km e More than 50 of your driving is at sustained high speeds during hot weather above 90 F 32 C e Trailer towing e Taxi Police or delivery service commercial service 312 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 0 02 70 0 operation of the Multiple Displacement System MDS Refer to Multi Displacement System under Starting and Operating for details In areas where these grades are not generally available higher SAE grades may be used Lubricants that have both an SAE grade number and the API Certification Symbol or ACEA category shown on the container should be used Lubricants that do not have both the engine oil certifica tion mark and the correct SAE viscosity grade number should not be used Engine Oil Viscosity SAE Grade 3 5L Engine SAE 10W 30 engine oil is preferred for use in 3 5L Engines within the operating temperatures shown in the engine oil viscosity chart SAE 5W 30 Engine Oil is allowed for use in
236. imply move the selector lever to the Right or Left D D while in the D Drive position The transmission will remain in the current gear until an upshift or downshift is chosen ALL WHEEL DRIVE IF EQUIPPED This feature provides full time All Wheel Drive AWD with Anti lock Brake System ABS Traction Control The front wheels provide 38 of the torque and the rear wheels provide 62 of the torque The system is auto matic with no driver inputs or additional driving skills required times Follow the reset procedure described under Tem porary Transmission Limp Home Mode in this section In Permanent Limp Home Mode P Park R Reverse and N Neutral will continue to operate Second gear will operate in the D Drive shifter position The mal function indicator light may illuminate AUTOSTICK IF EQUIPPED Autostick is a driver interactive transmission that offers manual gear shifting to provide you with more control of the vehicle Autostick allows you to maximize engine braking eliminate undesirable upshifts and downshifts and improve overall vehicle performance This system can also provide you with more control during passing city driving cold slippery conditions mountain driving trailer towing and many other situations Autostick Operation By placing the selector lever in the D Drive position it can be moved from side to side This allows the driver to select a higher or lower range of gears
237. in civil penalties being assessed against you Carbon Monoxide Warnings WARNING Carbon monoxide CO in exhaust gases is deadly Follow the precautions below to prevent carbon monoxide poisoning ee STARTING AND OPERATING 265 NOTE When removing the fuel filler cap lay the cap tether in the hook located on the fuel filler cap door reinforcement Gas Cap Tether Hook ADDING FUEL Fuel Filler Cap Gas Cap The gas cap is located behind the fuel filler door on the left side of the vehicle Push in on the left side near the edge of the fuel filler door to access the fuel filler cap If the gas cap is lost or damaged be sure the replacement cap is for use with this vehicle Se UE SHE TTT Tani hhk aa PIA 6 1756 Fuel Filler Door 266 STARTING AND OPERATING 1 1 7 _ 7 9 6 77 000 0 CAUTION e Damage to the fuel system or emission control WARNING e Never have any smoking materials lit in or near the vehicle when the gas cap is removed or the tank filled Never add fuel to the vehicle when the engine is running A fire may result if gasoline is pumped into a portable container that is inside of a vehicle You could be burned Alwa
238. in the D direction and the transmission will shift from the current gear directly to the next lowest gear for best acceleration NOTE To avoid overrevving the engine when the selector lever is moved in D direction the transmis sion will not shift to a lower gear if the engine s revolu tions per minute RPM limit would be exceeded Briefly press the selector lever in the D direction and the transmission will shift from the current gear to the next higher gear Press and hold the selector lever in the D direction and the transmission will shift from the current gear directly to gear D WARNING On slippery road surfaces never downshift in order to obtain braking action This could result in drive wheel slip and reduced vehicle control Your vehicle s ABS will not prevent this type of loss of control You could lose control of your vehicle and have an accident D Drive This range should be used for most city and highway driving It provides the smoothest upshifts and down shifts and best fuel economy The transmission automatically upshifts through fifth gear The D Drive position provides optimum driving characteristics under all normal operating conditions When frequent transmission shifting occurs when using the Overdrive range such as when operating the vehicle under heavy loading conditions in hilly terrain travel ing into strong head winds or while towing heavy tr
239. in the instrument panel and through the outlets lo cated on the floor Air flows through the registers in the back of the center console to the rear seat passengers These registers can be closed to par tially block airflow 192 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Temperature Control The rotary knob in the center controls air temperature Rotate the control to the left for cooler air temperature and to the right for warmer air tempera ture Rotating the control to the ex aagi treme left provides the coldest setting Rotating the control to the extreme right provides the warmest setting Mode Control Dhe rotary knob on the right controls airflow distribution Dots between each of the mode selections identify intermediate modes that allow the op J erator to fine tune airflow distribu tion The mode settings are as follows e Defrost QU Air is directed to the windshield through the outlets at the base of the windshield Air is also directed to the front door windows through the side window demister grilles E UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 193 a second time to turn off the air conditioning An LED in the button will illuminate when compressor operation is selected Automatic Temperature Control If Equipped 811350203 Automatic Temperature Controls Automatic Operation The Infrared Dual Zone Climate Control System auto matically maintains the climate in the cabin
240. indicate a higher tempera ture when driving in hot weather up mountain grades or when towing a trailer It should not be allowed to exceed the upper limits of the normal operating range CAUTION Driving with a hot engine cooling system could damage your vehicle If temperature gauge reads H pull over and stop the vehicle Idle the vehicle with the air conditioner turned off until the pointer drops back into the normal range If the pointer remains on the H and you hear a chime turn the engine off immediately and call for service 7 Electronic Throttle Control ETC Light This light will turn on briefly as a bulb check A when the ignition switch is turned ON This light will also turn on while the engine is running if there is a problem with the Elec tronic Throttle Control system If the light comes on while the engine is running safely bring the vehicle to a complete stop as soon as possible place the gear selector in park and cycle the ignition key The light should turn off If the light remains lit with the engine running your vehicle will usually be drivable However see your dealer for service as soon as possible If the light is flashing when the engine is running immediate service is required In this case you may experience reduced performance an elevated rough idle or engine stall and your vehicle may require towing Also have the system checked by an authorized dealer if the light doe
241. ine Either of these conditions will result in the engine being shut off after two 2 seconds If the Vehicle Security Alarm Indicator Light turns on during normal vehicle operation vehicle running for longer than 10 seconds it indicates that there is a fault in the electronics Should this occur have the vehicle ser viced as soon as possible NOTE e The Sentry Key Immobilizer System is not compatible with remote starting systems Use of these systems may result in vehicle starting problems and loss of security protection e Exxon Mobil Speed Pass additional Sentry Keys or any other transponder equipped components on the same key chain will not cause a key related tran sponder fault unless the additional part is physi cally held against the ignition key being used when starting the vehicle Cell phones pagers or other RF electronics will not cause interference with this system SENTRY KEY The Sentry Key Immobilizer System prevents unautho rized vehicle operation by disabling the engine The system does not need to be armed or activated Operation is automatic regardless of whether the vehicle is locked or unlocked The system uses ignition keys which have an embedded electronic chip transponder to prevent unauthorized vehicle operation Therefore only keys that are pro grammed to the vehicle can be used to start and operate the vehicle The system will shut the engine off in two 2 seconds if someone uses
242. ine com partment Connect the other end of the same cable to the positive terminal of the booster battery Refer to the following illustration for jump starting connections 6 Connect the other cable first to the negative terminal of the booster battery and then to the engine ground of the vehicle with the discharged battery Make sure you have a good contact on the engine ground Refer to the following illustration for jump starting connections 296 WHAT TO DOIN EMERGENCIES 888 0 WARNING 8 When removing the jumper cables reverse the above sequence exactly Be careful of the moving belts and fan e You should not try to start your vehicle by push WARNING ing or towing Do not connect the cable to the negative post of Any procedure other than above could result in the discharge battery The resulting electrical spark could cause the battery to explode 1 Personal injury caused by electrolyte squirting out the battery vent During cold weather when temperatures are be low freezing point electrolyte in a discharged battery may freeze Do not attempt jump starting because the battery could rupture or explode The battery temperature must be brought up above freezing point before attempting jump start 2 Personal injury or property damage due to battery explosion 3 Damage to charging system of booster vehicle or of immobilized vehicle 7 Start the engine in the vehicle that has the booster
243. ion The manufacturer advocates driving at safe speeds within posted speed limits Where speed limits or condi tions are such that the vehicle can be driven at high speeds maintaining correct tire inflation pressure is very important Increased tire pressure and reduced vehicle loading may be required for high speed vehicle opera tion Refer to original equipment or an authorized tire dealer for recommended safe operating speeds loading and cold tire inflation pressures CAUTION After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure al ways reinstall the valve stem cap if equipped This will prevent moisture and dirt from entering the valve stem which could damage the valve stem Inflation pressures specified on the placard are always cold tire inflation pressure Cold tire inflation pressure is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not been driven for at least 3 hours or driven less than 1 mile 1 km after a 3 hour period The cold tire inflation pressure must not exceed the maximum inflation pres sure molded into the tire sidewall Check tire pressures more often if subject to a wide range of outdoor temperatures as tire pressures vary with temperature changes Tire pressures change by approximately 1 psi 7 kPa per 12 F 7 C of air temperature change Keep this in mind when checking tire pressure inside a garage especially in the winter ee STARTING AND OPERATING 247 WARNING High speed drivi
244. ion of the hydraulic system in the event of a failure Failure of either half of the dual brake system is indicated by the Brake Warning Light which will turn on when the brake fluid level in the master cylinder drops below a specified level The light will remain on until the cause is corrected 18 Front Fog Light Indicator If Equipped 4 This light will turn on when the front fog lights are ON See page 98 for more information 19 Electronic Vehicle Information Center Display If Equipped This display shows the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC messages when the appropriate conditions exist See page 148 for more information only on vehicles equipped with steering wheel mounted switches NOTE On non EVIC equipped vehicles the odometer is located here Loose Fuel Filler Cap If the vehicle diagnostic system determines that the fuel filler cap is loose improperly installed or damaged a Check Gascap message will display in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC if equipped Tighten the fuel filler cap properly and press the odom eter reset button to turn off the message If the problem continues the message will appear the next time the vehicle is started eee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 145 the ON position The light should turn on for approxi mately two seconds and then turn off The light will remain on if the parking brake is applied or if a brake fault is detected
245. ipped equipped Blue Front Control Module 37 m 15 Amp Transmission NAGI a od Blue eee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 343 Cavities 11 12 and 13 contain self resetting fuses circuit breakers that are only serviceable by an autho rized dealer The Cluster is fused by the 25 amp circuit e When installing the Power Distribution Center breaker in Cavity 11 The Passenger Seat Switch is fused cover it is important to ensure the cover is prop by the 25 amp circuit breaker in Cavity 12 The Door erly positioned and fully latched Failure to do so Modules except base the Driver Door Lock Switch may allow water to get into the Power Distribu base the Driver Express Power Window Switch if tion Center and possibly result in a electrical equipped and the Passenger Door Lock Switch base system failure are fused by the 25 amp circuit breaker in Cavity 13 If you experience temporary or permanent loss of these systems see your authorized dealer for service e When replacing a blown fuse it is important to use only a fuse having the correct amperage rating The use of a fuse with a rating other than indicated may result in a dangerous electrical system overload If a properly rated fuse contin ues to blow it indicates a problem in the circuit that must be corrected 344 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 9999 9 99990 99 0 7 7 REPLACEMENT LIGHT BULBS LIGHT BULBS Interior Bulb Number Rea
246. l Cleaner 05066247AB or equivalent or select a nonabrasive non acidic cleaner Do not use scouring pads steel wool a bristle brush or metal polishes Only Mopar or equivalent is recommended Do not use oven cleaner Avoid automatic car washes that use acidic solutions or harsh brushes that may damage the wheels protective finish Interior Care Use Mopar Fabric Cleaner or equivalent to clean fabric upholstery and Mopar Carpet Cleaner for carpeting Interior Trim should be cleaned starting with a damp cloth or Mopar Satin Select Do not use harsh cleaners or Armorall Use Mopar Total Clean to clean vinyl upholstery Mopar Total Clean is specifically recommended for leather upholstery Your leather upholstery can be best preserved by regular cleaning with a damp soft cloth Small particles of dirt can act as an abrasive and damage the leather upholstery and should be removed promptly with a damp cloth Stubborn soils can be removed easily with a soft cloth e f you detect any stone chips or scratches in the paint touch them up immediately The cost of such repairs is considered the responsibility of the owner e f your vehicle is damaged due to an accident or similar cause which destroys the paint and protective coating have your vehicle repaired as soon as pos sible The cost of such repairs is considered the respon sibility of the owner e f you carry special cargo such as chemicals fertilizers de icer salt
247. l is still on the ground E b E D E x E 5 E bj E x E x E x E Ey E x E x E bj 3 8133d134 Center Cap Removal WARNING ek To avoid possible personal injury handle the wheel covers with care to avoid contact with the metal 5 Place the jack underneath the lift area that is closest to edges and retention teeth the flat tire Turn the jack screw clockwise to firmly engage the jack saddle with the lift area of the sill flange WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 1 ee afin tN JACK SADDLE epee SUPPORT MUST BE POSITIONED ud DIRECTLY UNDER P THE FLANGE OF THE SILL eel eee IS BlZdab amp sb ack Engagement Locations 292 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 1 1 1 7 0 0 0 12 Store the flat tire jack and tools WARNING A loose tire or jack thrown forward in a collision or hard stop could endanger the occupants of the ve hicle Always stow the jack parts and the spare tire in the places provided Compact Spare Tire The compact spare tire is
248. lated 2 Economy Improper inflation pressures can cause uneven wear patterns to develop across the tire tread These abnormal wear patterns will reduce tread life resulting in a need for earlier tire replacement Under inflation also increases tire rolling resistance and results in higher fuel consump tion 3 Ride Comfort and Vehicle Stability Proper tire inflation contributes to a comfortable ride Over inflation produces a jarring and uncomfortable ride Tire Inflation Pressures The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed either on the face of the driver s door or on the driver s side B pillar Some vehicles may have Supplemental Tire Pressure Information for vehicle loads that are less than the maximum loaded vehicle condition These pressure con ditions will be found in the Supplemental Tire Pressure Information section of this manual 0 38906822 880 0 0 0 70 5 65 11 STARTING AND OPERATING 246 Example If garage temperature 68 F 20 C and the outside temperature 32 F 0 C then the cold tire inflation pressure should be increased by 3 psi 21 kPa which equals 1 psi 7 KPa for every 12 F 7 C for this outside temperature condition Tire pressure may increase from 2 to 6 psi 13 to 40 kPa during operation DO NOT reduce this normal pressure build up or your tire pressure will be too low Tire Pressures for High Speed Operat
249. lection Holding the button and will bypass stations without stopping until you release it SCAN Button Radio Mode Pressing the SCAN button causes the tuner to search for the next station in either AM FM or Satellite if equipped frequencies pausing for 5 seconds satellite scan 8 seconds at each listenable station before continu ing to the next To stop the search press SCAN a second time Time Button Press the time button and the time of day will display for 5 seconds Clock Setting Procedure 1 Press and hold the time button until the hours blink 2 Adjust the hours by turning the right side Tune Audio control Operating Instructions Radio Mode NOTE The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC position to operate the radio Power Switch Volume Control Rotary Press the ON VOL control to turn the radio ON Press the ON VOL a second time to turn OFF the radio Electronic Volume Control The electronic volume control turns continuously 360 degrees in either direction without stopping Turning the volume control to the right increases the volume and to the left decreases it When the audio system is turned on the sound will be set at the same volume level as last played Mode Button Radio Mode Press the mode button repeatedly to select between the CD player Cassette Satellite or Vehicle Entertainment System VES if equipped SEEK Button Radio Mode Press and release the SEEK button to search
250. les equipped with Electronic Stability Program ESP The BAS is designed to optimize the vehicle s braking capa bility during emergency braking maneuvers The system applies optimum pressure to the brakes in emergency braking conditions than might otherwise be afforded solely by the driver s braking style This can help reduce braking distances The BAS complements the Anti Lock Brake System ABS Applying the brakes very quickly results in the best BAS assistance To receive the benefit of the system you must apply continuous braking power during the stopping sequence Do not reduce brake pedal pressure Once the brake pedal is released the BAS is deactivated BRAKE ASSIST SYSTEM BAS IF EQUIPPED WARNING The BAS Brake Assist System cannot prevent the natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle nor can it increase the traction afforded by prevail ing road conditions The BAS cannot prevent acci dents including those resulting from excessive speed in turns driving on very slippery surfaces or hydroplaning Only a safe attentive and skillful driver can prevent accidents The capabilities of a BAS equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner which could jeopar dize the user s safety or the safety of others STARTING AND OPERATING 233 7 1 7 power may also be reduced to assist in c
251. light in the lever and in the turn the system OFF push the lever inward toward the WARNING Push the speed control lever inward toward O the steering column and release ON OFF instrument cluster on some models will illu minate to show that the speed control system is ON To steering column again and release At this time the system and the indicator light will turn off Leaving the Electronic Speed Control system on when not in use is dangerous You could accidentally set the system or cause it to go faster than you want You could lose control and have an accident Always leave the system OFF when you aren t using it To Set At A Desired Speed When the vehicle reaches the speed desired push the lever down and release SET DECEL Remove your foot from the accelerator pedal and the vehicle will operate at the selected speed 108 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 0 998090 0 08 0 09 9 0 1 70000 0 To Accelerate For Passing Depress the accelerator as you would normally When the pedal is released the vehicle will return to the set speed NOTE The speed control system maintains speed up and down hills A slight speed change on moderate hills is normal Four speed automatic transmissions will experience a downshift to 3rd gear while climbing uphill or descend ing downhill This downshift to 3rd gear is necessary to maintain vehicle set speed On steep hills a greater speed loss
252. ll th the left or the right front attachment point shown Next grab the tonneau cover handle and pull the cover toward you As the cover nears the liftgate opening guide the rear attachment posts on both ends of the cover into the notches in the trim panels Then lower the cover to position the posts into the bottom of the notches and release the handle Front Attachment Points Rear Attachment Points ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 127 Waterproof Liner Cargo Organizer The optional waterproof liner can be placed over the The optional cargo organizer can also be placed into the lower load floor lower load floor Lift the handle and pull to open the FRONT cargo organizer ia SEG abs adn RE aba eani cadis REAR 8138a5c Waterproof Liner 81389562 Cargo Organizer Handle 128 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 50 9099990 0 0 90000000008 Cargo Tie Down Hooks The tie downs located on cargo area floor and on the rear trim panels should be used to safely secure loads when vehicle is moving WARNINCG e Cargo tie down hooks are not safe anchors for a child seat tether strap In a sudden stop or colli sion a hook could pull loose and allow the child seat to come loose A child could be badly injured Use only the anchors provided for child seat 51389565 tethers The weight and position of cargo and passengers can change the vehicle center of gravity and
253. llision an unrestrained child even a tiny baby can become a missile inside the vehicle The force required to hold even an infant on your lap could become so great that you could not hold the child no matter how strong you are The child and others could be badly injured Any child riding in your vehicle should be in a proper restraint for the child s size There are different sizes and types of restraints for children from newborn size to the child almost large enough for an adult safety belt Always check the child seat Owner s Manual to ensure you have the correct seat for your child Use the restraint that is correct for your child Infants and Child Restraints e Safety experts recommend that children ride rearward facing in the vehicle until they are at least e Brake status service and parking brakes e Accelerator status including vehicle speed e Engine control status including engine speed e Cruise control status if applicable e Traction stability control status if applicable Child Restraint Everyone in your vehicle needs to be buckled up all the time babies and children too Every state in the United States and all Canadian provinces require that small children ride in proper restraint systems This is the law and you can be prosecuted for ignoring it Children 12 years and under should ride properly buck led up in a rear seat if available According to crash statistics children are safer whe
254. lowing hot coolant to enter the radiator If an examination of your engine compartment shows no evidence of radiator or hose leaks the vehicle may be safely driven The vapor will soon dissipate e Do not overfill the coolant recovery bottle e Check coolant freeze point in the radiator and in the coolant recovery bottle If antifreeze needs to be added contents of coolant recovery bottle must also be protected against freezing ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 327 Fuel System The Electronic Fuel Injection high pressure fuel system s hoses and quick connect fittings have unique material characteristics that provide adequate sealing and resist attack by deteriorated gasoline You are urged to use only the manufacture specified hoses with quick connect fittings or their equivalent in material and specification in any fuel system servicing It is mandatory to replace any damaged hoses or quick connect fittings that have been removed during service Care should be taken in installing quick connect fittings to insure they are properly installed and fully connected See your authorized dealer for service Brake System In order to assure brake system performance all brake system components should be inspected periodically Suggested service intervals can be found in the Mainte nance Schedule in this manual Hoses and Vacuum Vapor Harnesses Inspect surfaces of hoses and nylon tubing for evidence of heat and mechanical damage Hard
255. lso be performed anytime a malfunction is observed or suspected Retain all re ceipts IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE CONTENTS Suggestions For Obtaining Service For Your ll Reporting Safety Defects 377 oerset ae ee 374 Ter occa 377 6 O Prepare For The Appointment e W Publication Order Forms 377 E wr 374 lll Department Of Transportation Uniform Tire Bist 7 177610876 378 O Be Reasonable With Requests 374 Qualy Grades seas dme goes ER 379 soe te eee 5317930100607 374 W If You Need Assistance llus eerie 0 ll Warranty Information U S Vehicles Only 376 H Iracton Grads NOE Fane SLES LONER 376 o Temperature Grades 374 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 2 0 minimal daily charge If you need a rental it is advisable to make these arrangements when you call for an ap pointment IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE The manufacturer and its dealers are vitally interested in your satisfaction We want you to be happy with our products and services Warranty service must be done by an authorized Chrysler Dodge or Jeep dealer We strongly recommend that you take your vehicle to your selling dealer They know you and your vehicle best and are most concerned that you get prompt and high quality service The manufacturer s dealers have t
256. m fault still exists NOTE The compact spare tire if so equipped does not have a tire pressure monitoring sensor Therefore the TPMS will not monitor the pressure in the compact spare tire However if you install the compact spare tire in place of a road tire that has a pressure below the low pressure warning limit the Tire Pressure Monitoring monitor tire pressure levels Sensors mounted to each wheel as part of the valve stem transmit tire pressure readings to the Receiver Module NOTE It is particularly important for you to check the tire pressure in all of the tires on your vehicle regularly and to maintain the proper pressure The TPMS consists of the following components e Receiver Module e 4 Tire Pressure Monitoring Sensors e Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light Tire Pressure Monitoring Low Pressure Warnings 1 The Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will ref illuminate in the instrument cluster and an audible chime will sound when tire pressure is low in one or more of the four active road tires The audible chime will sound once every ignition cycle for each condition that it detects Should this occur you should stop as soon as possible check the inflation pressure of each tire on your vehicle and inflate each tire to the vehicle s recom mended cold placard pressure value Once the system 258 STARTING AND 0 0 3 00 e 4 Tire Pressure Monitoring Sensors e 3 Trigger Modules mounted in three of the
257. mber will be dialed from which you choose To select one of the entries from the list press the Voice Recognition button while the UConnect system is playing the desired entry and say Delete e After you enter the name the UConnect system will ask you which designation you wish to delete home work mobile or pager Say the designation you wish to delete e Note that only the phonebook entry in the current language is deleted After confirmation the phonebook entries will be de leted Note that only the phonebook in the current language is deleted Delete All Entries in the UConnect Phonebook e Press the Phone button to begin e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Phonebook Erase All e The UConnect system will ask you to verify that you wish to delete all the entries from the phonebook ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 77 on hold and answer the incoming call NOTE The UConnect system compatible phones in market today do not support rejecting an incoming call when another call is in progress Therefore the user can only either answer an incoming call or ignore it Making a Second Call while Current Call in Progress To make a second call while you are currently in a call press the Voice Recognition button and say Dial or Call followed by the phone number or phonebook entry you wish to call The first call will be on hold while the second call is in pr
258. ment as indicated by the M S designation on the tire sidewall If you need snow tires select tires equivalent in size and type to the original equipment tires Use snow tires only in sets of 4 failure to do so may adversely affect the safety and handling of your vehicle 254 STARTING AND OPERATING 09 is permissible if desired Also correct for anything caus TIRE PRESSURE MONITOR SYSTEM TPMS IF ing rapid or unusual wear prior to performing the tire EQUIPPED 0 e The Tire Pressure Monitor System TPMS will warn The suggested rotation method is the forward cross the driver of a low tire pressure based on the vehicle shown in the following diagram recommended cold placard pressure TIRE ROTATION PATTERN e The tire pressure will vary with temperature by about FRONT OF VEHICLE 1 psi 6 9 kPa for every 12 F 6 5 C This means that when the outside temperature decreases the tire pres sure will decrease Tire pressure should always be set based on cold inflation tire pressure This is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not been driven for at least 3 hours or driven less than 1 mile 1 km 4 TIRE ROTATION after a 3 hour period The cold tire inflation pressure BO0bar Ste must not exceed the maximum inflation pressure molded into the tire sidewall Refer to the Tires General Information in this section for information on how to properly inflate the vehicle s tires
259. metime be reduced by lowering l8 e Even though international dialing for most number the in vehicle audio volume combinations is supported some shortcut dialing m Bluetooth Communication Link number combinations may not be supported Occasionally Cellular phones have been found to lose Far End Audio Performance connection to the UConnect system When this hap pens the connection can generally be re established by switching the phone off on Your cell phone is recom e low to medium blower setting mended to remain in Bluetooth on mode e Audio quality is maximized under e low to medium vehicle speed Power Up After switching the ignition key from OFF to either ON or ACC position or after a reset you must wait at least e smooth road surface five 5 seconds prior to using the system e low road noise e fully closed windows and e dry weather condition 86 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Voice Command Tree Main Menu Towing E English eee Assistance HEREY Espanol 0405 Francais Last Enter Number Number on Phone is redialed See The 32 name language Phonebook See Setup specific phonebook will be Flowchart FI hart used The phones paired ids are available across all languages Number associated Number with entry is Dialed is dialed Note Available Voice commands are shown in bold face and are underlined 51940285 ES UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES
260. mode only RW FF Radio Mode Pressing the rewind fast forward button causes the tuner to search for the next frequency in the direction of the arrows This feature operates in either AM FM or Satel lite if equipped frequencies TUNE Control Radio Mode Turn the right side rotary control to increase or decrease the frequency 170 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 0 2 7 0 Press the rotary TUNE control again to exit setting tone Soft Rock Soft Rock 6 RND PTY Button Radio Mode Pressing this button once will turn on the PTY mode for 5 seconds If no action is taken during the 5 second time out the PTY icon will turn off Turning the tune knob Nostalgia within 5 seconds will allow the program format type to be selected Many radio stations do not currently broad Rhythm and Blues Rhythm and Blues cast PTY information Turn the tune knob to select the following format types Got heu and Blues Soft amp B Program Type 16 Mnt 2 Dis N O program ype or un Religious Talk Religious_Talk Unassigned 0 0 By pressing the SEEK button when the PTY icon is displayed the radio will be tuned to the next frequency ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 171 Seek Button Press the SEEK button up for the next selection on the tape and down to return to the beginning of the current selection Press the SEEK button up or down to move the track number
261. mote Keyless inna ur D m 21 111 114 Radial PIY URS 7 2i 454 coed 247 Radiator Cap Coolant Pressure Cap 324 Radio Broadcast Signals 199 Radio INAVIBalOD uscsceisew misce Eye 179 Radio Op rati n scis aug acts RO UO EROS 161 167 191 Radio Remote Controls 187 Radio Satellite 179 184 Radio Sound Systems sss 2x5 ies s 161 167 1 607 115036 LES 31 Rear Seat FONE 2 xe cae ober dede do ite 94 Rear Washer Fluid 202 Rear Window Defroster 202 Rear Window Features n 201 Rear Wiper Washer leeren 201 Rearview Mirrors leen 67 RECURS Front edie sessilis gd 91 Recorder Event Data eller 49 AOALLEAReIGAUGSA TLU UUuIL LEoLLOU LeLA L LCH INDEX 393 2 7 7 0 1 Satellite Radio Antenna llus 187 Selection of Coolant Antifreeze 923 991 Schedule Maintenaiice a3 ooa dc etre dns 354 SelfSe aling Tires 24 9 v band ait qur p done seais 252 peat belr Namtebal6e 22 255 vx EOS IRuE 336 Sentry Key Immobilizer 13 Seat Belt Reminder 24 450448 243 dou eee dia 99 DCrVICEASSISIANCe usce es seges Hae d dde dab d de 374 Beat DEUS Oe Dervi CONAC soe aide e dian bs Q8 8 d 376 Adju
262. mote Sound System Controls 187 136 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M Adding Washer Fluid 202 O Electric Rear Window Defroster 202 es UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 7 INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS PLIEGO TM monn E o a t a v E TEESE xw E Y gt oo i Web e nna Mes Mas Cua n E Anco E ee a T ls nm te Mi Mc nn 884 1 Air Outlet 6 Glove Box 11 Ash Tray 2 Instrument Cluster 7 Radio 12 Ignition Switch 3 Rear Wiper Washer Switch 8 Climate Control 13 Hood Release 4 Hazard Switch 9 Heated Seat Switch 14 Headlight Switch 5 Electronic Stability Program Off But 10 Power Outlet f Equipped ton Traction Control System Off Button 138 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL BASE INSTRUMENT CLUSTER 81905586 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 139 PREMIUM INSTRUMENT CLUSTER IF EQUIPPED 81905592 3 Speedometer Indicates vehicle speed 4 Electronic Speed Control Indicator Light If Equipped Y 5 Tachometer The red segments indicate the maximum permissible engine revolutions per minute r p m x 1000 for each gear range Ease up on the accelerator before reaching th
263. n Shifting from D Drive to P Park or R Reverse or from P or R to D should be done only after the accelerator pedal is released and the vehicle is stopped Be sure to keep your foot on the brake when moving the selector lever between these gears MM EEE 33 e oe i5 io Se uh amt 8312410110 Selector Lever on nats Eh Ho gam 81323043 Brake Interlock Override For electrical system malfunctions there is an override for the interlock system In order to override this system the key must be in the ignition with the switch in the ACC or ON positions Remove the rubber storage tray from the bin located to the right of the selector lever The override can be activated by pressing the pink colored tab which can be accessed through a hole inside the bin While the override is pressed the shifter can be moved 1 20 _ 7 900 STARTING AND OPERATING 215 WARNING Never use Park position on an automatic transmis sion as a substitute for the parking brake Always apply parking brake fully when parked to guard against vehicle movement and possible injury or damage The following indicators should be used to ensure that you have engaged the selector lever into
264. n approximately 10 seconds after the wipers are turned on if the headlight switch is placed in the AUTO position In addition the headlights will turn off when the wipers are turned off if they were turned on by this feature The Headlights On with Wipers feature can be turned on or off through the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC if equipped For details refer to Headlights On with Wipers under Personal Settings Customer Programmable Features under Electronic Vehicle In formation Center in Section 4 of this manual 104 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M TILT TELESCOPING STEERING COLUMN This feature allows you to tilt the steering column upward or downward It also allows you to lengthen or shorten the steering column The tilt telescoping control handle is located below the steering wheel at the end of the steering column 81256183 The fluid reservoir will hold nearly 1 gallon 4 liters of washer fluid when the message Low Washer Fluid appears in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC if equipped WARNING Commercially available windshield washer solvents are flammable They could ignite and burn you Care must be exercised when filling or working around the washer solution A UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 105 To unlock the steering column pull the control handle ADJUSTABLE PEDALS IF EQUIPPED outward To tilt the steering column mo
265. n press and release the FUNCTION SELECT button until ON or OFF appears Turn by Turn Navigation If Equipped When ON is selected the Turn by Turn directions will appear in the display as the vehicle approaches a desig nated turn within a programmed route To make your selection press and release the FUNCTION SELECT button until ON or OFF appears Display Units of Measure in The EVIC odometer and navigation system if equipped can be changed between English and Metric units of measure To make your selection press and release the FUNCTION SELECT button until US or METRIC appears 160 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M NOTE For vehicles not equipped with the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC the radio steering wheel radio controls if equipped and 6 disc CD DVD changer if equipped will remain active for 10 minutes after the ignition switch is turned off Opening either front door will cancel this feature NOTE For vehicles equipped with the Electronic Ve hicle Information Center EVIC the radio steering wheel radio controls if equipped and 6 disc CD DVD changer if equipped will remain active for up to 60 minutes after the ignition switch is turned off Opening either front door will cancel this feature The time is programmable For details refer to Delay Power Off to Accessories Until Exit under Personal Settings Cus tomer Programmable Features under Elect
266. n temperature as well as vehicle speed This feature im proves warm up time of the engine and transmission to achieve maximum efficiency Temporary Transmission Limp Home Mode The transmission is monitored for abnormal conditions If a condition is detected that could result in transmission damage the transmission will engage Limp Home Mode If vehicle acceleration worsens or the transmission no longer shifts the transmission is most likely operating in the Limp Home Mode In this mode the transmission will remain in the current gear until the vehicle is brought to a stop After the vehicle has stopped P Park R Reverse and N Neutral will continue to operate Second gear will operate in the D Drive shifter position The Malfunction Indicator Light may be illuminated A reset feature is available to allow the vehicle to be driven to a dealer for service To reset the transmission use the following procedure 1 Stop the vehicle STARTING AND OPERATING 223 _ 020 0 7 17 the Right an upshift The gear position will display in the instrument cluster on the transmission range indica tor You can shift in or out of the Autostick mode at any time without taking your foot off the accelerator pedal If you choose the Overdrive mode the transmission will oper ate automatically shifting between the five available gears When you wish to engage Autostick s
267. n 1 ID3 tags ID3 version 2 is not supported by the radios Playlist files are not supported MP3 Pro files are not supported Playback of MP3 and WMA Files When a medium containing MP3 data is loaded the radio checks all files on the medium If the medium contains a lot of folders or files the radio will take more time to start playing the MP3 files Loading times for playback of MP3 and WMA files may be affected by the following e Media CD RW media may take longer to load than CD R media e Medium formats Multisession discs may take longer to load than non multisession discs e Number of files and folders Loading times will increase with more files and folders Supported MP3 File Formats The radio will recognize only files with the mp3 exten sion as MP3 files Non MP3 files named with the mp3 extension may cause playback problems The radio is designed to recognize the file as an invalid MP3 and will not play the file When using the MP3 encoder to compress audio data to an MP3 file the bit rate and sampling frequencies in the following table are supported In addition variable bit rates VBR are also supported The majority of MP3 files use a 44 1 kHz sampling rate and a 192 160 128 96 or VBR bit rates MPEG Specifi Sampling Fre 320 256 224 192 160 128 112 96 80 64 56 48 40 32 160 128 144 112 96 80 64 56 48 40 32 24 16 8 MPEG 1 Audio Layer 3
268. n active for up to 60 minutes after the ignition switch is turned off Opening either front door will cancel this feature The time is programmable For details refer to Delay Power Off to Accessories Until Exit under Personal Settings Customer Program mable Features under Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC in Section 4 of this manual Auto Up Feature with Anti Pinch Protection If Equipped Lift the window switch to the second detent release and the window will go up automatically To stop the window from going all the way up during the auto up operation push down on the switch briefly WARNING Never leave children in a vehicle with the keys in the ignition switch Occupants particularly unat tended children can become entrapped by the win dows while operating the power window switches Such entrapment may result in serious injury or death Auto Down Feature The driver door power window switch and some model passenger door power window switches have an auto down feature Press the window switch to the second detent release and the window will go down automati cally To open the window part way press the window switch to the first detent and release it when you want the window to stop To stop the window from going all the way down during the auto down operation pull up on the switch briefly ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 29 NOTE e f the window runs into
269. n display dashes in place of the pressure value to indicate which sensor is not being received recommended cold placard pressure value Once the system receives the updated tire pressures the system will automatically update the graphic display in the EVIC will stop flashing and the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will turn off The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 10 minutes above 15 mph 25 km h in order for the TPMS to receive this information Low pressure in the spare tire will not cause the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light to illuminate or the chime to sound bow Tire FSI er AH ie Ea em 2345 mi 818793 260 STARTING AND 0 8283104 0 0 101 90 7 NOTE The compact spare tire if so equipped does not have a tire pressure monitoring sensor Therefore the TPMS will not monitor the pressure in the compact spare tire However if you install the compact spare tire in place of a road tire that has a pressure below the low pressure warning limit the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will remain ON and a chime will still sound each ignition key cycle In addition the EVIC will still display a low pressure message and a flashing pressure value in the graphic display Once you repair or replace the original road tire and reinstall it on the vehicle in place of the compact spare the TPMS will update auto matically In addition the Tire
270. n down from the current setting Center EVIC The EVIC features a driver interactive display This is located in the instrument cluster below the speedometer The VOLUME button controls the sound level of the sound system Press the top of the VOLUME button to increase the sound level voL Press the bottom of the VOLUME button to UME decrease the sound level Button Press the AUDIO MODE button to select the D Compass Temp Audio screen This screen displays radio station frequencies any one of AUDIO twelve radio station preset frequencies CD MODE disc number CD track number tape or any Button one of 200 Satellite radio channels depending on which radio is in the vehicle If Compass Temp Audio is already displayed when the AUDIO MODE button is pressed then the radio mode will change from AM to FM to Tape to CD or to Satellite SAT accordingly m UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 9 Press either the top or bottom of the SCROLL button twice to listen to the second track on the CD three times to listen to the third track and so forth Satellite Radio Operation Press the top of the SCROLL button once to SEEK the next listenable station up from the current setting Press the bottom of the SCROLL button once to SEEK the next listenable station down from the current setting CASSETTE TAPE AND PLAYER MAINTENANCE To keep the cassette tapes and player in good condition take the following precautions 1 D
271. n exiting the vehicle To make your selection press and release the FUNCTION SELECT button until 0 30 60 or 90 appears Turn Headlights On with Remote Key Unlock When this feature is selected the headlights will activate and remain on for up to 90 seconds when the doors are unlocked with the remote keyless entry transmitter To make your selection press and release the FUNCTION SELECT button until OFE 30 sec 60 sec or 90 sec appears Delay Power Off to Accessories Until Exit When this feature is selected the power window switches radio hands free system if equipped DVD video system if equipped power sunroof if equipped and power outlets will remain active for up to 60 minutes after the ignition switch is turned off Opening a vehicle on lock unlock feature To make your selection press and release the FUNCTION SELECT button until ON or OFF appears Flash Lights with Remote Key Lock When ON is selected the front and rear turn signals will flash when the doors are locked or unlocked with the remote keyless entry transmitter This feature may be selected with or without the sound horn on lock feature selected To make your selection press and release the FUNCTION SELECT button until ON or OFF ap pears Headlights On with Wipers Available with Auto Headlights Only When ON is selected and the headlight switch is in the AUTO position the headligh
272. n properly restrained in the rear seats rather than in the front 52 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 9998900 098008 000 lt 999 7200 Older Children and Child Restraints Children who weigh more than 20 lbs 9 kg and who are older than one year can ride forward facing in the vehicle Forward facing child seats and convertible child seats used in the forward facing direction are for children who weigh 20 to 40 Ibs 9 to 18 kg and who are older than one year These child seats are also held in the vehicle by the lap shoulder belt or the LATCH child restraint anchorage system Refer to LATCH Child Seat Anchorage System Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren in this section The belt positioning booster seat is for children weighing more than 40 lbs 18 kg but who are still too small to fit the vehicle s seat belts properly If the child cannot sit with knees bent over the vehicle s seat cushion while the child s back is against the seat back they should use a belt positioning booster seat The child and belt positioning booster seat are held in the vehicle by the lap shoulder belt one year old and weigh at least 20 lbs 9 kg Two types of child restraints can be used rearward facing infant carriers and convertible child seats The infant carrier is only used rearward facing in the vehicle It is recommended for children who weigh up to about 20 lbs 9 kg Convertible child seats can be used either rearwar
273. n the MDS may be equipped with the FUEL SAVER MODE in the switches off the fuel on four of the eight cylinders and it Trip Functions of the EVIC The FUEL SAVER MODE can be used to modify driving habits in order to increase message will display above the average fuel economy in the time in which the fuel saver mode is active the EVIC display This message will appear whenever MDS allows the engine to operate on four cylinders which will vary depending on driving habits and vehicle usage TH HF sum PP 11s cmi 81373314 Oa RE SU HEU Eazat 8 Cylinder Operation MDS Off 1 1 jr e Distance To Empty DTE 1 Shows the estimated distance that can be traveled with 197838 the fuel remaining in the tank This estimated distance is 4 Cylinder Operation MDS On determined by a weighted average of the instantaneous 152 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 8 71 7 7 2 _ _ 9 83 e Elapsed Time Shows the total elapsed time of travel since the last reset when the ignition switch is in the ACC position Elapsed time will increment when the ignition switch is in the ON or START position Display Units of Measure in To make your selection press and release the FUNC TION SELECT button until US or METRIC appears To Reset The Display Reset will only occur while a resettable function is being displayed Press and release the FUNCTION SELECT button once
274. ncy beyond that afforded by the condition of the vehicle brakes and tires or the traction afforded The ABS cannot prevent accidents including those resulting from excessive speed in turns following an other vehicle too closely or hydroplaning Only a safe attentive and skillful driver can prevent accidents The capabilities of an ABS equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner which could jeopardize the user s safety or the safety of others A STARTING AND OPERATING 229 WARNING Continued operation with reduced power steering assist could pose a safety risk to yourself and others Service should be obtained as soon as possible CAUTION Prolonged operation of the steering system at the end of the steering wheel travel will increase the steering fluid temperature and it should be avoided when possible Damage to the power steering pump may occur Brake Force Distribution EBD systems are not function ing Immediate repair to the ABS system is required POWER STEERING The standard power steering system will give you good vehicle response and increased ease of maneuverability in tight spaces The system will provide mechanical steering capability if power assist is lost If for some reason the power assist is interrupted it will still be possible to steer your vehicle Under these condi tions you will observe a substantial increase in steering effort especially at very low ve
275. nd skillful driver can prevent accidents The capabilities of an ESP equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner which could jeopar dize the user s safety or the safety of others This system enhances directional control and stability of the vehicle under various driving conditions The ESP corrects for oversteering and understeering the vehicle by applying the brake of the appropriate wheel Engine 234 STARTING AND 0 1 1 9099999901 0 2 09 000 When ESP is switched off the engine torque reduction feature is cancelled Therefore the enhanced vehicle stability offered by ESP is unavailable However a fea ture of the system remains active This feature controls wheel spin across an axle quite similarly to a limited slip differential If one wheel on an axle is spinning faster than the other the system will apply the brake of the spinning wheel and allow more engine torque to be applied to the wheel that is not spinning This wheel slip control is active at vehicle speeds between approximately 24 mph 40 km h and 50 mph 80 km h CAUTION When the ESP TCS Indicator Light is illuminated continuously the ESP is switched off Avoid spin ning one drive wheel This may cause serious dam age to the drive train The ESP OFF button is located in the center of the instrument panel Io turn OFF the ESP momentarily press the ESP OFF button and the ESP TCS Indicator Light will illuminate
276. nder one or more of the conditions marked with an Day or night temperatures are below 32 F 0 C Stop and go driving Extensive engine idling Driving in dusty conditions Short trips of less than 10 miles 16 km More than 50 of your driving is at sustained high speeds during hot weather above 90 F 32 C 358 SCHEDULE B Miles 3 000 6 000 9 000 12 000 15 000 18 000 Kilometers 5 000 10 000 15 000 20 000 25 000 30 000 Change engine oil and engine oil filter if not X replaced at 3 months Inspect the air cleaner filter and replace if re X X X X X quired Lo o X X Replace the air cleaner filter BEEN Inspect the front and rear brake linings and X rotors Replace the air conditioning filter J T X J Rotate the tires X X j X M A N Li E N A N C E 5 C H E 0 U L E S 8 M A N T E N A N C E 5 C H E 0 U L E S 8 SCHEDULE B 359 33 000 36 000 55 000 60 000 NENNEN NENNEN a 30 000 50 000 X X X X X 27 000 45 000 X 24 000 40 000 X X X X X Miles Kilometers 35 000 Change engine oil and engine oil filter if not replaced at 3 months Inspect the air cleaner filter and replace if re quired Replace the air cleaner filter Replace the spark plugs 5 7L Engine Inspect the front
277. ng 60 264 Cargo Compartment CEE Commer ove xad oe ee oe a ee 129 215 331 217 218 229 221 Fluid Change Fluid Level Check Fluid Type Gear Ranges Shifting Special Additives Torque Converter Automatic Transmission Limp Home Mode Autostick Ball Joints Battery Emergency Starting Jump Starting Keyless Transmitter Replacement RKE Location Bearings Belts Drive Belts Seat Body Mechanism Lubrication B Pillar Location Brake Assist System Brake Parking 2 90 2 0 0 INDEX 384 Compact Disc CD Maintenance 190 Compact Spare Tire nek aeria t 247 COMPOS VOIDS 159 Compass Calibration o4 2 4244 0 26405 153 Compass 1470668 324 3 v Eee ORO ends 153 Computer Trip Travel 150 CONGO ayere neee OO 122 Console Floor 5 2 ss dora e PRAES 122 Console Overhead 262b eR 26 2508865 109 Contract Service ox 4 99x aot yen e y eS 376 Coolant Pressure Cap Radiator Cap 324 6610185 SVS irc eur d 322 Adding Coolant Antifreeze 323 Coolant Capacity eks 350 Coolant Level i222 Rd 322 325 Disposal of Used Coolant 325 Drain Flush and Refill 322 17757661108 dee ES S RS 325 Points to Remember uus yk t 2 oy a 326 Pressure Cap 2545232 99 2 2 A rinta nipi 324 Radiator Cap 4 446
278. ng conditions in hilly ter rain traveling into strong head winds or while tow ing heavy trailers NOTE e Ifthe vehicle is started in cold temperatures shifts into Overdrive may be delayed Normal Overdrive and shifting operation will resume when the temperature of the transmission reaches the appropriate tempera ture Refer to the Note under Torque Converter Clutch later in this section R Reverse For moving the vehicle rearward Always stop before moving the lever to R Reverse except when rocking the vehicle N Neutral Engine may be started in this range CAUTION Coasting the vehicle or driving for any other reason with selector lever in NEUTRAL can result in trans mission damage WARNING Do not coast in N Neutral and never turn off the ignition to coast down a hill These are unsafe e If the transmission temperature gets too hot the transmission may downshift out of Overdrive or en gage overdrive at higher vehicle speeds until the transmission cools down After cooldown Overdrive will resume normal operation practices that limit your response to changing traffic or road conditions You might lose control of the vehicle and have an accident ee STARTING AND OPERATING 217 CAUTION Never race the engine with the brakes on and the vehicle in gear and never hold the vehicle on an incline without applying the brakes These practices can cause overheating and damage to the tra
279. ng the high beam headlights will turn off the fog lights 98 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE If you turn the headlights park lights or ignition switch on again the system will cancel the delay If you turn the headlights off before the ignition they will turn off in the normal manner NOTE The lights must be turned off within 45 seconds of turning the ignition off to activate this feature The Headlight delay time is programmable on vehicles equipped with the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC For details refer to Delay Turning Headlights Off under Personal Settings Customer Programmable Features under Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC in Section 4 of this manual Daytime Running Lights Canada Only The high beam headlights will come on as Daytime Running Lights whenever the ignition switch is on the headlights are off and the parking brake is off The headlight switch must be used for normal nighttime driving C UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 99 by moving the lever partially up or down without moving beyond the detent Releasing the lever at the detent will provide 3 flashes If either light has a very fast flash rate check for a defective outside light bulb If an indicator fails to light when the lever is moved it would suggest that the fuse or indicator is defective or there may be a circuit failure NOTE A Turn Signal On message will appear in t
280. ng with your vehicle under maxi mum load is dangerous The added strain on your Cuts and punctures in radial tires are repairable only in the tread area because of sidewall flexing Consult your authorized tire dealer for radial tire repairs Compact Spare Tire If Equipped The compact spare is for temporary emergency use with radial tires It is engineered to be used on your style vehicle only Since this tire has limited tread life the original tire should be repaired or replaced and rein stalled at the first opportunity WARNING Temporary use spare tires are for emergency use only With these tires do not drive more than 50 mph 80 km h Temporary use spare tires have limited tread life When the tread is worn to the tread wear indicators the temporary use spare tire needs to be replaced Be sure to follow the warnings which apply to your spare Failure to do so could result in spare tire failure and loss of vehicle control tires could cause them to fail You could have a serious accident Don t drive a vehicle loaded to the maximum capacity at continuous speeds above 75 mph 120 km h Radial Ply Tires WARNING Combining radial ply tires with other types of tires on your vehicle will cause your vehicle to handle poorly The instability could cause an accident Al ways use radial ply tires in sets of four or 6 in case of trucks with dual rear wheels Never combine them with other types of tires
281. not ride with the seatback reclined SO that the cause damage to the seat controls shoulder belt is no longer resting against your chest In a collision you could slide under the seat belt and be seriously or even fatally injured Use the recliner only when the vehicle is parked Power Reclining Seats If Equipped The recliner control is located on the outboard side of the seat e e e TE toa SN A pus Power Seat Recline Switch 92 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Lumbar Support If Equipped The head restraints have a locking button which must be This feature allows you to increase or decrease the pushed in to lower the head restraint The restraints may amount of lumbar support Turn the control lever for be raised without pushing in the button ward to increase and rearward to decrease the desired amount of lumbar support X B0b34e13 mal Heated Seats If Equipped Lumbar Support Control Lever Heated seats which are available only with leather Head Restraints upholstery provide comfort and warmth on cold days Head restraints can reduce the risk of whiplash injury in and can help soothe sore muscles and backs The heaters the event of impact from the rear Adjustable restraints provide the same
282. nroof will close automatically from any position The sunroof will close fully and stop automatically This is called Express Close During Express Close operation any movement of the switch will stop the sunroof Pinch Protect Feature This feature will detect an obstruction in the opening of the sunroof during Express Close operation If an ob struction in the path of the sunroof is detected the sunroof will automatically retract Remove the obstruc tion if this occurs Next press the switch forward and release to Express Close WARNING e Never leave children in a vehicle with the keys in the ignition switch Occupants particularly unat tended children can become entrapped by the power sunroof while operating the power sunroof switch Such entrapment may result in serious injury or death In an accident there is a greater risk of being thrown from a vehicle with an open sunroof You could also be seriously injured or killed Always fasten your seat belt properly and make sure all passengers are properly secured too Do not allow small children to operate the sun roof Never allow fingers or other body parts or any object to project through the sunroof opening Injury may result ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 117 Wind Buffeting Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of pressure on the ears or a helicopter type sound in the ears Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the win
283. ns in an expert manner Service Manuals are available which include detailed service information for your vehicle Refer to these manuals before attempting any procedure yourself NOTE Intentional tampering with emissions control systems can result in civil penalties being assessed against you b The MIL will not flash at all and will remain fully illuminated until you turn off the ignition key or start the engine This means that your vehicle s OBD system is ready and you can proceed to the I M station If your OBD system is not ready you should see your authorized dealer or repair facility If your vehicle was recently serviced or had a battery failure or replacement you may need to do nothing more than drive your vehicle as you normally would in order for your OBD system to update A recheck with the above test routine may then indicate that the system is now ready Regardless of whether your vehicle s OBD system is ready or not ready if the MIL symbol is illuminated during normal vehicle operation you should have your vehicle serviced before going to the I M station The I M station can fail your vehicle because the MIL symbol is on with the engine running ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 309 Engine Oil Checking Oil Level 2 7L 3 5L Engines To assure proper engine lubrication the engine oil must be maintained at the correct level Check the oil level at regular intervals such as every fuel stop The best time to
284. nsmis sion Torque Converter Clutch A feature designed to improve fuel economy has been added to the automatic transmission of this vehicle A clutch within the torque converter engages automatically at calibrated speeds This may result in a slightly differ ent feeling or response during normal operation in high gear When the vehicle speed drops or during accelera tion the clutch automatically and smoothly disengages NOTE e The torque converter clutch will not engage until the transmission fluid and engine coolant is warm usu ally after 1 3 miles 1 6 4 8 km of driving Because engine speed is higher when the torque converter 3 Third This range eliminates shifts into Overdrive The trans mission will operate normally in First Second and Third while in this range The 3 position should also be used when descending steep grades to prevent brake system distress NOTE Using the 3 range while operating the vehicle under heavy operating conditions will improve perfor mance and extend transmission life by reducing exces sive shifting and heat build up L Low This range should be used for engine braking when descending very steep grades In this range upshifts will occur only to prevent engine overspeed while downshifts occur earlier than other gear range selec tions 9 000 000 7 24 lt 90 lt lt 0 144990909 4 1 STARTING AND OPERATING 218 continue to oper
285. nthetic Gear Lubricant or equivalent Power Steering Reservoir Mopar Power Steering Fluid 4 Mopar ATF 4 Automatic Transmission Fluid API Certified GL 5 SAE 75W140 Synthetic Gear Lubricant or equivalent Mopar Transfer Case Lubricant LX P N 05170055AA or equivalent MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES CONTENTS ll Emission Control System Maintenance 354 BioeDedule B na wees Maintenance Schedules 354 Schedule A an a4 SOpracvep Send Acor oa ae ia M A l N T E N A N C E S C H E 0 U L E S 8 354 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 2 899 91 3 1 7 7 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES NOTE e For vehicles equipped with a 2 7L engine follow Schedule A or B from 0 to 150 000 miles 0 to 250 000 km e For vehicles equipped with a 3 5L or 5 7L engine follow Schedule A or B from 0 to 120 000 miles 0 to 200 000 km There are two maintenance schedules that show the required service for your vehicle First is Schedule B It is for vehicles that are operated under the conditions that are listed below and at the beginning of the schedule Change the automatic transmission fluid and filter every 60 000 miles 100 000 km if the vehicle is usually operated under one or more of the conditions marked with an e Day or night temperatures are below 32 F 0 C e Stop and go driving EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM MAINTENANCE
286. ny warranty issues or related concerns WARRANTY INFORMATION U S Vehicles Only See the Warranty Information Booklet for the terms and provisions of DaimlerChrysler s warranties applicable to this vehicle MOPAR PARTS Mopar fluids lubricants parts and accessories are available from your dealer They will help you keep your vehicle operating at its best Service Contract You may have purchased a service contract for your vehicle to help protect you from the high cost of unex pected repairs after your manufacturer s new vehicle limited warranty expires The manufacturer stands be hind only the manufacturer s Service Contracts If you purchased a manufacturer s Service Contract you will receive Plan Provisions and an Owner Identification Card in the mail within three weeks of your vehicle delivery date If you have any questions about your service contract call the manufacturer s Service Contract Na tional Customer Hotline at 1 800 521 9922 The manufacturer will not stand behind any service contract that is not the manufacturer s Service Contract It is not responsible for any service contract other than the manufacturer s Service Contract If you purchased a service contract that is not a manufacturer s Service Contract and you require service after your manufactur er s new vehicle limited warranty expires please refer to your contract documents and contact the person listed in those documents ee IF YOU NEED CONSUMER
287. o Entertainment System VES Guide SALES CODE REC AM FM CD 6 DISC RADIO WITH NAVIGATION SYSTEM 51255256 REC Radio Satellite Navigation Radio with CD Player with MP3 Capability REC combines a Global Positioning System based navigation system with an integrated color 180 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 9 09 2 To show the GPS clock select Displayed Clock GPS Clock and press ENTER 3 To adjust the time zone Select Iime Zone and press ENTER Select the appropriate time zone and press ENTER 4 To turn daylight savings on or off select Daylight Savings and press ENTER Select On or Off and press ENTER 5 Select DONE to exit from the clock setting mode Press ENTER to save your changes If you press CANCEL or NAV then your changes will not be saved User Defined Clock If you wish to set the clock to a time different than the system clock you can manually adjust the time by choosing the User Defined Clock option 1 At the Main Menu screen highlight Clock Setup and press ENTER OR press and hold for 3 seconds the TIME button on the unit s faceplate The Clock Setup screen appears E UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 1 3 To decrease the clock by one hour use the Select Encoder to highlight the sign Press ENTER Press ENTER again to decrease the clock by another hour 4 To increase the clock by minutes make sure MIN is highlighted and press ENTER Press
288. o OFF If you insert a disc with the ignition ON and the radio ON the unit will switch from radio to CD mode and begin to play when you insert the disc The display will show the disc number the track number and index time in minutes and seconds Play will begin at the start of track 1 SEEK Button CD MODE for CD Audio Play Press the right side of the SEEK button for the next selection on the CD Press the left side of the button to return to the beginning of the current selection or return to the beginning of the previous selection if the CD is within the first 5 seconds of the current selection 174 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 9 8 RW FF CD MODE for CD Audio Play Press and hold FF Fast Forward and the CD player will begin to fast forward until FF is released or RW or another CD button is pressed The RW Reverse button works in a similar manner TUNE Control CD MODE for CD Audio Play Pressing the TUNE control allows the setting of the Tone Fade and Balance See Radio Mode AM FM Button CD MODE for CD Audio Play Switches the Radio to the Radio mode RND PTY Button Random Play Button CD MODE for CD Audio Play Press this button while the CD is playing to activate Random Play This feature plays the selections on the compact disc in random order to provide an interesting change of pace NOTE MP3 and WMA Random Play are for file folders only Press the SEEK button to move to the next randomly
289. o not use cassette tapes longer than C 90 otherwise sound quality and tape durability will be greatly dimin ished 2 Keep the cassette tape in its case to protect from slackness and dust when it is not in use 3 Keep the cassette tape away from direct sunlight heat and magnetic fields such as the radio speakers 4 Before inserting a tape make sure that the label is adhering flatly to the cassette Tape Player Operation Press the top of the SCROLL button once to listen to the next track on the cassette Press the bottom of the SCROLL button once either to listen to the beginning of the current track or to listen to the beginning of the previous track if it is within 5 seconds after the current track begins to play Press either the top or bottom of the SCROLL button twice to listen to the second track on the tape three times to listen to the third track and so forth Press the FUNCTION SELECT button to change the side of the tape being played CD Player Operation Press the top of the SCROLL button once to listen to the next track on the CD Press the bottom of the SCROLL button once to either listen to the beginning of the current track or to listen to the beginning of the previous track if it is within one second after the current track begins to play 190 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 76 7 2 7 gt gt 1 9 0 CD DVD DISC MAINTENANCE To keep the CD DVD discs in good condition take t
290. o the Maintenance Schedule in this manual for the recommended air conditioning filter replacement intervals Power Steering Fluid Check Checking the power steering fluid level at a defined service interval is not required The fluid should only be checked if a leak is suspected abnormal noises are apparent and or the system is not functioning as antici pated Coordinate inspection efforts through a certified DaimlerChrysler Dealership WARNING Fluid level should be checked on a level surface and with the engine off to prevent injury from moving parts and to insure accurate fluid level reading Do not overfill Use only manufacturer s recommended power steering fluid If necessary add fluid to restore to the proper indicated level With a clean cloth wipe any spilled fluid from all Refrigerant Recovery and Recycling R 134a Air Conditioning Refrigerant is a hydrofluorocar bon HFC that is endorsed by the Environmental Pro tection Agency and is an ozone saving product How ever the manufacturer recommends that air conditioning service be performed by dealers or other service facilities using recovery and recycling equipment NOTE Use only manufacturer approved A C System Sealers Stop Leak Products Seal Conditioners Compres sor Oil and Refrigerants A C Air Filter If Equipped The filter is located in the fresh air inlet under the hood behind a removable panel in the cowl on the passenger side of th
291. oad capacity of 150 vehicle Improperly secured loads can fly off the Ibs 68 kg Always distribute heavy loads as evenly as possible and secure the load appropriately vehicle particularly at high speeds resulting in personal injury or property damage Follow the Roof Rack Cautions when carrying cargo on your roof rack Long loads which extend over the windshield such as wood panels or surfboards or loads with large frontal area should be secured to both the front and rear of the vehicle Travel at reduced speeds and turn corners carefully LOAD LEVELING SYSTEM IF EQUIPPED when carrying large or heavy loads on the roof rack The automatic load leveling system will provide a level Wind forces due to natural causes or nearby truck idi hicl 7 3 traffic can add sudden upward loads This is espe HOD VEU ue Hee mos Paseo ae eae oon cially true on large flat loads and may result in conditions damage to the cargo or your vehicle A hydraulic pump contained within the shock absorbers raises the rear of the vehicle to the correct height It takes approximately 1 mile 1 6 km of driving for the leveling to complete depending on road surface conditions Do not use the pop up feature of the sliding pop up roof when positioning or placing luggage above it to prevent damage to the sliding pop up roof panel If the leveled vehicle is not moved for approximately 15 hours the leveling system will bleed itself down Th
292. of a vehicle seen in the passenger side convex mirror Exterior Mirrors Folding Feature If Equipped Some models have exterior mirrors that are hinged The hinge allows the mirror to pivot forward and rearward to resist damage The hinge has three detent positions full forward full rearward and normal Driver s Side Outside Mirror Auto Dimmer If Equipped This mirror automatically adjusts for annoying headlight glare from vehicles behind you You can turn this feature on or off by pressing the button at the base of the Inside Rearview Mirror CAUTION To avoid damage to the mirror during cleaning never spray any cleaning solution directly onto the mirror Apply the solution onto a clean cloth and wipe the mirror clean Outside Mirrors To receive maximum benefit adjust the outside mirror s to center on the adjacent lane of traffic and a slight overlap of the view obtained from the inside mirror NOTE The passenger side convex outside mirror will give a much wider view to the rear and especially of the lane next to your vehicle Illuminated Vanity Mirror Tele IS inn rrr SELFIE H b E E x x E E E E E E E E E E D ight turns on automat ights rr INI HIE uiu Zulu INI EU PEE HUI ELE DIES iM IL eere n Tn a m ee
293. of the oil level readings Maintain the oil level in the SAFE range Adding 1 0 quart 1 0L of oil when the reading is at the bottom of the SAFE range will result in an oil level at the top of the SAFE range on these engines 81312255 Engine Oil Dipstick 310 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE MIN OIL MARK MAX OIL MARK 0097 442b Engine Oil Dipstick CAUTION Overfilling or underfilling will cause oil aeration or loss of oil pressure This could damage your engine Checking Oil Level 5 7L Engine To assure proper engine lubrication the engine oil must be maintained at the correct level Check the oil level at regular intervals such as every fuel stop eee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 311 CAUTION e Off Road or desert operation NOTE If ANY of these apply to you then change your engine oil every 3 000 miles 5 000 km or 3 months whichever comes first and follow schedule B in the Maintenance Schedules in this manual If none of these applies to you then change your engine oil at every interval shown on schedule A in the Maintenance Schedules in this manual NOTE Under no circumstances should oil change intervals exceed 6 000 miles 10 000 km or 6 months whichever comes first Engine Oil Selection For best performance and maximum protection under all types of operating conditions the manufacture only recommends engine oils that are API certified and meet the requirements of Da
294. of the vehicle and possibly have an accident Accelerate slowly and carefully whenever there is likely to be poor traction ice snow wet mud loose sand etc ee STARTING AND OPERATING 225 The foot operated parking brake is positioned below the lower left corner of the instrument panel To apply the parking brake push the parking brake pedal down and then remove your foot from the pedal To release the parking brake push down on the parking brake pedal and then release Parking Brake The brake light in the instrument cluster will turn on when the parking brake is applied and the ignition switch is on PARKING BRAKE The parking brake should always be applied when the driver is not in the vehicle WARNING Never use Park position on an automatic transmis sion as a substitute for the parking brake Always apply parking brake fully when parked to guard against vehicle movement and possible injury or damage When parking on a flat surface place the gear selector in the P Park position first and then apply the parking brake When parking on a hill it is important to apply the parking brake before placing the gear selector in P Park otherwise the load on the transmission locking mecha nism may make it difficult to move the selector out of park As an added precaution turn the front wheels toward the curb on a downhill grade and away from the curb on an uphill grade 1 4 199
295. ogress To go back to the first call refer to Togeling Between Calls To combine two calls refer to Conference Call Place Retrieve a Call from Hold To put a call on hold press the Phone button until you hear a single beep This indicates that the call is on hold To bring the call back from hold press and hold the Phone button until you hear a single beep Toggling Between Calls If two calls are in progress one active and one on hold press the Phone button until you hear a single beep Phone Call Features The following features can be accessed through the UConnect system if the feature s are available on your cellular service plan For example if your cellular service plan provides three way calling this feature can be accessed through the UConnect system Check with your cellular service provider for the features that you have Answer or Reject an Incoming Call No Call Currently in Progress When you receive a call on your cellular phone the UConnect system will interrupt the vehicle audio system if on and will ask if you would like to answer the call To reject the call press and hold the Phone button until you hear a single beep indicating that the incoming call was rejected Answer or Reject an Incoming Call Call Currently in Progress If a call is currently in progress and you have another incoming call you will hear the same network tones for call waiting that you normally hear when u
296. old placard pressure in order for the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light to turn off The system will automatically update and the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will turn off once the system receives the updated tire pressures NOTE Seasonal temperature changes will affect tire pressure and the TPMS will monitor the actual tire pressure in the tire The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 10 minutes above 15 mph 25 km h in order for the TPMS to receive this information 256 STARTING AND OPERATING 0 9090 010 9 2 0 4 0 7 NOTE The TPMS is not intended to replace normal tire care and maintenance or to provide warning of a tire failure or condition The TPMS should not be used as a tire pressure gauge while adjusting your tire pressure Driving on a significantly under inflated tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure Under inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life and may affect the vehicle s handling and stopping ability The TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire mainte nance and it is the driver s responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure even if under inflation has not reached the level to trigger illumination of the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale light Base System If Equipped The Tire Pressure Monitor System IPMS uses wireless technology with wheel rim mounted electronic sensors to CAUTION e The TPMS has been
297. ond Call while Current Call in Progress After the second call has established press and hold the Phone button until you hear a double beep indicating that the two calls have been joined into one conference call Call Termination To end a call in progress momentarily press the Phone button Only the active call s will be terminated and if there is a call on hold it will become the new active call A UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 79 NOTE After every UConnect language change op eration only the language specific 32 name phonebook is usable The paired phone name is not language specific and usable across all languages Emergency Assistance If you are in an emergency and the mobile phone is reachable e Pick up the phone and manually dial the emergency number for your area If the phone is not reachable and the UConnect system is operational you may reach the emergency number as follows e Press the Phone button to begin e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Emergency and the UConnect system will instruct the paired cellular phone to call the emergency num ber This feature is only supported in the USA NOTE The emergency number dialed is based on the Country where the vehicle is purchased 911 for USA and e After ignition key is switched to off a call can continue on the UConnect system for certain duration after which the call is automatically transferr
298. onds and the vehicle speed is greater than 5 mph 8 km h 40 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 702239 999948480 distinctive label on the webbing Children 12 years old and under should be properly restrained in the rear seat whenever possible How To Engage The Automatic Locking Mode 1 Buckle the combination lap and shoulder belt 2 Grasp the shoulder portion and pull downward until the entire belt is extracted 3 Allow the belt to retract As the belt retracts you will here a clicking sound This indicates the safety belt is now in the automatic locking mode How To Disengage The Automatic Locking Mode Unbuckle the combination lap and shoulder belt and allow it to retract completely to disengage the automatic locking mode and activate the vehicle sensitive emer gency locking mode Seat Belts and Pregnant Women We recommend that pregnant women use the seat belts throughout their pregnancy Keeping the mother safe is the best way to keep the baby safe NOTE Watch for the Seat Belt Reminder Light to turn on while unbuckling the seat belt and turn off while re buckling the seat belt It may be necessary to retract the seat belt 4 Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position A single chime will sound to signify that you have success fully completed the programming The Enhanced Warning System BeltAlert can be reacti vated by repeating this procedure NOTE When the Enhanced Warning System BeltAlert
299. ons The UConnect system will play the current confirmation prompt status and you will be given the choice to change it Phone and Network Status Indicators If available on the radio and or on a premium display such as the instrument panel cluster and supported by your cell phone the UConnect system will provide notification to inform you of your phone and network status when you are attempting to make a phone call using UConnect The status is given for roaming net work signal strength phone battery strength etc When calling a number with your UConnect system that normally requires you to enter in a touch tone sequence on your cellular phone keypad you can push the Voice Recognition button and say the sequence you wish to enter followed by the word Send For example if required to enter your pin number followed with a pound 3 7 4 6 you can press the Voice Recognition button and say 3 7 4 6 Send Saying a number or sequence of numbers followed by Send is also to be used to navigate through an automated customer service center menu structure and to leave a number on a pager Barge In Overriding Prompts The Voice Recognition button can be used when you wish to skip part of a prompt and issue your voice recognition command immediately For example if a prompt is playing Would you like to pair a phone clear a you could press the Voice Recognition button and say Pair a Phone to select
300. ons Release the buttons only when the EVIC displays Chan nels Cleared after 20 seconds however do not hold the buttons for longer than 30 seconds Do not repeat this step if programming a second or third hand held trans mitter to the remaining HomeLink buttons 51 566 HomeLink Buttons 2 Position the end of your hand held transmitter 1 3 inches 3 8 cm away from the HomeLink buttons ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 113 or other rolling code equipped device repeat this sequence a third time to complete the programming HomeLink should now activate your rolling code equipped device NOTE To program the remaining two HomeLink but tons begin with Programming Step 2 Do not repeat Step 1 For questions or comments please contact HomeLink at www homelink com or 1 800 355 3515 Canadian Programming Gate Programming Canadian radio frequency laws require transmitter sig nals to time out or quit after several seconds of transmission which may not be long enough for HomeLink to pick up the signal during programming Similar to this Canadian law some U S gate operators are designed to time out in the same manner If you live in Canada or you are having difficulties programming a gate operator by using the Program ming procedures regardless of where you live replace Programming HomeLink Step 3 with the following NOTE If your garage door opener fails to respond to the programme
301. onsole are two courtesy reading lights Press the lens to turn on the light Press it a second time to turn off the light These lights also turn on when a door is opened or when the liftgate is opened or when the unlock button on the remote keyless entry transmitter is pressed or when the dimmer control is turned fully upward past the second detent Sunglasses Storage At the rear of the console a compartment is provided for the storage of a pair of sunglasses The storage compartment access is a push push design Push the finger depression on the overhead console to open Push the finger depression to close OVERHEAD CONSOLE The overhead console contains courtesy reading lights an optional universal garage door opener HomeLink storage for sunglasses and an optional power sunroof switch 8125e121 Overhead Console 110 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 000000009009090909091 7 777770 GARAGE DOOR OPENER HomeLink IF WARNING EQUIPPED The HomeLink Universal Transceiver replaces up to e A moving garage door can cause injury to people and three remote controls hand held transmitters that oper pets in the path of the door People or pets could be ate devices such as garage door openers motorized seriously or fatally injured Only use this transceiver gates or home lighting It triggers these devices at the wiii a parapa door opener that Mas eee ang i reverse feature as requir
302. or comes on and remains on while You need proper knee impact protection in a driving collision Do not mount or locate any aftermarket equipment on or behind the knee impact bolster Event Data Recorder EDR In the event of an airbag deployment your vehicle is designed to record up to 2 seconds of specific vehicle data parameters see list below in an event data recorder prior to the moment of airbag deployment Please note that such data are ONLY recorded if an airbag deploys and are otherwise unavailable In conjunction with other data gathered during a complete accident investigation It is dangerous to try to repair any part of the airbag system yourself Be sure to tell anyone who works on your vehicle that it has airbags 50 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 7 0 38 lt 0 lt 888 89 treated confidentially Confidential data will not be dis closed by DaimlerChrysler to any third party except when 1 Used for research purposes such as to match data with a particular crash record in an aggregate database provided confidentiality of personal data is thereafter preserved 2 Used in defense DaimlerChrysler product of litigation involving a 3 Requested by police under a legal warrant 4 Otherwise required by law Data Parameters that May Be Recorded e Diagnostic trouble code s and warning light status for electronically controlled safety systems including the airbag system e Time of
303. or soft spots brittle rubber cracking tears cuts abrasions and exces sive swelling indicate deterioration of the rubber Pay particular attention to those hoses nearest to high heat sources such as the exhaust manifold Inspect hose routing to be sure hoses do not come in contact with any heat source or moving component which may cause heat damage or mechanical wear Insure nylon tubing in these areas has not melted or collapsed Inspect all hose connections such as clamps and cou plings to make sure they are secure and no leaks are present Components should be replaced immediately if there is any evidence of wear or damage that could cause failure 0 2 7 0 0 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 328 NOTE e Often fluid such as oil power steering fluid and brake fluid are used during assembly plant operations to facilitate the assembly of hoses to couplings There fore oil wetness at the hose coupling area is not necessarily an indication of leakage Actual dripping of hot fluid when systems are under pressure during vehicle operation should be noted before a hose is replaced based on leakage Inspect the brake hoses whenever the brake system is serviced and at every engine oil change Inspect hy draulic brake hoses for surface cracking scuffing or worn spots If there is any evidence of cracking scuffing or worn spots t
304. ormation Center in Section 4 of this manual Headlight Time Delay This feature provides the safety of headlight illumination for 90 seconds programmable when leaving your ve hicle in an unlighted area To activate the delay feature turn off the ignition switch while the headlights are still on Then turn off the headlights within 45 seconds The delay interval begins when headlight switch is turned off headlights will stay ON for up to 90 seconds after you turn the ignition switch OFF To turn the Automatic System OFF move the headlight switch out of the AUTO A position He L anaana a EEE EA T T 7 7 Headlight Switch NOTE The engine must be running before the head lights will come ON in the Automatic mode Lights on Reminder If the headlights or parking lights are on after the ignition is turned OFF a chime will sound to alert the driver when the driver s door is opened Fog Lights If Equipped O The front fog light switch is on the headlight switch below the dimmer control To activate the front fog lights turn on the parking lights or the low beam headlights and press the fog light switch An indicator light in the instrument cluster illuminates when the fog lights are turned on NOTE The fog lights will operate with the low beam headlights or parking lights on However selecti
305. osition your dealer can provide you with a seat belt extender This extender should be used only if the existing belt is not long enough When it is not required remove the extender and store it WARNING Using a seat belt extender when not needed can increase the risk of injury in a collision Only use when the seat belt is not long enough when it is worn low and snug and in the recommended seating positions Remove and store the extender when not needed t ens eT Window Airbag NOTE Airbag covers may not be obvious in the interior trim but they will open to allow airbag deploy ment 42 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE NOTE The front airbags are certified to the Federal regulations that allow less forceful deployment The front airbags have a multistage inflator design This may allow the airbag to have different rates of inflation that are based on collision severity This vehicle may also be equipped with side curtain airbags to protect the driver and passengers sitting next to a window If the vehicle is equipped with side curtain airbags they are located above the side windows Their covers are also labeled SRS AIRBAG ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 43 NOTE Do not use a clothing bar mounted to the coat hooks in this vehicle A clothing bar will impede
306. ounteracting the condition of oversteer or understeer and help the vehicle maintain the desired path The ESP uses sensors in the vehicle to determine the path that the driver intends to steer the vehicle and compares it to the actual path of the vehicle When the actual path does not match the intended path the ESP applies the brake of the appropriate wheel to assist in counteracting the condition of oversteer or understeer e Oversteer when the vehicle is turning more than appropriate for the steering wheel position e Understeer when the vehicle is turning less than appropriate for the steering wheel position The ESP TCS Indicator Light located in the instrument cluster starts to flash as soon as the tires lose traction and the ESP system becomes active The indicator light also flashes when the TCS is active If the indicator light begins to flash during acceleration ease up on the accelerator and apply as little throttle as possible Be sure to adapt your speed and driving to the prevailing road conditions ELECTRONIC STABILITY PROGRAM ESP IF EQUIPPED WARNING The ESP Electronic Stability Program cannot pre vent the natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle nor can it increase the traction afforded by prevailing road conditions The ESP cannot prevent accidents including those resulting from excessive speed in turns driving on very slippery surfaces or hydroplaning Only a safe attentive a
307. ous Overloading can cause tire failure affect vehicle handling and increase your stopping distance Use tires of the recommended load capacity for your vehicle Never overload them e Under inflation increases tire flexing and can result in tire failure TIRES GENERAL INFORMATION e Over inflation reduces a tire s ability to cushion shock Objects on the road and chuckholes can cause damage that result in tire failure Tire Pressure Proper tire inflation pressure is essential to the safe and satisfactory operation of your vehicle Three primary areas are affected by improper tire pressure e Unequal tire pressures can cause steering prob lems You could lose control of your vehicle Over inflated or under inflated tires can affect vehicle handling and can fail suddenly resulting in loss of vehicle control e Unequal tire pressures from one side of the vehicle to the other can cause the vehicle to drift to the right or left e Always drive with each tire inflated to the recom mended cold tire inflation pressure ee STARTING AND OPERATING 245 2110000 Tire Placard Location The pressure should be checked and adjusted as well as inspecting for signs of tire wear or visible damage at least once a month Use a good quality pocket type gauge to check tire pressure Do not make a visual judgement when determining proper inflation Radial tires may look properly inflated even when they are under inf
308. pension components do not necessarily increase the vehicle s GVWR Loading To load your vehicle properly first figure out its empty weight axle by axle and side by side Store heavier items down low and be sure you distribute their weight as evenly as possible Stow all loose items securely before e Month Day and Hour of Manufacture MDH The bar code allows a computer scanner to read the Vehicle Identification Number VIN Gross Vehicle Weight Rating GVWR The GVWR is the total allowable weight of your vehicle This includes driver passengers and cargo The total load must be limited so that you do not exceed the GVWR Gross Axle Weight Rating GAWR The GAWR is the maximum capacity of the front and rear axles Distribute the load over the front and rear axles evenly Make sure that you do not exceed either front or rear GAWR WARNING Because the front wheels steer the vehicle it is important that you do not exceed the maximum front or rear GAWR A dangerous driving condition can result if either rating is exceeded You could lose control of the vehicle and have an accident ee STARTING AND OPERATING 269 EXAMPLE ONLY Front Rear Axle Axle Empty Weight 2054 lbs 1805 Ibs 932 kg 819 kg Load Including driver pas 271 579 E sengers and cargo 123 kg 263 kg Total 2325 o 2384 a 1055 kg 1081 kg GAWR 2546 Ibs 2708 lbs 1155 kg 1228 kg NOTE Refer to the Vehicle Certification Lab
309. plugged into the AUX jack using a standard 3 5 mm stereo audio cable and the user presses and releases the MODE button until AUX appears on the display NOTE The radio will return to the last stored mode if the ignition switch is turned from the OFF LOCK posi tion to the ACC position the radio is turned on and the radio was previously in the AUX mode SEEK Button Auxiliary Mode No function MUTE Button Auxiliary Mode Press the MUTE button to cancel the sound from the speakers MUTE will display Press the MUTE button a ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 167 SALES CODE RAK AM FM CASSETTE CD 6 DISC RADIO WITH OPTIONAL SATELLITE RADIO HANDS FREE PHONE VIDEO MP3 and WMA CAPABILITIES NOTE The radio sales code is located on the lower right side of your radio faceplate QT ET ED E SIBE MP 51320 RAK Radio Mode Button Auxiliary Mode Press the mode button repeatedly to select between the CD player and Satellite Radio if equipped Operating Instructions Hands Free Phone If Equipped Refer to the HANDS FREE PHONE UConnect section of the Owner s Manual Operating Instructions Satellite Radio If Equipped Refer to the Satellite Radio section of the Owner s Manual 168 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 000 131 9 Press the right side of the button to seek up and the left side to seek down The radio will remained tuned to the new station until you make another se
310. pro hibited in Federal and California reformulated gasolines 9 11 lt 3393993 gt gt 5 5 6 5 5 1 11 STARTING AND 0 260 e Do not inhale exhaust gases They contain carbon monoxide a colorless and odorless gas which can kill Never run the engine in a closed area such as a garage and never sit in a parked vehicle with the engine running for an extended period If the vehicle is stopped in an open area with the engine running for more than a short period adjust the ventilation system to force fresh outside air into the vehicle Guard against carbon monoxide with proper mainte nance Have the exhaust system inspected every time the vehicle is raised Have any abnormal conditions repaired promptly Until repaired drive with all side windows fully open Keep the trunk closed when driving your vehicle to prevent carbon monoxide and other poisonous ex haust gases from entering the vehicle malfunctioning and may require immediate service Contact your dealer for service assistance e The use of fuel additives which are now being sold as octane enhancers are not recommended Most of these products contain high concentrations of methanol Fuel system damage or vehicle performance problems resulting from the use of such fuels or additives are not the responsibility of the manufacturer NOTE Intentional tampering with emissions control systems can result
311. r Courtesy Reading Lights W5W Rear Compartment Liftgate Light 578 Overhead Console Reading Lights 578 Visor Vanity Lights 55450444 adiu 9 4 0 6 94s A6220 Glove BOC Lioni ovens Gaede erate Hac ar SORRY 194 23007000657 sec shu ney tek ase de Pel AER A 562 Shift Indicator Light JKLE14140 NOTE For lighted switches see your dealer for re placement instructions All of the interior bulbs are glass wedge base or glass cartridge types Aluminum base bulbs are not approved and should not be used for replacement VEHICLE STORAGE If you are leaving your vehicle dormant for more than 21 days you may want to take steps to protect your battery You may e Disconnect the negative cable from the battery e Anytime you store your vehicle or keep it out of service i e vacation for two weeks or more run the air conditioning system at idle for about five minutes in the fresh air and high blower setting This will insure adequate system lubrication to minimize the possibility of compressor damage when the system is started again ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 345 2 Twist the appropriate bulb and socket assembly counter clockwise and then pull it out of the headlight assembly 3 Pull the bulb out of the socket assembly 4 Push the replacement bulb into the socket assembly 5 Reinstall the bulb and socket assembly into the head light assembly and then turn it clockwise
312. r equipped with a hydraulic surge actuated brake system an electronic brake controller is not required Trailer brakes are recommended for trailers over 1 000 Ibs 454 Kg and required for trailers in excess of 2 000 Ibs 907 kg spare tire Proper tire inflation pressures are essential to the safe and satisfactory operation of your vehicle Refer to the Tires General Information in this section for infor mation on tire pressures and for proper tire inflation procedures Also check the trailer tires for proper tire inflation pressures before trailer usage Check for signs of tire wear or visible tire damage before towing a trailer Refer to Tires General Infor mation in this section for information on tread wear indicators and for the proper inspection procedure CAUTION When replacing tires refer to Tires General Informa If the trailer weighs more than 1 000 Ibs 454 kg loaded it should have its own brakes and they should be of adequate capacity Failure to do this could lead to accelerated brake lining wear higher brake pedal effort and longer stopping distances tion in this section for information on replacement tires and for the proper tire replacement procedures Replacing tires with a higher load carrying capacity will not increase the vehicles GVWR and GAWR limits STARTING AND OPERATING 9 WARNING The electrical connections are all complete to the vehicle but you must mate the harness
313. r hitch utilized Ihis requirement may limit the ability to always achieve the 10 to 15 range of tongue weight as a percentage of total trailer weight Perform the maintenance listed in Section 8 of this manual When towing a trailer never exceed the GAWR or GCWR ratings WARNING Improper towing can lead to an injury accident Follow these guidelines to make your trailer towing as safe as possible Make certain that the load is secured in the trailer and will not shift during travel When trailering cargo that is not fully secured dynamic load shifts can occur that may be difficult for the driver to control You could lose control of your vehicle and have an accident e When hauling cargo or towing a trailer do not overload your vehicle or trailer Overloading can cause a loss of control poor performance or damage to brakes axle engine transmission steering suspen sion chassis structure or tires 278 STARTING AND OPERATING 8 8 8 4 3 72 3 0 Towing Requirements Tires Towing Requirements Trailer Brakes Do not attempt to tow a trailer while using a compact Do not interconnect the hydraulic brake system or vacuum system of your vehicle with that of the trailer This could cause inadequate braking and possible personal injury An electronically actuated trailer brake controller is required when towing a trailer with electronically actuated brakes When towing a traile
314. r vehicle is equipped with a sophisticated onboard diagnostic system called OBD II This system monitors the performance of the emissions engine and automatic transmission control systems When these systems are operating properly your vehicle will provide excellent performance and fuel economy as well as engine emis sions well within current government regulations If any of these systems require service the OBD II system will turn on the Malfunction Indicator Light It will also store diagnostic codes and other information to assist your service technician in making repairs Al though your vehicle will usually be drivable and not need towing see your dealer for service as soon as possible A MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 7 Your vehicle has a simple ignition key actuated test which you can use prior to going to the test station To check if your vehicle s OBD system is ready you must do the following 1 Insert your ignition key into the ignition switch 2 Turn the ignition to the ON position but do not crank or start the engine 3 If you crank or start the engine you will have to start this test over 4 As soon as you turn your key to the ON position you will see your MIL symbol come on as part of a normal bulb check 5 Approximately 15 seconds later one of two things will happen a The MIL will flash for about 10 seconds and then return to being fully illuminated until you turn off the ignition key or star
315. rbon monoxide emissions Fuels blended with these oxygenates may be used in your vehicle CAUTION DO NOT use gasolines containing Methanol or E85 Ethanol Use of these blends may result in starting and driveability problems and may damage critical fuel system components Light spark knock at low engine speeds is not harmful to your engine However continued heavy spark knock at high speeds can cause damage and immediate service is required Poor quality gasoline can cause problems such as hard starting stalling and hesitations If you experience these symptoms try another brand of regular gasoline be fore considering service for the vehicle Over 40 automobile manufacturers around the world have issued and endorsed consistent gasoline specifica tions the World Wide Fuel Charter WWFC which define fuel properties necessary to deliver enhanced emissions engine performance and durability for your vehicle The manufacturer recommends the use of gaso lines that meet the WWEC specifications if they are available Reformulated Gasoline Many areas of the country require the use of cleaner burning gasoline referred to as Reformulated Gasoline ee STARTING AND OPERATING 263 Materials Added to Fuel All gasoline sold in the United States is required to contain effective detergent additives Use of additional detergents or other additives are not needed under normal conditions and they would result in additional cost
316. readwear grade is a comparative rating based on the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled con ditions on a specified government test course For ex ample a tire graded 150 would wear one and a half 1 1 2 times as well on the government course as a tire graded 100 The relative performance of tires depends upon the actual conditions of their use however and may depart significantly from the norm due to variations in driving habits service practices and differences in road characteristics and climate Traction Grades The traction grades from highest to lowest are AA A B and C Those grades represent the tire s ability to stop on wet pavement as measured under controlled conditions on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and concrete A tire marked C may have poor traction perfor mance 380 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 4 7903 9 7 WARNINCG The temperature grade for this tire is established for a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded Excessive speed under inflation or excessive load ing either separately or in combination can cause heat buildup and possible tire failure INDEX 2 2 3 _ INDEX 0 6 9 382 Alignment and Balance 201 All Wheel Drive AWD 229 991 Alterations Modifications Vehicle 7 Antenna Satellite Radio 187
317. reducing this 324 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 7 Please note that it is the owner s responsibility to main tain the proper level of protection against freezing ac cording to the temperatures occurring in the area where the vehicle is operated NOTE Mixing coolant types will decrease the life of the engine coolant and will require more frequent coolant changes Cooling System Pressure Cap The cap must be fully tightened to prevent loss of coolant and to insure that coolant will return to the radiator from the coolant recovery bottle The cap should be inspected and cleaned if there is any accumulation of foreign material on the sealing surfaces extended maintenance period it is important that you use the same coolant throughout the life of your vehicle Please review these recommendations for using Hybrid Organic Additive Technology HOAT coolant When adding coolant e The manufacturer recommends using Mopar Antifreeze Coolant 5 Year 100 000 Mile Formula HOAT Hybrid Organic Additive Technology e Mix a minimum solution of 50 HOAT engine coolant and distilled water Use higher concentrations not to exceed 70 if temperatures below 34 F 37 C are anticipated e Use only high purity water such as distilled or deion ized water when mixing the water engine coolant solution The use of lower quality water will reduce the amount of corrosion protection in the engine cooling system
318. release the SCAN button if equipped to automatically change channels every 7 seconds The radio will pause on each channel for 7 seconds before moving on to the next channel The word SCAN will appear in the display between each channel change Press the SCAN button a second time to stop the search NOTE Channels that may contain objectionable con tent can be blocked Contact Sirius Customer Care at 888 539 7474 to discuss options for channel blocking or unblocking Please have your ESN SID information available Storing and Selecting Pre Set Channels In addition to the 12 AM and 12 FM pre set stations you may also commit 12 satellite stations to push button memory These satellite channel pre set stations will not A UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 187 e Placing objects over or too close to the antenna can cause signal blockage REMOTE SOUND SYSTEM CONTROLS The remote sound system controls are located on the surface of the steering wheel at the 3 and 9 o clock positions d185c384 Electronic Vehicle Information Center Vehicles equipped with steering wheel mounted buttons are also equipped with the Electronic Vehicle Information PTY Button SEEK When the desired program is obtained press the SEEK button within five seconds The channel will change to the next channel that matches the program type selected Satellite Antenna To ensure optimum reception do not place items on the roof around the rooftop
319. rer s recommended fluid may cause deterio ration in transmission shift quality and or torque converter shudder Using a transmission fluid other than that recommended by the manufac turer will result in more frequent fluid and filter changes Refer to Fluids Lubricants and Genu ine Parts for the correct fluid type The fluid level is preset at the factory and it does not require adjustment under normal operating conditions If a transmission fluid leak occurs visit your authorized dealer immediately Severe damage to the transmission may occur Your au thorized dealer has the proper tools to adjust the fluid level accurately Fluid and Filter Changes Automatic transmission fluid and filter should be changed as follows Normal Usage No change necessary the brake fluid all brake seal components could be damaged causing partial or complete brake failure Automatic Transmission Fluid Level Check Regular automatic transmission fluid level checks are not required For this reason the dipstick is omitted If you notice fluid loss or gear shift malfunction have your authorized dealer check the transmission fluid level ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 331 All Wheel Drive AWD If Equipped The all wheel drive system consists of a Transfer Case and Front Differential The exterior surface of these components should be inspected for evidence of fluid leaks Confirmed leaks should be repaired as soon as possible
320. ressure cap other than the one specified for your vehicle Personal injury or engine damage may result 326 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 7 1 8 999999098 8 0 0 0 09 If frequent coolant additions are required or if the level in the coolant recovery bottle does not drop when the engine cools the cooling system should be pres sure tested for leaks Maintain coolant concentration at 5076 HOAT engine coolant minimum and distilled water for proper corrosion protection of your engine which contains aluminum components Make sure that the radiator and coolant recovery bottle overflow hoses are not kinked or obstructed Keep the front of the radiator clean If your vehicle is equipped with air conditioning keep the front of the condenser clean also Do not change the thermostat for summer or winter operation If replacement is ever necessary install ONLY the correct type thermostat Other designs may result in unsatisfactory coolant performance poor gas mileage and increased emissions When additional coolant is needed to maintain the proper level it should be added to the coolant bottle Do not overfill Points To Remember NOTE When the vehicle is stopped after a few miles kilometers of operation you may observe vapor coming from the front of the engine compartment This is nor mally a result of moisture from rain snow or high humidity accumulating on the radiator and being vapor ized when the thermostat opens al
321. restraint without using the vehicle s seat belts instead securing ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 55 m The rear seat lower anchorages are round bars SR located at the rear of the seat cushion where it meets the seat back and are just visible when you lean into the rear seat to install the child restraint You will easily feel them if you run your finger along the intersection of the seatback and seat cushion surfaces In addition there are tether strap anchorages located behind each rear seat back Many but not all restraint systems will be equipped with separate straps on each side with each having a hook or connector for attachment to the lower anchorage and a means of adjusting the tension in the strap Forward facing toddler restraints and some rear facing infant restraints will also be equipped with a tether strap a hook for attachment to the tether strap anchorage and a means of adjusting the tension of the strap You will first loosen the adjusters on the lower straps and on the tether strap so that you can more easily attach the hooks or connectors to the vehicle anchorages Next attach the lower hooks or connectors over the top of the seat cover material Then rotate the tether anchorage rear seating positions or if your child restraints are not LATCH compatible install the restraints using the vehi cle s seat belts r r 7 1 er TERR ER a nnnm M poe LATCH
322. restraint systems Please pay close attention to the information in this section It tells you how to use your restraint system properly to keep you and your passengers as safe as possible WARNING In a collision you and your passengers can suffer much greater injuries if you are not properly buck led up You can strike the interior of your vehicle or other passengers or you can be thrown out of the vehicle Always be sure you and others in your vehicle are buckled up properly 34 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 0000 99 6 08 9 WARNING Lap Shoulder Belt Operating Instructions 1 Enter the vehicle and close the door Sit back and adjust the front seat It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area inside or outside of a vehicle In a collision people riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously 2 The seat belt latch plate is above the back of your seat 00 0 Grasp the latch plate and pull out the belt Slide the latch Do not allow people to ride in any area of your plate up the webbing as far as necessary to make the belt go around your lap vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat belts Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and using a seat belt properly Wearing a seat belt incorrectly is dangerous Seat belts are designed to go around the large bones of your body These are the strongest parts of your body and can
323. return the sound from the speakers SCAN Button CD Mode Press this button to play the first 10 seconds of each track To stop the scan function press the button a second time EJECT Button CD Mode Press this button and the disc will unload and move to the entrance for easy removal The unit will switch to the last selected mode If you do not remove the disc within 15 seconds it will be reloaded The radio mode will continue to appear 166 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 9 9 second time and the sound from the speakers will return Rotating the volume control or turning OFF the ignition will also return the sound from the speakers SCAN Button Auxiliary Mode No function EJECT Button Auxiliary Mode No function h PSCAN Button Auxiliary Mode No function TIME Button Auxiliary Mode Press this button to change the display from elapsed playing time to time of day The time of day will display for 5 seconds RW FF Auxiliary Mode No function RND SET Button Auxiliary Mode No function Press the RND button a second time to stop Random Play Operation Instructions Auxiliary Mode The auxiliary AUX jack is an audio input jack which allows the user to plug in a portable device such as an MP3 player cassette player or microphone and utilize the vehicle s audio system to amplify the source and play through the vehicle speakers The auxiliary mode becomes active when an electrical device is
324. ronic Ve hicle Information Center EVIC in Section 4 of this manual Electrical Disturbances Radio waves may pick up electrical disturbances during transmission They mainly affect the wave amplitude and thus remain a part of the AM reception They interfere very little with the frequency variations that carry the FM signal AM Reception AM sound is based on wave amplitude so AM reception can be disrupted by such things as lightning power lines and neon signs FM Reception Because FM transmission is based on frequency varia tions interference that consists of amplitude variations can be filtered out leaving the reception relatively clear which is the major feature of FM radio 1 1 gt UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 1 Operating Instructions Radio Mode NOTE The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC position to operate the radio Power Switch Volume Control Rotary Press the ON VOL control to turn the radio ON Press the ON VOL a second time to turn OFF the radio Electronic Volume Control The electronic volume control turns continuously 360 degrees in either direction without stopping Turning the volume control to the right increases the volume and to the left decreases it When the audio system is turned on the sound will be set at the same volume level as last played For your convenience the volume can be turned down but not up when the audio
325. ructions Auxiliary Mode 166 OPinch Roller RECA uus Sore orf ea dee dw d 172 O Operating Instructions Hands Free Phone If NOISE 1160106116010 ss sese reaps asad oeii PS 172 5 079 444457 eyes eu 167 4 Operation Instructions CD Mode For CD O Operating Instructions Satellite Radio If MUCHO Play oou sep d vus yq ee ie are p a ws 172 511072 errape sheet ees d Ead ER 167 D Load Eject Button CD Mode For CD ll Sales Code RAK AM FM Cassette CD 6 Disc A dio Play eius eure are eee dias m dd 173 Radio With Optional Satellite Radio Hands Free Phone Video MP3 And WMA Capabilities 167 o Notes On Playing MP3 Files 175 l D Operation Instructions CD Mode For MP3 O Operating Instructions Radio Mode 168 And WMA Audio Play 177 O Operating Instructions Tape Player 171 o Load Eject Button CD Mode For MP3 And Hoe DOUNON aod 9 oboe 545 sub teense 171 WMA PIY a a 9s eee ee T O Fast Forward FF 171 HW Sales Code REC AM FM CD 6 Disc B Rewind RW 0 cece cece eee ce eee 171 Radio With Navigation System 179 O Operating Instructions Satellite Radio If WEM MCCC rr 172 pu 9000 7 179 205060777771600 RU dede 172 D REC Setting The Clock 179 re 172 Changing Tape Direction ss 1016 Clock Displa
326. rve the minimize the loss of air pressure This contributes to the following precautions safety of the vehicle by significantly reducing the prob e Because of restricted chain clearance between tires ability of a roadside stop due to a flat tire and other suspension components it is important that only chains in good condition are used Broken TIRE CHAINS chains can cause serious damage Stop the vehicle Use only compact chains or other traction aids that meet immediately if noise occurs that could indicate chain SAE type Class S specifications Chains must be the breakage Remove the damaged parts of the chain before further use proper size for the vehicle as recommended by the chain Install chains on the rear wheels as tightly as pos manufacturer sible and then retighten after driving about Y mile NOTE Do not use tire chains on a compact spare tire 0 8 km Do not exceed 30 mph 48 km h Drive cautiously and avoid severe turns and large bumps especially with a loaded vehicle Use on Rear Wheels only Do not drive for prolonged period on dry pavement Observe the tire chain manufacturer s instructions on the method of installation operating speed and con ditions for use Always use the lower suggested operating speed of the chain manufacturer if different from the speed recommended by the manufacture ee STARTING AND OPERATING 253 Snow tires generally have lower speed ratings than what was originall
327. ry booster cables may be used to obtain a do not allow the vehicles to touch one another start from another vehicle This type of start can be danger WARNING ous if done improperly so follow this procedure carefully Battery fluid is a corrosive acid solution do not allow Do not permit vehicles to touch each other as this battery fluid to contact eyes skin or clothing Don t lean over battery when attaching clamps or allow the clamps to touch each other If acid splashes in eyes or on skin flush contaminated area immediately with large quantities of water A battery generates hydrogen gas which is flammable and explosive Keep flame or spark away from the vent holes Do not use a booster battery or any other booster source with an output that exceeds 12 volts The battery in this vehicle has a vent hose that should not be disconnected and should only be replaced with a battery of the same type vented could establish a ground connection and personal injury could result 1 _ gt 7 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 295 Jump Starting 3 Set the parking brake place the automatic transmis sion in PARK and turn the ignition switch to the OFF or LOCK position on both vehicles 4 Turn off the heater radio and all unnecessary electri cal loads 5 Connect one end of the jumper cable to the remote jump start positive battery post in the eng
328. ry to the child Use only the anchor positions directly behind the child seat to secure a child restraint top tether strap Transporting Pets Airbags deploying in the front seat could harm your pet An unrestrained pet will be thrown about and possibly injured or injure a passenger during panic braking or in a collision Pets should be restrained in the rear seat in pet harnesses or pet carriers that are secured by seat belts To attach a child restraint tether strap 1 Route the tether strap to provide the most direct path for the strap between the anchor and the child seat uu Ht ET Tether Strap Mounting 2 Attach the tether strap hook of the child restraint to the tether anchor and remove slack in the tether strap according to the child restraint manufacturer s instruc tions eee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 59 A new engine may consume some oil during its first few thousand miles kilometers of operation This should be considered as a normal part of the break in and not interpreted as an indication of difficulty SAFETY TIPS Transporting Passengers NEVER TRANSPORT PASSENGERS IN THE CARGO AREA WARNINCG It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area inside or outside of a vehicle In a collision people riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously injured or killed Do not allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat
329. s 72 liters 5 7 liters 5 7 liters 6 6 liters 9 4 liters 10 5 liters 10 8 liters 13 9 liters 14 3 liters c Un 18 gallons 18 gallons 19 gallons 19 gallons 6 0 qts 6 0 qts 7 0 qts 9 9 dts 11 1 qts 11 4 qts 14 7 qts 15 1 qts 350 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 0 07 1 0 2 00 FLUIDS AND CAPACITIES Fuel approximate 2 7 Liter Engine 3 5 Liter Engine without All Wheel Drive 3 5 Liter Engine with All Wheel Drive 5 7 Liter Engine Engine Oil With Filter 2 7 Liter Engine SAE 5W 20 API Certified 3 5 Liter Engine SAE 10W 30 API Certified 5 7 Liter Engine SAE 5W 20 API Certified Cooling System 2 7 Liter Engine Mopar Antifreeze Coolant 5 Year 100 000 Mile Formula or equivalent 3 5 Liter Engine without All Wheel Drive Mopar Antifreeze Coolant 5 Year 100 000 Mile Formula or equivalent 3 5 Liter Engine with All Wheel Drive Mopar Antifreeze Coolant 5 Year 100 000 Mile Formula or equivalent 5 7 Liter Engine without Severe Duty II Cooling System Mopar Antifreeze Coolant 5 Year 100 000 Mile Formula or equivalent 5 7 Liter Engine with Severe Duty II Cooling System Mopar Antifreeze Coolant 5 Year 100 000 Mile Formula or equivalent Includes heater and coolant recovery bottle filled to MAX level A MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 351 FLUIDS LUBRICANTS AND GENUINE PARTS Engine Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts Engine Coolant Mopar Antifreeze Coolant 5 Year 100
330. s not come on during starting 142 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 0 0 7 1 1 77 0 10 Airbag Warning Light This light will turn on for 6 to 8 seconds as a bulb check when the ignition switch is first turned ON If the light is either not on during starting or stays on or turns on while driving then have the system inspected at your authorized dealer as soon as possible See page 49 for more information 11 Engine Temperature Warning Light This light will turn on and a single chime will sound to warn of an overheated engine condi tion When this light turns on the engine tem perature is critically hot The vehicle should be turned off immediately and serviced as soon as possible See page 284 for more information unl land 12 Electronic Stability Program ESP Traction Control System TCS Indicator Light If Equipped If this indicator light flashes during accelera tion ease up on the accelerator and apply as little throttle as possible Adapt your speed WARNING A hot engine cooling system is dangerous You or others could be badly burned by steam or boiling coolant You may want to call a service center if your vehicle overheats If you decide to look under the hood yourself see Section 7 of this manual Follow the warnings under the Cooling System Pressure Cap paragraph 9 Turn Signal Indicators The arrow will flash with the exterior turn signal
331. s prop erly positioned and fully latched Failure to do so may allow water to get into the Power Distribu tion Center and possibly result in a electrical system failure PPP When replacing a blown fuse it is important to use only a fuse having the correct amperage rating The use of a fuse with a rating other than indicated may result in a dangerous electrical system overload If a properly rated fuse contin ues to blow it indicates a problem in the circuit that must be corrected 31 384106 Opening The Access Panel 0 72 7 7 gt 99 99 0 0 90 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 340 Cavity Car Mini Description tridge Fuse Fuse 1 60Amp Ignition Off Draw IOD Yellow 2 40 Amp battery Green 3 40 Amp battery Green 5 30 Amp Heated Seats if Pink equipped Rear Power Distribution Center iu LU FUPLBUND 7 8 15 Amp Ignition Switch Airbag Blue Control Module ACM 9 20 Amp Console Power Outlet Yellow 10 11 12 m ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 341 Cavity Car Mini Description Cavity Car Mini Description tridge Fuse tridge Fuse Fuse Fuse 139 24 14 10 Amp AC Heater Control 20 Red Cluster Sentry Key Re 26 7 27 10 Amp Airbag Airbag Control 15 20 Amp Trailer Tow Brake Mod Red Module AC
332. s recommended Refer to Maintenance Procedures in Section 7 of this manual for proper coolant selection Winter Operation Use of the air Recirculation mode during winter months is not recommended because it may cause window fogging Vacation Storage Anytime you store your vehicle or keep it out of service i e vacation for two weeks or more run the air condi tioning system at idle for about five minutes in the fresh air and high blower setting This will insure adequate NOTE 1o control the air conditioning manually the mode selector must be moved out of the AUTO position e Recirculation Control This button can be used to block out smoke c odors dust high humidity or if rapid cooling is desired The recirculation mode should only be used temporarily An LED in the button illuminates when the recirculation mode is active You may use this feature separately NOTE Extended use of recirculation may cause the windows to fog If the interior of the windows begins to fog press the Recirculation button to return to outside air Some temp humidity conditions will cause captured interior air to condense on windows and hamper visibil ity For this reason the system will not allow Recircula tion to be selected while in defrost or defrost floor mode Attempting to use the recirculation while in these modes will cause the LED in the control button to blink and then turn off m UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 9 Outsid
333. sage turns off The compass will now function normally Compass Variance Compass Variance is the difference between magnetic North and Geographic North In some areas of the country the difference between magnetic and geographic North is great enough to cause the compass to give false readings If this occurs the compass variance must be set using the following procedure NOTE Magnetic materials should be kept away from the overhead console This is where the compass sensor is located Compass Display The compass readings indicate the direction the vehicle is facing Press and release the compass button to display one of eight com CoM pass readings and the outside temperature PASS Button Automatic Compass Calibration This compass is self calibrating which eliminates the need to set the compass manually When the vehicle is new the compass may appear erratic and the EVIC will display CAL until the compass is calibrated You may also calibrate the compass by completing one or more 360 turns in an area free from large metal or metallic objects until the CAL message displayed in the EVIC turns off The compass will now function normally Manual Compass Calibration If the compass appears erratic and the CAL message does not appear in the EVIC display you must put the compass into the Calibration Mode manually as follows 1 Turn on the ignition switch 154 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
334. selected track Radio display will show EJECTING DISC when the disc is being ejected and prompt the user to remove the disc Press and hold the LOAD EJT button for 5 seconds and all CDs will be ejected from the radio If you have ejected a disc and have not removed it within 15 seconds it will be reloaded If the CD is not removed the radio will continue to play the non removed CD If the CD is removed and there are other CD s in the radio the radio will play the next CD after a 2 minute timeout If the CD is removed and there are no other CD s in the radio the radio will remain in CD mode and display INSERT DISC for 2 minutes After 2 minutes the radio will go to the previous tuner mode The disc can be ejected with the radio and ignition OFF TIME Button CD MODE for CD Audio Play Press this button to change the display from a large CD playing time display to a small CD playing time display eee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 175 files properly and may be unable to play the file nor mally UDF and Apple HFS formats are not supported The radio uses the following limits for file systems e Maximum number of directory levels 15 e Maximum number of files 255 e Maximum number of folders 100 e Maximum number of characters in file folder names e Level 1 12 including a separator and a 3 character extension e Level 2 31 including a separator and a 3 character extension Multisession disc formats
335. sher is operated by the rear wiper washer switch The switch is located near the top center of the instrument panel To use the rear washer push the right side of the rear wiper washer switch in and hold while spray is desired maximum spray of 10 seconds The rear wiper operates for 2 wipe cycles after the switch is released REAR WINDOW FEATURES Rear Wiper Operation The rear wiper is operated by the rear wiper washer switch The switch is located near the top center of the instrument panel An indicator in the switch Rear Wiper Washer Switch To use the rear wiper push the left side of the rear wiper washer switch in and release 202 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 0080909 909 9 294 8 7 The washer fluid reservoir will hold a full gallon of fluid when the message Low Washer Fluid appears in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC if equipped WARNINCG Commercially available windshield washer solvents are flammable They could ignite and burn you Care must be exercised when filling or working around the washer solution Electric Rear Window Defroster The electric Rear Window Defroster Control is located on the climate control Press this button to turn on the rear window defroster and the heated side mirrors if equipped An LED in the button will illumi nate when the rear window defroster is ON The de froster automatically turns off after approximately 10 minutes of operation for
336. should sit in seats and placard is located on either the driver s side B pillar or use seat belts the driver door 130 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M 3 Repeat Steps 1 and 2 on the opposite clamp on the other side of the crossbar 4 Pick up the crossbar and move it to the desired location Do not place the crossbar directly over the sunroof glass if equipped 5 Turn the lower clamp until the round side of the clamp completely faces the side rail 6 Turn the lever clockwise to tighten the lower clamp to the side rail When tight flip the lever downward 7 Repeat Steps 5 and 6 on the opposite clamp on the other side of the crossbar 8 Attempt to move the crossbar to ensure that it is locked in position NOTE To reduce the amount of wind noise when the crossbars are not in use remove both crossbars from the side rails and place them inside the vehicle To adjust remove or install the crossbars proceed as follows 61346655 mp Roof Luggage Rack cee oD og 1 Flip the lever on the end of the crossbar upward 2 Turn the lever counter clockwise to loosen the lower clamp When the lower clamp is loose turn it until the round side of the clamp completely faces away from the side rail E UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 131 CAUTION WARNING e To avoid damage to the roof rack and vehicle do not Cargo must be securely tied before driving your exceed the maximum roof rack l
337. signal The Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC fea tures a driver interactive display which includes HomeLink system messages The EVIC is located in the instrument cluster below the speedometer 815394 Electronic Vehicle Information Center 2 6 gt gt UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 112 3 Simultaneously press and hold the HomeLink button that you want to train and the hand held transmitter button Do not release the buttons until Step 4 is complete NOTE Some gate operators and garage door openers may require you to replace this Programming Step 3 with procedures noted under Gate Operator Canadian Pro gramming 4 The EVIC will display Channel X Training where X is Channel 1 2 or 3 Release both buttons after the EVIC displays Channel X Trained NOTE If the EVIC displays Did Not Train repeat Steps 2 4 5 Press and hold the just trained HomeLink button and observe the EVIC display If the EVIC displays Channel X Transmit where X is Channel 1 2 or 3 then programming is complete and your device should acti vate when the HomeLink button is pressed and released NOTE To program the remaining two HomeLink but tons begin with Programming Step 2 Do not repeat Step 1 1 Press and hold the two outer HomeLink butt
338. sing your cell phone Press the Phone button to place the current call 78 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 7 00080980 00 910 999 08 Redial e Press the Phone button to begin e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Redial e The UConnect system will call the last number that was dialed on your cellular phone Note this may not be the last number dialed from the UConnect sys tem Call Continuation Call continuation is progression of a phone call on UConnect system after the vehicle ignition key has been switched to off Call continuation functionality available on the vehicle can be any one of three types e After ignition key is switched off a call can continue on the UConnect system either until the call ends or until the vehicle battery condition dictates cessation of the call on the UConnect system and transfer of the call to the mobile phone indicating that the active and hold status of the two calls have switched Only one call can be placed on hold at one time Conference Call When two calls are in progress one active and one on hold press and hold the Phone button until you hear a double beep indicating that the two calls have been joined into one conference call Three Way Calling To initiate three way calling press the Voice Recogni tion button while a call is in progress and make a second phone call as described under Making a Sec
339. ss your thighs below your abdomen To remove slack in the lap belt portion pull up a bit on the shoulder belt To loosen the lap belt if it is too tight tilt the latch plate and pull on the lap belt A snug belt reduces the risk of sliding under the belt in a collision eedem A ae PC Ca ee Removing Slack From Bel ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 7 activated To reset this feature you must let all of the belt webbing return into the retractor You will not be able to pull out more webbing until all of the webbing has been returned back into the retractor WARNING The rear center lap shoulder belt is equipped with a lock out feature to ensure that the rear seat back is in the fully upright and locked position when occu pied If the rear seat back is not fully upright and locked and the rear center lap shoulder belt can be pulled out of the retractor the vehicle should imme diately be taken to your dealer for service Failure to follow this warning could result in serious or fatal injury Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt Anchorage In the driver and front passenger seats the shoulder belt can be adjusted upward or downward to position the belt away from your neck Push and fully depress the button above the webbing to release the anchorage and then move it up or down to the position that serves you best WARNING A frayed or torn belt could rip apart in a collision and leave
340. st priority You can pair up to seven cellular phones to 74 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 3 7 4 798 0 00000 07 Add Names to Your UConnect Phonebook NOTE Adding names to phonebook is recommended when vehicle is not in motion e Press the Phone button to begin e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Phonebook New Entry e When prompted say the name of the new entry Use of long names helps the voice recognition and is recom mended For example say Robert Smith or Robert instead of Bob e When prompted enter the number designation e g Home Work Mobile or Pager This will allow you to store multiple numbers for each phonebook entry if desired e When prompted recite the phone number for the phonebook entry that you are adding After you are finished adding an entry into the phone book you will be given the opportunity to add more phone numbers to the current entry or to return to the main menu e The UConnect system will confirm the phone num ber and then dial The number will appear in the display of certain radios Call Dial by Saying a Name e Press the Phone button to begin e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Dial or Call e System will prompt you to say the name of the person you want call e After the Ready prompt and the following beep
341. stable Upper Shoulder Anchorage 37 Service Engine Soon Light Malfunction And Diessant WOMEN 3223 ex raei aU 1041896077 us 2 quos oux EISE CCAS 147 Child Restraint 51 53 56 Service Manuals eee 377 CCT 222 3 9 255829 95 5 8 m ada 41 SENG He CIO 32 99 6999 godess 162 168 179 Front Seat 1254 4 he aeebuex ek ee ws 33 34 Settings Personal 25 ede eR Ps 156 Operating Instructions saa aeeawedae ss ae OF SHUG CI oe 211 Pretensioners eee 38 Automatic Transmission 211 214 219 Icio c eek ge E 33 Shoulder bel Upper Anchorage 37 15 86 7 8467 PPP 140 Shoulder BEME 2 2 8e seras Bae NOUO Ee ee 33 Untwisting Procedure sas 3 Sadun eae ES 90 SONIBAAIIDUS coded dee Pd Ped te eeaes 47 cc SSIES CLC SNES LSS 69 51211915 TUNI rass ome dragon d dendo 99 142 722011075006007 PP 89 Slippery Surfaces Driving On 224 BENO 64 646 94 sec ae eae eeu 7 bss 92 Snow Chains Tire Chains 252 Liat DUD POL cose yan o Soho qe dE 732 517077 71768 Dm 23 POWER 225256050552 oo bose eed cee eae es 90 pate Be os ot ee 824g ent oe 247 248 287 Neat POIO 224244924444 0 454 P IEEE 29 qr tq d ee 314 ReCHMNG E T 91 Speed Control Cruise Control
342. system is off and the ignition is ON Mode Button Radio Mode Press the mode button repeatedly to select between the CD player and Satellite Radio if equipped SALES CODE REF AM FM CD SINGLE DISC RADIO WITH OPTIONAL SATELLITE RADIO AND HANDS FREE PHONE CAPABILITY NOTE The radio sales code is located on the lower right side of your radio faceplate ENSEM OTTO Croc J AS22255 REF Radio EJ 815eb156 162 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 9 0 if equipped frequencies pausing for 5 seconds at each listenable station before continuing to the next To stop the search press SCAN a second time PSCAN Button Radio Mode Pressing the PSCAN button causes the tuner to scan through preset stations in either AM FM or Satellite if equipped frequencies pausing for 5 seconds at each preset station before continuing to the next To stop the search press PSCAN a second time Time Button Press the time button and the time of day will display for 5 seconds Clock Setting Procedure 1 Press and hold the time button until the hours blink 2 Adjust the hours by turning the right side Tune Audio control 3 After the hours are adjusted press the right side Tune Audio control to set the minutes The minutes will begin to blink SEEK Button Radio Mode Press and release the SEEK button to search for the next listenable station in either AM FM or Satellite if equipped mode
343. t e Gross Axle Weight Rating GAWR rear Vehicle Identification Number VIN e Type of Vehicle Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message If the vehicle diagnostic system determines that the fuel filler cap is loose improperly installed or damaged a Check Gascap message will display in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC if equipped If this occurs tighten the fuel filler cap properly and press the odometer reset button to turn off the message If the problem continues the message will appear the next time the vehicle is started A loose improperly installed or damaged fuel filler cap may also turn on the Malfunction Indicator Light MIL Refer to Onboard Diagnostic System in Section 7 of this manual for more information 268 STARTING AND OPERATING 8884849 0 Overloading The load carrying components axle springs tires wheels etc of your vehicle will provide satisfactory service as long as you do not exceed the GVWR and the front and rear GAWR The best way to figure out the total weight of your vehicle is to weigh it when it is fully loaded and ready for operation Weigh it on a commercial scale to insure that it is not over the GVWR Figure out the weight on the front and rear of the vehicle separately It is important that you distribute the load evenly over the front and rear axles Overloading can cause potential safety hazards and shorten useful service life Heavier axles or sus
344. t any time beginning with Pro gramming Step 2 Reprogramming a Single HomeLink Button To program a device a previously trained HomeLink button follow these steps 1 Press and hold the desired HomeLink button Do NOT release the button 2 The EVIC will display Channel X Transmit where X is Channel 1 2 or 3 for 20 seconds and then change to Channel X Training Without releasing the HomeLink button proceed with Programming Step 2 NOTE If programming a garage door opener or gate operator it is advised to unplug the device during the cycling process to prevent possible overheating 3 Continue to press and hold the HomeLink button while you press and release your hand held transmitter every two seconds until the frequency signal is accepted successfully by HomeLink The EVIC will display Chan nel X Trained where X is Channel 1 2 or 3 Proceed with Programming Step 4 to complete the procedure Using HomeLink To operate simply press and release the programmed HomeLink button Activation will now occur for the trained device ie garage door opener gate operator security system entry door lock home office lighting etc For convenience the hand held transmitter of the device may also be used at any time In the event that there are still programming difficulties or questions contact HomeLink at www homelink com or 1 800 355 3515 E UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 115 POWER SUNROOF
345. t equipped with navigation radio the console also contains an extra storage bin located below the climate control which holds up to four CD jewel cases A UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 123 The 60 40 split folding rear seat provides cargo carrying versatility The seatbacks fold down easily by pulling nylon tabs between the seatbacks and the bolsters When the seats are folded down they provide a continuous nearly flat extension of the removable tri fold load floor Tri Fold Upper Load Floor The removable tri fold upper load floor has two different surfaces for increased utility One side is carpeted for a plush appearance and the other side is covered with vinyl for easy cleaning The panel sandwiched between the carpet and the washable vinyl is constructed from a strong lightweight material that gives the floor its load bearing strength You can place the load floor in a partially folded position a fully folded position or a flat position You can also remove it from the vehicle Folding and or removing the load floor will add four inches to the height of the cargo area for increased utility Use the handle to adjust the position of the load floor The load floor positions are shown in the following illustrations 124 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M E x ES E x E E E x E E E x E E E Ey ti
346. t the engine This means that your vehicle s OBD system is not ready and you should not proceed to the I M station A loose improperly installed or damaged fuel filler cap may also turn on the Malfunction Indicator Light MIL EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE PROGRAMS In some localities it may be a legal requirement to pass an inspection of your vehicle s emissions control system Failure to pass could prevent vehicle registration For states which have an I M Inspection and Maintenance requirement this check verifies the following the MIL Malfunction Indicator Lamp is functioning and is not on when the engine is running and that the OBD On Board Diagnostic system is ready for testing Normally the OBD system will be ready The OBD system may not be ready if your vehicle was recently serviced if you recently had a dead battery or a battery replacement If the OBD system should be determined not ready for the I M test your vehicle may fail the test 308 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 03 999 9 0 0 9909 99 7 REPLACEMENT PARTS Use of genuine Mopar parts for normal scheduled maintenance and repairs is highly recommended to in sure the designed performance Damage or failures caused by the use of non Mopar parts for maintenance and repairs will not be covered by the manufacturer s warranty DEALER SERVICE Your dealer has the qualified service personnel special tools and equipment to perform all service operatio
347. tains a comfortable temperature even under changing conditions Operation of the system is quite simple Begin by turning the Mode Control knob on the right to AUTO and place the Blower Control knob on the left to either LO AUTO or HI AUTO The LO AUTO position should be used for front seat occupants only The HI AUTO position should be used when more airflow is desired or when rear seat occupants are present Then dial in the temperature you ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 195 Some temp humidity conditions will cause captured interior air to condense on windows and hamper visibility For this reason the system will not allow Recirculation to be selected while in defrost or defrost floor mode Attempting to use the recircula tion while in these modes will cause the LED in the control button to blink and then turn off Manual Operation This system offers a full complement of manual override features which consist of Blower Preferred Automatic Mode Preferred Automatic or Blower and Mode Pre ferred Automatic This means the operator can override the blower the mode or both There is a manual blower range for times when the AUTO setting is not desired The blower can be set to any fixed blower speed by rotating the Blower Control knob on the left NOTE Please read the Automatic Temperature Control Operation Chart that follows for details The system will automatically control recir culation However pressing the
348. take the forces of a collision the best Wearing your belt in the wrong place could make your injuries in a collision much worse You might suffer internal injuries or you could even slide out of part of the belt Follow these instructions to wear your seat belt safely and to keep your passengers safe too Two people should never be belted into a single seat belt People belted together can crash into one an other in an accident hurting one another badly Never use a lap shoulder belt or a lap belt for more than one person no matter what their size e uu UN i XN 5 Pulling O ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 35 3 When the belt is long enough to fit insert the latch WARNING plate into the buckle until you hear a click e belt that is buckled into the wrong buckle will not protect you properly The lap portion could ride too high on your body possibly causing internal injuries Always buckle your belt into the buckle nearest you e A belt that is too loose will not protect you as well In a sudden stop you could move too far forward increasing the possibility of injury Wear your seat belt snugly e A belt that is worn under your arm is very dangerous Your body could strike the inside sur H faces of the vehicle in a collision increasing head Connecting Latch Plate To Buckl and neck injury A belt worn under the arm can cause internal injuries Ribs aren t as strong as shoulder bones Wear th
349. tenance is required for these compo nents Appearance Care and Protection from Corrosion Protection of Body and Paint from Corrosion Vehicle body care requirements vary according to geo graphic locations and usage Chemicals that make roads passable in snow and ice and chemicals that are sprayed on trees and road surfaces during other seasons are highly corrosive to the metal in your vehicle Outside parking which exposes your vehicle to airborne contami nants road surfaces on which the vehicle is operated extreme hot or cold weather and other extreme condi tions will have an adverse effect on paint metal trim and underbody protection The following maintenance recommendations will enable you to obtain maximum benefit from the corrosion resistance built into your vehicle Fluid Changes The fluid should be changed as follows Normal Usage Front Differential No Service Required Refer to Maintenance Schedule A Transfer Case Severe Usage Front Differential No Service Required Refer to Maintenance Schedule B Severe Usage is defined as Transfer Case 1 More than 50 of vehicle operation in stop and go traffic where vehicle is driven regularly for more than 45 minutes of continuous operation such as in heavy city or in construction zone traffic 2 Police taxi limousine commercial type operation or trailer towing where the vehicle driven regularly for more than 45 minutes of continuous operation e
350. the proper performance of the curtain airbags Along with the seat belts front airbags work with the instrument panel knee bolsters to provide improved protection for the driver and front passenger Side curtain airbags also work with seat belts to improve occupant protection The seat belts are designed to protect you in many types of collisions The front airbags deploy in moderate to severe frontal collisions If your vehicle is so equipped the side curtain airbag on the crash side of the vehicle is triggered in moderate to severe side collisions However even in collisions where the airbags deploy you need the seat belts to keep you in the correct position for the airbags to protect you prop erly WARNING Do not put anything on or around the front airbag covers or attempt to manually open them You may damage the airbags and you could be injured be cause the airbags are no longer functional These protective covers for the airbag cushions are de signed to open only when the airbags are inflating If your vehicle is equipped with side curtain airbags do not stack luggage or other cargo up high enough to block the location of the side curtain airbag The area where the side curtain airbag is located should remain free from any obstructions If your vehicle is equipped with side curtain airbags do not have any accessory items installed which will alter the roof including adding a sunroof to your vehicle Do not add roof
351. the P Park position e When shifting into P Park move the lever all the way forward until it stops and is fully seated e Look at the shift indicator on the instrument panel to ensure it is in the P Park position CAUTION Damage to the shifter could result if the selector lever is moved out of P Park before the ignition is turned from the LOCK to ON position Gear Ranges P Park P Park supplements the parking brake by locking the transmission The engine can be started in this range Never use P Park while the vehicle is in motion Apply the parking brake when leaving the vehicle in this range When parking on a flat surface place the gear selector in the P Park position first and then apply the parking brake When parking on a hill it is important to set the parking brake before placing the gear selector in P Park other wise the load on the transmission locking mechanism may make it difficult to move the selector out of park As an added precaution turn the front wheels toward the curb on a downhill grade and away from the curb on an uphill grade 216 STARTING AND OPERATING 12 1 D Overdrive This range should be used for most city and highway driving It provides the smoothest up shifts and down shifts and the best fuel economy Select the 3 range when frequent transmission shifting occurs when us ing the Overdrive range such as when operating the vehicle under heavy loadi
352. the use of 89 octane for optimum performance The routine use of premium gasoline is not recommended The use of premium gasoline will provide no benefit over high quality regular gasoline or mid grade gasoline and in some circumstances may result in poorer performance General Information This device complies with part 15 of the FCC rules and RSS 210 of Industry Canada Operation is subject to the following conditions e This device may not cause harmful interference e This device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired op eration The tire pressure sensors are covered under one of the following licenses United States uu KR5S120123 CANIS seas qax bad amp oss soa md 2671 S120123 262 STARTING AND OPERATING 183 1 1 611 00 0 _ __ 7 7 7 Reformulated gasolines contain oxygenates and are spe cifically blended to reduce vehicle emissions and im prove air quality The manufacturer supports the use of reformulated gaso lines Properly blended reformulated gasolines will pro vide excellent performance and durability of engine and fuel system components Gasoline Oxygenate Blends Some fuel suppliers blend unleaded gasoline with oxy genates such as 10 ethanol MTBE and ETBE Oxygen ates are required in some areas of the country during the winter months to reduce ca
353. tified by a limited use spare tire warning label located on the limited use spare tire and wheel assembly This tire may look like the original equipped tire on the front or rear axle of your vehicle but it is not Installation of this limited use spare STARTING AND OPERATING These indicators are mol grooves They will appear as bands when the tread depth becomes 1 16 inch 2 mm When the tread is worn to the tread wear indicators the tire should be replaced Many states have laws requiring tire replacement at this point WARNING Fast spinning tires can be dangerous Forces gener ated by excessive wheel speeds may cause tire dam age or failure A tire could explode and injure someone Do not spin your vehicle s wheels faster than 30 mph 48 km h for more than 30 seconds continuously when you are stuck and don t let anyone near a spinning wheel no matter what the speed Tread Wear Indicators Tread wear indicators are in the original equipment tires to help you in determining when your tires should be replaced 250 STARTING AND OPERATING Replacement Tires The tires on your new vehicle provide a balance of many characteristics They should be inspected regularly for wear and correct cold tire inflation pressure The manu facturer strongly recommends that you use tires equiva lent to the originals in size quality and performance when replacement is needed refer to the paragraph on Tread Wear Indicators
354. tions compound commands can be used For example instead of saying Setup and then Phone Pairing the following compound command can be said Setup Phone Pairing 510568 UConnect Switches The UConnect system can be used with any Hands Free Profile certified Bluetooth cellular phone See www chrysler com uconnect for supported phones If your cellular phone supports a different profile e g Headset Profile you may not be able to use any UCon nect features Refer to your cellular service provider or the phone manufacturer for details The UConnect system is fully integrated with the vehicle s audio system The volume of the UConnect 72 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 0 848 91 099 09080 0 5700 Cancel Command At any prompt after the voice on beep you can say Cancel and you will be returned to the main menu However in a few instances the system will take you back to the previous menu Pair Link UConnect System to a Cellular Phone To begin using your UConnect system you must pair your compatible Bluetooth enabled cellular phone NOTE The UConnect system use requires a cellular phone equipped with the Bluetooth Hands Free Profile version 0 96 or higher See www chrysler com uconnect for supported phones To complete the pairing process you will need to refer ence your cellular phone owner s manual One of the following vehicle specific we
355. to clear the resettable function being dis played To reset all resettable functions press and release the FUNCTION SELECT button a second time within 3 seconds of resetting the currently displayed function gt Reset ALL will display during this 3 second window and average fuel economy according to the current fuel tank level DTE cannot be reset through the FUNCTION SELECT button NOTE Significant changes in driving style or vehicle loading will greatly affect the actual drivable distance of the vehicle regardless of the DTE displayed value e When the DTE value is less than 30 miles 48 km estimated driving distance the DTE display will change to a text display of LOW FUEL This display will continue until the vehicle runs out of fuel Adding a significant amount of fuel to the vehicle will turn off the LOW FUEL text and a new DTE value will display e Trip A Shows the total distance traveled for trip A since the last reset e Trip B Shows the total distance traveled for trip B since the last reset UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 153 2 Press and hold the compass button for approximately 2 seconds 3 Press the SCROLL button until Calibrate Compass displays in the EVIC 4 Press and release the FUNCTION SELECT button to start the calibration The message CAL will display in the EVIC 5 Complete one or more 360 turns in an area free from large metal or metallic objects until the CAL mes
356. to skip forward or backward 1 to 6 selections Press the SEEK button once to move 1 selection twice to move 2 selections etc Fast Forward FF Press the FF button up momentarily to advance the tape in the direction that it is playing The tape will advance until the button is pressed again or the end of the tape is reached At the end of the tape the tape will play in the opposite direction Rewind RW Press the RW button momentarily to reverse the tape direction The tape will reverse until the button is pressed again or until the end of the tape is reached At the end of the tape the tape will play in the opposite direction station with the same selected PTY name The PTY function only operates when in the FM mode If a preset button is activated while in the PTY Program Type mode the PTY mode will be exited and the radio will tune to the preset station NOTE If you have selected a PTY with the tune knob simply pressing the tune button in will go directly to a PTY seek Buttons 1 6 Radio Mode These buttons tune the Radio to the stations that you commit to push button memory 12 AM 12 FM and 12 Satellite if equipped stations Operating Instructions Tape Player Insert the cassette with the exposed tape side toward the left and the mechanical action of the player will gently pull the cassette into the play position NOTE When subjected to extremely cold temperatures the tape mechanism may require a
357. ts will turn on approxi mately 10 seconds after the wipers are turned on The headlights will also turn off when the wipers are turned off if they were turned on by this feature To make your selection press and release the FUNCTION SELECT button until ON or OFF appears m UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 9 RADIO GENERAL INFORMATION Radio Broadcast Signals Your new radio will provide excellent reception under most operating conditions Like any system however car radios have performance limitations due to mobile op eration and natural phenomena which might lead you to believe your sound system is malfunctioning To help you understand and save you concern about these ap parent malfunctions you must understand a point or two about the transmission and reception of radio sig nals Two Types of Signals There are two basic types of radio signals AM or Amplitude Modulation in which the transmitted sound causes the amplitude or height of the radio waves to vary and FM or Frequency Modulation in which the frequency of the wave is varied to carry the sound door will cancel this feature To make your selection press and release the FUNCTION SELECT button until Off 45 sec 5 min 10 min 30 min or 0 min appears Confirmation of Voice Commands If Equipped When ON is selected all voice commands from the UConnect system are confirmed To make your selec tio
358. tter This feature can be turned on or off To change the current setting proceed as follows To unlock the doors Press and release the UNLOCK button on the transmitter once to unlock the driver s door or twice to unlock all doors The turn signal lights will flash to acknowledge the unlock signal The illuminated entry system will also turn on Remote Key Unlock Driver Door All Doors First This feature lets you program the system to unlock either the driver s door or all doors on the first press of the UNLOCK button on the transmitter To change the cur rent setting proceed as follows e For vehicles equipped with the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC refer to Remote Key Unlock under Personal Settings Customer Pro grammable Features under Electronic Vehicle In formation Center EVIC in Section 4 of this manual for details e For vehicles not equipped with the EVIC perform the following procedure E THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 19 NOTE Pressing the LOCK button on the transmitter while you are in the vehicle will activate the Security Alarm Opening a door with the Security Alarm activated will cause the alarm to sound Press the UNLOCK button to deactivate the Security Alarm Turn Headlights On with Remote Key Unlock This feature activates the headlights for up to 90 seconds when the doors are unlocked with the transmitter The time for this feature is programmable on vehicles
359. ty For example if XXX amount equals 1400 Ibs and there will be five 150 Ib passengers in your vehicle the amount of available cargo and luggage load capacity is 650 Ibs since 5 x 150 750 and 1400 750 650 Ibs 5 Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo being loaded on the vehicle That weight may not safely exceed the available cargo and luggage load capacity calculated in Step 4 6 If your vehicle will be towing a trailer load from your trailer will be transferred to your vehicle Consult this Loading The vehicle maximum load on the tire must not exceed the load carrying capacity of the tire on your vehicle You will not exceed the tire s load carrying capacity if you adhere to the loading conditions tire size and cold tire inflation pressures specified on the Tire and Loading Information placard and in the Vehicle Loading sec tion of this manual NOTE Under a maximum loaded vehicle condition gross axle weight ratings GAWR s for the front and rear axles must not be exceeded For further information on GAWR s vehicle loading and trailer towing refer to the Vehicle Loading section of this manual To determine the maximum loading conditions of your vehicle locate the statement The combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX kg or XXX Ibs on the Tire and Loading Information placard The combined weight of occupants cargo luggage and trailer tongue weight if appli
360. ugh several of your typical driving cycles In most situations the vehicle will drive normally and will not require towing The Malfunction Indicator Light flashes to alert you to serious conditions that could lead to immediate loss of power or severe catalytic converter damage The vehicle should be serviced as soon as possible if this occurs See page 306 for more information 23 Anti Lock Brake Light If Equipped G9 This light monitors the Anti Lock Brake System The light will turn on when the ignition switch is turned to the ON position and may stay on for as long as four seconds If the ABS light remains on or turns on while driving then the Anti Lock portion of the brake system is not functioning and service is required However the con ventional brake system will continue to operate normally if the BRAKE warning light is not on If the ABS light is on the brake system should be serviced as soon as possible to restore the benefits of Anti Lock brakes If the ABS light does not turn on when the Ignition switch is turned to the ON position have the light inspected by an authorized dealer See page 226 for more information 24 Low Fuel Indicator Light This light will turn on and a single chime will sound when the fuel level drops to 1 8 tank See page 265 for more information 148 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M e Vehicle information warning message displays e Personal Settings customer programma
361. until it clears the folded webbing Seat Belt Pretensioners The seat belts for both front seating positions are equipped with pretensioning devices that are designed to remove any slack from the seat belts in the event of a collision These devices improve the performance of the seat belt system by assuring that the belt is tight about the occupant in a collision Pretensioners work for all size occupants including those in child restraints ieeiimerffnquMumEMuD 00000000000 MDS e m Ro o Adjusting Upper Shoulder Belt As a guide if you are shorter than average you will prefer a lower position and if you are taller than average you will prefer a higher position When you release the anchorage try to move it up and down to make sure that it is locked in position In the rear seat move toward the center of the seat to position the belt away from your neck ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 9 BeltAlert Programming The Enhanced Warning System BeltAlert can be en abled or disabled by your authorized dealer or by performing the following steps NOTE DaimlerChrysler does not recommend deacti vating the Enhanced Warning System BeltAlert 1 With all doors closed and the ignition switch in any position except ON or START buckle the driver s seat belt 2 Turn the ignition switch to the ON RUN position but do not start the engine Wait for the Seat Belt Reminder Light to turn off
362. utton Memory When you are receiving a station that you wish to commit to push button memory press the SET button The symbol SET 1 will now show in the display window Select the button 1 6 you wish to lock onto this station and press and release that button If a button is not 4 Adjust the minutes using the right side Tune Audio control 5 To exit press any button knob or wait 5 seconds RW FF Radio Mode Pressing the rewind fast forward button causes the tuner to search for the next frequency in the direction of the arrows This feature operates in either AM FM or Satel lite if equipped frequencies TUNE Control Radio Mode Turn the right side rotary control clockwise to increase or counter clockwise to decrease the frequency AM FM Button Radio Mode Press the button to select AM or FM Modes Setting the Tone Balance and Fade Press the rotary TUNE control and BASS will display Turn the TUNE control to the right or left to increase or decrease the Bass tones Press the rotary TUNE control a second time and MID will display Turn the TUNE control to the right or left to increase or decrease the Mid Range tones 164 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 9 00000 Operation Instructions CD Mode NOTE The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC position to operate the radio Inserting The Compact Disc Single CD Player Gently insert one CD into the CD player with the CD label facing up The CD will autom
363. ve the steering The adjustable pedal system is designed to allow a wheel upward or downward as desired To lengthen or greater range of driver comfort for steering wheel tilt and shorten the steering column pull the steering wheel seat position This feature allows both the brake and outward or push it inward as desired To lock the steering accelerator pedal to move toward or away from the column in position push the control handle inward until driver to provide improved position with the steering fully engaged wheel The switch is located on the front side of the driver s seat cushion side shield WARNING Do not adjust the steering wheel while driving The telescoping adjustment must be locked while driv ing Adjusting the steering wheel while driving or iv p driving without the telescoping adjustment locked could cause the driver to lose control of the vehicle a com SOR REOR RRR RAKR B eR E E REOR V S SS LL e Adjustable Pedal Switch 106 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Press the switch forward to move the pedals forward ELECTRONIC SPEED CONTROL toward the front of the vehicle When engaged this device takes over the accelerator Press the switch rearward to move the pedals rearward operation at speeds greater than 25 mph
364. vel surface as far from the WARNINC edge of the roadway as possible Avoid icy or slippery areas e Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the vehicle close to moving traffic Pull far enough off 2 Set the parking brake and place the gear selector in the road to avoid the danger of being hit when PARK operating the jack or changing the wheel 3 Turn OFF the ignition Getting under a jacked up vehicle is dangerous The vehicle could slip off the jack and fall on you You could be crushed Never get any part of your body under a vehicle that is on a jack Never start or run the engine while the vehicle is on a jack If you need to get under a raised vehicle take it to a service center where it can be raised on a lift 4 Turn on the Hazard Warning Flasher The jack is designed to use as a tool for changing tires only The jack should not be used to lift the vehicle for service purposes The vehicle should be jacked on a firm level surface only Avoid ice or slippery areas SR SENSERI a AEAN Hazard Flasher Switch WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 287 Load Floor Handle a a 5 Passengers should not remain in the vehicle when the vehicle is being jacked 6 Block both the front and rear of the wheel diagonally opposite the jacking position For example if changing the right front tire block the left rear wheel Jack Location Spare Tire Stowage The jack and spare tire are both stowed under a hinge
365. ven more than 1 mile 1 6 km with either turn signal on Left Front Turn Signal Light Out with a single chime Left Rear Turn Signal Light Out with a single chime Right Front Turn Signal Light Out with a single chime Right Rear Turn Signal Light Out with a single chime RKE Battery Low with a single chime Personal Settings Not Available Vehicle Not in Park Press the FUNCTION SELECT button to accept a selection The FUNCTION SELECT button also advances the radio to the next preset station changes the side of the tape being played if so equipped or changes the current CD track being played if so equipped when the EVIC is in the Compass Temp Audio screen Press the SCROLL button to scroll through Trip Functions Navigation if equipped System Status Messages and Personal Settings Cus tomer Programmable Features The SCROLL button also seeks up and down the radio stations CD track numbers if so equipped or gt FUNC TION SELECT Button A v SCROLL Button satellite radio channels if so equipped when the EVIC is in the Compass Temp Audio screen Press the AUDIO MODE button to select the Compass Temp Audio screen This screen displays radio station frequencies any one of twelve radio station preset frequencies CD disc number CD track number tape or any one of 200 Satellite radio channels depending on which radio is in the vehicle J AUDIO MODE Button 150 UNDERSTANDING YOU
366. vidual problems between you your dealer and the manufacturer To contact NHTSA you may either call the Auto Safety Hotline toll free at 1 888 327 4236 TTY 1 800 424 9153 or go to http www NHTSA gov or write to NHTSA U S Dept of Transportation Washington DC 20590 You can also obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from the Hotline 378 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 99999000 00 1 2119 9 27099 7 Call Toll Free at e 1 800 890 4038 U S e 1 800 387 1143 Canada Or Visit us on the World Wide Web at e www techauthority daimlerchrysler com www daimlerchrysler ca manuals DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION UNIFORM TIRE QUALITY GRADES The following describes the tire grading categories estab lished by the National highway Traffic Safety Adminis tration The specific grade rating assigned by the tire s manufacturer in each category is shown on the sidewall of the tires on your car All Passenger Car Tires Must Conform to Federal Safety Requirements in Addition to These Grades Corporation vehicles A complete working knowledge of the vehicle system and or components is written in straightforward language with illustrations dia grams and charts Diagnostic Procedure Manuals Filled with diagrams charts and detailed illustrations these practical manuals make it easy for students and technicians to find and fix problems on computer controlled vehicle s
367. voice mail system or an automated service such as paging service or automated customer service Some services require immediate response selection in some instances that may be too quick for use of UConnect system Canada and 060 for Mexico The number dialed may not be applicable with the available cellular service and area The UConnect system does slightly lower your chances of successfully making a phone call as to that for the cell phone directly Your phone must be turned on and paired to the UConnect system to allow use of this vehicle feature in emergency situations when the cell phone has network coverage and stays paired to the UConnect system Towing Assistance If you need towing assistance e Press the Phone button to begin e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Iowing Assistance NOTE The Towing Assistance number dialed is based on the Country where the vehicle is purchased 1 800 528 2069 for USA 1 877 213 4525 for Canada 55 14 3454 for Mexico city and 1 800 712 3040 for outside Mexico city in Mexico ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 1 Turning Confirmation Prompts On Off Turning confirmation prompts off will stop the system from confirming your choices e g the UConnect system will not repeat a phone number before you dial it e Press the Phone button to begin e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Setup Confirmati
368. without spinning the wheels is most effective NOTE Turn off the Electronic Stability Program ESP if equipped or Traction Control System TCS if equipped before rocking the vehicle For details refer to Electronic Stability Program or Traction Control Sys tem in this manual 298 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 9 0 9 1 2 2 77 00 0 km h Exceeding these towing limits may cause a trans mission geartrain failure If the transmission is not op erative or if the vehicle is to be towed more than 30 miles 48 km the vehicle must be transported using a flat bed truck CAUTION e Do not attempt to tow this vehicle from the front with sling type towing equipment Damage to the front fascia will result If the transmission is not operative or if the vehicle is to be towed more than 30 miles 48 km then the only approved method of towing is with a flat bed truck Damage to the transmission may result Do not tow the vehicle from the rear Damage to the rear sheet metal and fascia will occur Do not push or tow this vehicle with another vehicle as damage to the bumper fascia and trans mission may result TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE WITHOUT THE IGNITION KEY Special care must be taken when the vehicle is towed with the ignition in the LOCK position The only ap proved method of towing without the ignition key is with a flat bed truck Proper towing equipment is neces sary to prevent damage to th
369. y s quse xe ya re des 182 1 1 7 77 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 135 188 stacks Video Entertainment System Sales Code XRV O Radio Operation is D lape Payer Operation gos wd ewe ord a siiri wd 189 0 7 8 W Satellite Radio If Equipped 184 SGD Player Opens ebore ere eenen 189 aA LE dd O Satellite Radio Operation 189 ction Sv umber Sirius Identification E Cassette Tape And Payer Maintenance gt Selecting Satellite Mode In REF RAQ And WE CD DVD Disc Maintenance 4 RAK Radios cc eos icex 8 ek eda weed oes 185 W Radio Operation And Cellular Phones 191 Selecting a Channel 186 W Climate Controls 191 O Storing And Selecting Pre Set Channels 186 O Manual Air Conditioning And Heating 191 0404 O Using The PTY Program Type Button If DYSON o Automatic Temperature Control If 186 i239 vun 0 08 7 Es 186 PTY Button Scan 3 d 9 fp PEMAQUID PTY Button Seek 5 a aout ea ea aaah 2 187 O Satellite Antenna llle aoa ys a 187 dest ou 95 ip 2 00967 7666601165 O Rear Washer Operation 201 ll Re
370. y equipped with your vehicle and should not be operated at sustained speeds over 75 mph 120 km h TIRE ROTATION RECOMMENDATIONS Tires on the front and rear axles of vehicles operate at different loads and perform different steering driving and braking functions For these reasons they wear at unequal rates and tend to develop irregular wear pat terns These effects can be reduced by timely rotation of tires The benefits of rotation are especially worthwhile with aggressive tread designs such as those on all season type tires Rotation will increase tread life help to maintain mud snow and wet traction levels and contribute to a smooth quiet ride Follow the Maintenance Schedules in Section 8 of this manual for the recommended tire rotation frequency for your type of driving Remember more frequent rotation NOTE In order to avoid damage to tires chains and your vehicle do not drive for a prolonged period of time on dry pavement Observe the tire chain manufacturer s instructions on method of installation operating speed and conditions for usage Always use the lower suggested operating speed if both the chain manufacturer and vehicle manufacture suggest a maximum speed This notice applies to all chain traction devices including link and cable radial chains SNOW TIRES Some areas of the country require the use of snow tires during winter Standard tires are of the all season type and satisfy this require
371. y supplemental addi tives Disposing of Used Engine Oil and Oil Filters Care should be taken in disposing of used engine oil and oil filters from your vehicle Used oil and oil filters indiscriminately discarded can present a problem to the environment Contact your dealer service station or governmental agency for advice on how and where used oil and oil filters can be safely discarded in your area l l Fo 20 00 10 20 CO 297 18 7 15 27 Temperature range anticipated before next ail change 10W 30 OIL VISCOSITY CHART The engine oil filler cap also shows the recommended engine oil viscosity for your engine For information on engine oil filler cap location refer to the Engine Com partment illustration in this section In areas where these grades are not generally available higher SAE grades may be used Lubricants that have both an SAE grade number and the API Certification Symbol or ACEA category shown on the container should be used 314 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 0 0 0 00 80 73 result in belt failure Also check belt routing to make sure there is no interference between the belts and other engine components See your authorized dealer for ser vice Spark Plugs Spark plugs must fire properly to assure engine perfor mance and emission control New plugs should be in stalled at the specified mileage The entire set should be replaced if there is any malfunction due to a faulty
372. you with no protection Inspect the belt system periodically checking for cuts frays or loose parts Damaged parts must be replaced immediately Do not disassemble or modify the system Seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a collision if they have been damaged bent retractor torn webbing etc Rear Center Lap Shoulder Belt Retractor Lock Out This feature is designed to lock the retractor whenever the 60 rear seat back is not fully latched This prevents someone from wearing the rear center lap shoulder belt when the rear seat back is not fully latched NOTE e If the rear center lap shoulder belt cannot be pulled out check that the rear seat back is fully latched e If the rear seat back is properly latched and the rear center lap shoulder belt still cannot be pulled out the Automatic Locking Retractor ALR system may be 38 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 2 70 9 9 0890909 0 Lap Shoulder Belt Untwisting Procedure Use the following procedure to untwist a twisted lap shoulder belt 1 Position the latch plate as close as possible to the anchor point 2 At about 6 to 12 inches 15 to 30 cm above the latch plate grasp and twist the belt webbing 180 to create a fold that begins immediately above the latch plate 3 Slide the latch plate upward over the folded webbing The folded webbing must enter the slot at the top of the latch plate 4 Continue to slide the latch plate up
373. ys place gas containers on the ground while filling NOTE e Tighten the gas cap until you hear a clicking sound This is an indication that the gas cap is tightened properly The Malfunction Indicator Light in the in strument cluster may turn on if the gas cap is not secured properly Make sure that the gas cap is tight ened each time the vehicle is refueled e When the fuel nozzle clicks or shuts off the fuel tank is full system could result from using an improper fuel tank filler tube cap gas cap A poorly fitting gas cap could let impurities into the fuel system A poorly fitting gas cap may cause the Malfunc tion Indicator Light to turn on To avoid fuel spillage and overfilling do not top off the fuel tank after filling When the fuel nozzle clicks or shuts off the fuel tank is full ee STARTING AND OPERATING 267 VEHICLE LOADING The load carrying capacity of your vehicle is shown on the Vehicle Certification Label This information should be used for passenger and luggage loading as indicated If the seatbacks are folded for carrying cargo do not exceed the specified GVWR and GAWR Vehicle Certification Label Your vehicle has a certification label attached to the rear of the driver s door The label contains the following information e Name of manufacturer e Month and year of manufacture e Gross Vehicle Weight Rating GVWR e Gross Axle Weight Rating GAWR fron
374. ystem If Equipped 2 66 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 2 7 ll Roof Luggage Rack If Equipped 129 W Load Leveling System If Equipped 131 A UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 67 Automatic Dimming Inside Mirror If Equipped This mirror automatically adjusts for annoying headlight glare from vehicles behind you You can turn the feature on or off by pressing the button at the base of the mirror A light in the button will indicate when the dimming feature is activated 3 8178924 Automatic Dimming Mirror MIRRORS Inside Day Night Mirror Adjust the mirror to center on the view through the rear window A two point pivot system allows for horizontal and vertical mirror adjustment RRR N NIGHT Adjusting Rearview Mirror Annoying headlight glare can be reduced by moving the small control under the mirror to the night position toward rear of vehicle The mirror should be adjusted while set in the day position toward windshield 68 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 7 8 000908909 lt 0 0 9909090000 0 9 WARNING Vehicles and other objects seen in the passenger side convex mirror will look smaller and farther away than they really are Relying too much on your passenger side convex mirror could cause you to collide with another vehicle or other object Use your inside mirror when judging the size or distance
375. ystems and features They show exactly how to find and correct problems the first time using step by step troubleshooting and driveability procedures proven diagnostic tests and a complete list of all tools and equipment Owner s Manuals These manuals have been prepared with the assistance of service and engineering specialists to acquaint you with specific Chrysler group vehicles Included are starting operating emergency and maintenance pro cedures as well as specifications capabilities and safety tips ee IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 379 WARNING The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on straight ahead braking traction tests and does not include acceleration cornering hydroplaning or peak traction characteristics Temperature Grades The temperature grades are A the highest B and C representing the tire s resistance to the generation of heat and its ability to dissipate heat when tested under controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel Sustained high temperature can cause the material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life and excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure The grade C corresponds to a level of performance which all passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No 109 Grades B and A repre sent higher levels of performance on the laboratory test wheel than the minimum required by law Treadwear The t

Dodge 2007 LX Magnum User's Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents